Full text of "A manual of infantry and rifle tactics, with honors paid by the troops, inspections--reviews, &c"

See other formats

IHti^J.*^ HfcAi^^

COL. GEORGE WASHINGTON FLOWERS
MEMORIAL COLLECTION

TRINITY COLLEGE LIBRARY
DURHAM, N.C.

7//> ,0/ ^ '^':^t!^<uM^^

The Gift of.

Date I ^3/

(^,0i-^->%J^^

□DDnnan

...JL ■-(■.

nDanoDD

I-

/fi to//z//orty.

.9'''6c

5 "• SL

Ofn/xr.»f.

DanDapD : nnnonDnaiirnnannaaa ncnnncn anaadnn , nnoDDnn ■ nnnannn '00000001^:

^S^a Rri^k^agiMiBLa

'J^..!:ii^.i:iL'y:.iii.M:J!iL.^Mli^.:'J,

\ic

^Hk

Ofnptvf^

Len Wijia'

LdKJ f'o/or and ^"/rrr/

pS.p.Mojler^u

1 M 1 1 1 I M

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

M 1 1! I 1 1 1

1 r 1 n I 1 1 1 r

1 1 1 1 1 1 M 1

I 1 M 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1

rTTI"! r !_1_L1^

5 B

A □

^" fia/aon.

y'^ J'la/,.

' '\ _■_"_' /

r~l (,r/>/a'/f

Kl /?>.■'/ ■■'>''-'j'

B Tkuri Ser/'
El /»/////'( -V//'

A MANUAL

fttfimti'i mt\ %iiU %Mi\0,

WITH

HONORS PAID BY THE TEOOPS,

INSPECTIONS— REVIEWS, &c.

ABRIDGED AND COMPILED BY

RICHMOND, Va.

PUBLISHED BY A. MORRIS.
1861.

Lieut. Col. WM. H. RICHARDRON, "

Graduate and formerly assistant Instructor of Tactics, Virginia J

Military Institute.

CHAS. H. WYNNE, PEINTEB, BICHMOND.

PREFACE. \

This compilation was undertaken to meet a pressing
and urgent call for books of tactics, at a time when
none of the more elaborate works, which had been in
use, could be procured.

It is an abridgment of Hardee — the "Balance
step," and "The manual of arms for the muskef
being introduced from Gilham's manual, in the school
of the soldier. Also, " Honors to be paid by the ,
troops " — under which head will be found the forms
for review, inspection, dress parade, guard mounting,
duties of guards, &c. ; placed after the tactical part of
the book.

The arrangement of the book is not such as it would
have been, had not unavoidable circumstances inter-
posed to change it. But this will not materially inter-
fere with its use.

Paragraphs retain their original numbers, as in the
originals.

The work is offered to the military of the Confede-
rate States, with the hope that it may be found useful
as a book of reference — although with diffidence — for

*t>'

17638^

9Q ^1

iv Preface*

the haste in which it was commenced, and the numer-
ous difficulties attending its preparation, have, it is
feared, been productive of errors, which the compiler
will regret — but he trusts will be charitably over-
looked.

W. H. K., Jr.

Richmond, June, 1861.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

TITLE FIRST.

Article First.

PAGE

Formation of a regiment in order of battle or in line, 13

Posts of Company officers, sergeants, and corporals, 14

Posts of field ofi&cers and regimental stafi" 15

Posts of field music and band 16

Color-guard 17

General guides 17

Article Second.

Instruction of the battalion 18

Instruction of sergeants 18

*' " corporals 19

Commands 19

TITLE SECOND.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.

Part First.

General rules and division of the school of the sol-
dier 20

Lesson I. — Position of the soldier ' 21

Lesson II. — Facings 22

Lesson III. — Balance step 23

1 i t} 6 O -i

vi Table of Contents.

PAGE

Principles of the direct step, in common and quick

time 25

Lesson IV. — Principles of the double quick step.... 26

Part ^Second.

General rules 28

Lesson I. — Principles of shouldered arms 29

Lesson IL — Manual of arms for the rifle 30

Lesson III. — Load in four times, and at will 49

Lesson IV. — Firings 52

Lesson V. — Fire and load, kneeling, and do. lying.. 54

Lesson VI.— Bayonet exercise 65

Manual of arms for the mushet.

Principles of shouldered arms ...» 57

Support arms 57

Present arms 58

Order arms 59

Charge bayonet 60

Load in ten times 61

Load in four times, and unfix bayonet 67

Fix bayonet 68

Secure and trail arms 69

Right shoulder shift arms, 1 r.Q

Arms at will, J

Inspection of arms 71

Fix bayonet, spring rammers, > yo

Arms-port, ^

Part Third.

Lesson I. — Alignments 73

Lesson II. — March by the front, ditto, in double
quick time. Face about in marching, and march

backwards 75

Lesson III. — March by the flank, ditto, in double

quick time 79

Table of Contents. vii

PAGE

Lesson IV. — General principles of wheeling — from
a halt, marcUing. Turning. Both, in double

quick time 83

Stack arms 87

Take arms ■. 88

TITLE THIRD.
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

General rules and division of the school of the com-
pany 90

Manner of forming the company 90

Lesson First.

Article I. — To open ranks 92

Article II. — Alignments in open ranks ^3

Article III. — To close ranks 94

Article IV. — Alignments and manual of arms in

closedranks 95

Lesson Second.

Article I. — To load in four times, and at will 96

Article II. — To fire by company 96

Article III. — To fire by file 97

Article IV. — To fire by rank 98

Article V. — To fire by the rear rank 99

Lesson Third.

Article I, — To advance in line of battle 100

Article II. — To halt the company marching in line

of battle, and to align it 102

Article III. — Oblique march in line of battle 103

viii Tahle of Contents.

PAGE

Akticlt: IV. — To mark time, to march in double

quick time, and the back step 104

Article V. — To march in retreat 105

Lesson Fourth.

Article I. — To march by the flank 107

Article II. — To change direction by file 109

Article III. — To halt the company marching by a

tiank, and to face it to the front 109

Article IV. — The company marching by the flank,

to form it on the right (or left), by file, into line, 110
Article V. — The company marching by the flank,
to form it by company in platoon into line, and
cause it to face to the right and left, in march-
ing 112

Lesson Fifth.

Article I. — To break into column by platoon,

^ either at a halt, or marching 114

Article II. — To march in column 118

Article III. — To change direction 119

Article IV. — To halt the column 121

Article V, — Being in column by platoon, to form
to the right (or left) into line of battle, either at
a halt, or marching 122

Lesson Sixth.

Article I. — To break the company into platoons,

and to re-form the company 127

Article II. — Being in column, to break files to the

rear, and to cause them to re-enter the line 129

Article IIL — To march in column in route, and to

execute the movements incident thereto 132

Article IV. — Countermarch 137

Article V. — Being in column by platoon, to form

on the right (or left) into line of battle 139

Tahle of Contents. ix

PAGE

Formation of a company from two ranks into single

rank, and reciprocally 141

Formation of a company from two ranks into four,

and reciprocally, at a halt, and in march 143

Manual of the sword or sabre, for officers 147

Color-salute 148

Manual for relieving sentinels 148

Instruction for parade-rest 149

TITLE FOURTH.
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

Formation of the battalion 150

Composition and march of the color-escort 160

Honors paid to the color 151

Part First.

Article I. — To open and close ranks " 152

Article III. — The firings 153

Part Second.

Article I. — To break into column, by company, or
division, to the right or left, from a halt, and in
march 158

Article II. — To break to the rear by the right or
left of companies, from a halt and in march. To
advance or retire by the right or left of compa-
nies, from a halt, or in march. From same
movement to form line to the front 160

Article III. — Ploy the battalion into close column,

from a halt, or in march 164

Part Third.

Article I. — March in column at full distance — the
right about 169

X Table of Contents.

Page.
Article III. — Change of direction in column at full

distance 171

Article IV. — Halt the column .^ 172

Article V. — Close the column to half distance, or

in mass, on the leading or rear company, from a

halt, or in march 173

Article VI. — March in column at. half distance or

closed in mass 177

Article VII. — Change direction in column at half

distance 177

Article VIII. — Change direction of a column closed

in mass, marching or from a halt 178

Article IX. — Take distances 181

Article X. — Countermarch of a column at full or

half distance ; or closed in mass 185

Article XL — Being in column by company, closed

in mass, to form divisions, from a halt, or in

march, 187

Part Foitrth.

Article I. — Manner of determining the line of bat-
tle 190

Article II. — Different modes of passing from column

at full distance into line of battle ^.... 190

Article III. — Fqrmation in line of battle by two

movements; .. 204

Article IV. — Different modes of passing from co-
lumn at half distance into line of battle 206

Article y. — Deployment of columns closed in mass, 208

Part Fifth.

Article I. — To advance in line of battle 216

Article III. — To halt the battalion, marching in line

of battle, and to align it 220

Article V. — To march in retreat in line of battle... 223
Article VI. — To halt the battalion, marching in re-
treat, and to face it to the front 225

Tahle of Contents. xi

PAGE.

Article VIII. — Passage of obstacles, advancing and

retreating 225

Article IX. — To pass a defile, in retreat, by the

right or left flank 229

Article X. — To march by the flank 231

Article XI. — To form on the right or left by file

into line 233

Article XII. — Changes of front 235

Article XIII. — Formation and deployment of the
column doubled on the centre, from a halt, and
in marching, and to form it into line to the right

or left 238

Article XIV. — Dispositions against cavalry 244

Article XV.— The rally 258

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

General principles, &c 260

Article I. — Deployments; extend or close intervals;

relievG%kirmishers 262

Article II. — March to the front ; in retreat ; by the

flank; change direction.. 271

Article III. — Firings 276

Article IV. — The rally and the assembly 280

Article V. — Deploy a battalion as skirmishers, to

rally it 289

HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS.

INSPECTIONS— REVIEWS, &c.

Compliments to officers of high rank — civil and mili-
tary 294

Artillery salutes 297

Escorts of honor , 298

xii Tahle of Contents.

PAGE

Funeral honors 298

Form of inspection for infantry 302

Forms of parade 306

To form the regiment or battalion 306

Dress parade 307

Keview of a battalion of infantry 311

Guard-mounting 317

Pveception of one body of troops by another 322

Musters \ 323

The roster, or details for service 324

Duties of guards 326

Guards 330

Police Guards 332

Pickets 336

Grand-guards and outposts 336

Article XIII.

DUTIES OF CAPTAINS— COMPANIES— DUTIES IN
CAMP AND GARRISON, Etc.

Duties of Captains, &c .§ 343

Duties in camp and garrison 346

Camps.

Camp of infantry 349

Cautionments 350

Marches 351

Soldiers Rations — mode of cooking them 355

Suggestions to Soldiers 358

RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS.

TITLE FIRST.

Article First.

Formation of a Regiment in order of battle, sr in

line.

1. A REGIMENT IS composed of ten companies, which
■vrill habitually be posted from ricjht to left, in the
following order: first, sixth, fourth, ninth, third, eighth,
fifth, tenth, seventh, second, according to- the rank of
captains.

2. With a less number of companies the same prin-
ciple will be observed, viz: the first captain will com-
mand the right company, the second captain the left
company, the third captain the right centre company,
and so on.

3. The companies thus posted will be designated
from right to left, frst company, seeo7id company,
&c. This designation will be observed in the ma-
noeuvres.

4. The first two companies on the right, whatever
their denomination, will form the frst division; the
next two companies the second divi&ion ; and so on,
to the left.

5. Each company will be divided into two equal
parts, which will be designated as the first and second
platoon, counting from the right ; and each platoon,
in like manner, will be subdivided into two sections.

14 Formation of the Battalion.

6. In all exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment,
or part of a regiaient, composed of two or more com-
panies, will be designated as a battalion.

7. The color, with a guard to be hereinafter desig-
nated, will be posted on the left of the right centre
battalion company. That company, and all on its
right, will be denominated the right wing of the bat-
talion ; the remaining companies the left loing.

8. The formation of a regiment is in two ranks ;
and each company will be formed into two ranks, in
the following manner: the corporals will be posted in
the front rank, and on the right and left of platoons,
according to height ; the tallest corporal and the tall-
est man will form the first file, the next two tallest
men will form the second file, and so on to the last
file, which will be composed of the shortest corporal
and the shortest man.

9. The odd and even files, numbered as one, two, in
the company, from right to left, will form groups of
four men, who will be designated comrades in battle.

10. The distance from one rank to another will be
thirteen inches, measured from the breasts of the
rear rank men to the backs or knapsacks of the front
rank men.

11. For manoeuvring, the companies of a battalion
will always be equalized, by transferring men from
the strongest to the weakest companies.

Posts of Company Officers, Sergeants and Corporals.

12. The company officers and sergeants are nine in
number, and will be posted in the following manner:

13. The captain on the right of the company, touch-
ing with the left elbow.

14. The first sergeant in the rear rank, touching
with the left elbow, and covering the captain. In the
manoeuvres he will be denominated covering sergeant^
or right guide of the company.

Formation of the Battalion. '15

15. The remaining officers and sergeants will be
posted as file closers, and two paces behind the rear
ranks

IG. ThQjirst lieutenant^ opposite the centre of the
fourth section.

17. The second lieutenant^ opposite the centre of the
first platoon.

18. The third lieutenant^ opposite the centre of the
second platoon.

19. The second sergeant, opposite the second file
from the left of the company. In the manoeuvres he
will be designated left guide of the company.

20. The third sergeant, opposite the second file from
the right of the second platoon.

21. T\\Q> fourth sergeant, opposite the second file from
the left of the first platoon.

22. l^haffth sergeant, opposite the second file from
the right of the first platoon.

23. In the left or tenth company of the battalion,
the second sergeant will be posted in the front rank,
and on the left of the battalion.

24. The corporals will be posted in the front rank,
as prescribed No. 8.

25. Absent officers and sergeants will be replaced —
officers by sergeants, and sergeants by corporals. The
colonel may detach a first lieutenant from one com-
pany to command another, of which both the captain
and first lieutenant are absent ; but this authority will
give no right to a lieutenant to demand to be so de-
tached.

Posts of Field Officers and Regimental Staff.

26. The field officers, colonel, lieutenant colonel and
major, are supposed to be mounted, and on active
service shall be on horseback. The adjutant, when
the battalion is manoeuvring, will be on foot.

27. The colonel will take post thirty paces in rear

16 formation of the Battalion.

of the file-closers, and opposite the centre of the bat-
talion. This distance will be reduced whenever there
is a reduction in the front of the battalion. »

28. The lieutenant colonel and the major will be
opposite the centres of the right and left wings re-
spectively, and twelve paces in rear of ihe file-closers.
The junior major, if there be one, twelve paces be-
hind the centre of the battalion. In column, he is
six paces from the guides, abreast of the centre com-
pany or division.

29. The adjutant and sergeant major will be oppo-
site the right and left of the battalion, respectively,
and eight paces in rear of the file-closers.

30. The adjutant and sergeant major will aid the
lieutenant colonel and major, respectively, in the ma-
noeuvres.

31. The colonel, if absent, will be replaced by the
lieutenant colonel, and the latter by the major. If all
the field officers be absent, the senior captain will
command the battalion ; but if either be present, he
will not Call the senior captain to act as field officer,
except in case of evident necessity.

32. The quarter-master, surgeon, and other staff
officers, in one rank, on the left of the colonel, and
three paces in his rear.

33. The quarter-master sergeant, on a line with the
front rank of the field music, and two paces on the
right.

Posts of Field Music and Band.

34. The buglers will be drawn up in four ranks,
and posted twelve paces in rear of the file-closers, the
left opposite the centre of the left centre company.
The senior principal musician will be two paces in
front of the field music, and the other two paces in
the rear.

35. The regimental band, if there be one, will be

Formation of the Battalion. 17

drawn up in two or four ranks, according to its num-
bers, and posted five paces in rear of the field music,
having one of the principal musicians at its head.

Color-guard.

36. In each battalion the color-guard will be com-
posed of eight corporals, and posted on the left of the
right centre company, of which company, for the time
being, the guard will make a part.

37. The front rank will be composed of a sergeant,
to be selected by the colonel, who will be called, for
the time, color-hearer, with the two ranking corporals,
respectively, on his right and left ; the rear rank will
be composed of the three corporals next in rank ; and
the three remaining corporals will be posted in their
rear, and on the line of tile-closers. The left guide of
the color company, when these three last named cor-
porals are in the rank of file-closers, will be immedi-
ately on their left.

38. In battalions with less than five companies pre-
sent, theie will be no color-guard, and no display of
colors, except it may be at reviews.

39. The corporals for the color-guard will be selected
from those most distinguished for regularity and pre-
cision, as well in their positions under arms, as in
their marching. The latter advantage, and a just
carriage of the person, are to be more particularly
sought for in the selection of the color-bearer.

General Guides.

40. There will be two general guides in each batta-
lion, selected, for the time, by the colonel, from among
the sergeants (other than first sergeants) the most dis-
tinguished for carriage under arms, and accuracy in
marching.

41. These sergeants will be respectively denomina-
ted, in the manoeuvres, right general guidcy and left

18 Instruction of the Battalion.

f/eneral guide, and be posted in the line of file-closers;
the first in rear of the ri<^ht, and the second in rear of
the left flank of the battalion.

Article Second.
Instruction of the Battalion.

42. Every commanding officer is responsible for the
instruction of his command. lie will assemble the
officers together for theoretical and practical instruc-
tion as often as he may judge necessary, and when
unable to attend to this duty in person, it will be dis-
charged by the officer next in rank.

43. Captains will be held responsible for the in-
struction of their non-commissioned officers, and the ad-
jutant for the instruction of the non-commissioned staff.

45. In the school of the soldier, the company officers
will be the instructors of squads ; but if there be not
a sufficient number of company officers present, intel-
ligent sergeants may be substituted.

46. In the school of the company, the lieutenant-
colonel and the major, under the colonel, will be
the principal instructors, substituting frequently the
captain of the company, and sometimes one of the
lieutenants.

49. Instructors wnll explain, in a few clear and
precise words, the movement to be executed ; and
not to overburden the memory of the men, they will
always use the same terms to explain the same prin-
ciples.

51. The sabre bayonet should only be fixed when
required to be used, either for attack or defence ; the
exercises and manoeuvres will be executed without the
bayonet.

Instruction of Sergeants.

57. Their theoretical instruction should include
the School of the Soldier, the School of the Com-

Instruction of the Battalion. 19

pany,_ and the Drill for Skirmishers. Tliey should
likewise know all the details of service, and the regu-
lations prescribing their duties in garrison and in
campaign.

Instruction of Corporals.

59. Their theoretical instruction should include the
School of the Soldier, and such regulations as prescribe
their duties in garrison and in campaign.

Commands.

There are three kinds.

G2. The command o^ caution, which is attention.

63. The preparatorr/ command, which indicates the
movement which is to be executed.

64. The command of execution, such as march or halt,
or, in the manual of arms, the part of command which
causes an execution.

_ 65. The tone of command should be animated, dis-
tinct, and of a loudness proportioned to the number of
men under instruction.

66. The commnrvd. at teyition is pronounced at the top
of the voice, dwelling on the last syllable.
^ 67. The command of execution will be pronounced
in a tone firm and brief.

68. The commands of caution and the preparatory
commands are herein distinguished by italics, those of
execution by capitals.

69. Those preparatory commands which, from their
length, are difiicult to be pronounced at once, must be
divided into two or three parts, Avith an ascending
progression in the tone of command, but always iu
such a manner that the tone of execution may be
more energetic and elevated ; the divisions are indicated
by a hyphen. The parts of commands which are placed
in a parenthesis, are not pronounced.

TITLE SECOND.

SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.

General Rules and division of the School of the
Soldier.

70. The object of this school being the individual
and progressive instruction of the recruits, the in-
structor never requires a movement to be executed
until he has given an exact explanation of it ; and he
executes, himself, the movement which he commands,
so as to join example to precept. lie accustoms the
recruit to take, by himself, the position which is ex-
plained— teaches him to rectify it only M'hen required
by his want of intelligence — and sees that all the
movements are performed without precipitation.

71. Each movement should be understood before
passing to another. After they have been properly
executed in the order laid down in each lesson, the
instructor no longer confines himself to that order ; on
the contrary, he should change it, that he may judge
of the intelligence of the men.

72. The instructor allows the men to rest at the end
of each part of the lessons, and oftener, if he thinks
proper, especially at the commencement ; for this pur-
pose he commands Rest.

73. At the command Rest, the soldier is no longer
required to preserve immobility, or to remain in his
place. If the instructor wishes merely to relieve the
attention of the recruit, he commands, in place — Rest;
the soldier is then not required to preserve his immo-
bility, but he always keeps one of his feet in its place.

74. When the instructor wishes to commence the

School of the Soldier— Vart I. 21

instruction, he commands — Attention ; at this com-
mand, the soldier takes his position, remains motion-
less, and fixes his attention.

75. The School of the Soldiei^ will be divided into
three parts : the first, comprehendino; what ought to be
taught to recruits without arms ; the second, the manual
of arms, the loadings and firings ; the third, the prin-
ciples of alignment, the march by the front, the differ-
ent steps, the march by the flank, the principles of
wheeling, and those of change of direction ; also, long
marches in double quick time and the run.

PART FIRST.

77. This will be taught, if practicable, to one re-
cruit at a time ; but three or four may be united, when
the number be great, compared with that of the in-
structors. In this case, the recruits will be placed in
a single rank, at one pace from each other. In this
part, the recruits will be without arms.

Lesson I.
Position of the Soldier.

78. Heels on the same line, as near each other as the
conformation of the man will permit;

The feet turned out equally, and forming with each
other something less than a right angle ;

The knees straight without stiffness ;

The body erect on the hips, inclining a little for-
ward ;

The shoulders square and falling equally ;

The arms hanging naturally;

The elbows near the body ;

The palm of the hand turned a little to the front,
the little finger behind the seam of the pantaloons ;

22 School of the Soldier — Part I.

The head erect and square to the front, without con-
straint;

The chin near the stock, without covering it;

The eyes fixed straight to the front, and striking the
ground about the distance of fifteen paces.

80. The instructor having given the recruit the po-
sition of the soldier without arms, will now teach
him the turning of the head and eyes. He will com-
mand :

1. Eyes — Right. 2. Front.

81. At the word right, the recruit will turn the head
gently, so as to bring the inner corner of the left eye
in a line with the buttons of the coat, the eyes fixed on
the line of the eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in,
the same rank.

82. At the second command, the head will resume
the direct or habitual position.

83. The movement of Eyes — Left will be executed
by inverse means.

84. The instructor will take care that the movement of
the head does not derange the squareness of the shoul-
ders, which will happen if the movement of the former
be too sudden.

Lesson II.

Facings.

88. Facing to the right and left will be executed in
one time, or pause. The instructor will command :

1. Squad, 2. Right (or Ze/i{)--FACE.

89. At the second command, raise the right foot
slightly, turn on the left heel, raising the toes a little,
and then replace the right heel by the side of the left,
and on the same line.

90. The full face to the rear (or front) will be exe-

School of the Soldier— Vd^vi I. 23

cuted in two times, or pauses, the instructor will com-
mand :

1. Squad. 2. About — Face.

91. {First time.) At the word about, the recruit will
turn on the left heel, bring the left toe to the front,
carry the right foot to the rear, the hollow opposite to,
and full three inches from, the left heel, the feet square
to each other.

92. {Second time.) At the word yacc, the recruit will
turn on both heels, raise the toes a little, extend the
hams, face to the rear, bringing, at the same time, the
right heel by the side of the left.

93. The instructor will take care that these motions
do not derange the position of the body.

Balance Step.*

87. Before commencing the march the soldier should
always be instructed in the balance step, the object of
which is to teach him the free movement of his limbs,
while he at the same time preserves perfect squareness
of the shoulders, with the greatest steadiness of the
body; no labor should be spared to attain this object,
which lies at the very foundation of good marching.

The squad being at attention, the instructor com-
mands :

Left foot — Forward.

At this command, the soldier will throw his left foot
gently forward, about twenty-four inches, balancing
his body well on the right foot, without changing the
position of the shoulders, and without the body losing
its erect position. The toe should be turned out as
in the position of the soldier, the foot about three

*The numbers of these paragraphs are retained with them,
from Gilham's Manual.

24 School of the Soldier — Part I.

inches from the ground and very nearly parallel to it,
the toe being very slightly depressed.
At the command :

Left foot— Rear.

The left foot is brought gently back, the ball of the
left foot close to the right heel, the leg straight, toe
raised, and heel depressed.

As soon as the soldier becomes steady in the new
position, the instructor repeats the command, left foot
forward, then left foot rear, for several times, and then
commands:

Halt.

At which the left foot, either advanced or to the
rear, is brought to the right, as in the position of the
soldier.

The instructor then causes the soldier to balance on
the left foot, by advancing and retiring the right, as
has been directed for the left.

The Direct Step.

88. After the soldier is sufficiently instructed in the
balance step to execute it on either foot without losing
his balance, the instructor will proceed to instruct
him in the mechanism of the direct step. For this
purpose he will command ;

1. Bp the numbers — Forward. 2, One.

At the command one, the soldier will throw forward
the left foot, as in the position of left foot fortvard; the
instructor then commands :

Two.

At this command the weight of the body is thrown
forward, the left foot striking the ground without

School of the Soldier— Vtixi I. 25

shock, at the distance of twenty-eight inches from the
right; the body assumes the perpendiciihir position,
and the right foot is brought up to the position of
right foot rear. The right foot is then brought for-
ward at the command one, and the step completed at
the command iwo ; thus the squad is made to advance
step by step. The halt is executed as in the balance
step.

Lesson III.
Principles of the Direct Step.

94. The length of the direct step, or pace, in com-
mon time, will bo twenty-eight inches, reckoning from
heel to heel, and in swiftness, at the rate of ninety in
a minute.

95. The instructor, seeing the recruit confirmM in
his position, will explain to him the principles and
mechanism of this step— placing himself six or seven
paces from, and facing to, the recruit. lie will him-
self execute slowly the step in the way of illustration,
and then command :

1. Squad, forward. 2. Common time. 3. March.*

9G. At the first command, the recruit will throw the
w^eight of the body on the right leg, without bending
the left knee.

97. At the third command, he will smartly, but
without a jerk, carry straight forward the left foot
twenty-eight inches from the right, the sole near the
ground, the Lam extended, the toe a little depressed,
and as also the knee slightly turned out; he will, at the
same time, throw the weight of the body forward, and
plant flat the left foot, without shock, precisely at the
distance where it finds itself from the right when the
weight of the body is brought forward, the whole of

*The2<;l and 3d of these commands will be given whenever in
the manoeuvre-s, it is desirable to move at the ordinary step. '
o

26 JSchool of the Soldier — Part I.

which will now rest on the advanced foot. The recruit
will next, in like manner, advance the ri^ht foot and
plant it as above, the heel twenty-eig;ht inches from
the heel of the left foot, and thus continue to march
without crossing the legs, or striking the one against
the other, without turning the shoulders, and preserv-
ing always the face direct to the front.

98. When the instructor shall wish to arrest the
inarch, he will command :

1. Squad. 2. Halt.

99. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant when either foot is coming to the ground,
the foot in the rear will be brought up, and planted
by the side of the other, without shock.

100. The instructor will indicate, from time to time,
to the recruit, the cadence of the step by giving the
command one at the instant of raising a foot, and two
at the instant it ought to be planted, observing the
cadence of ninety steps in a minute. This method
will contribute greatly to impress upon the mind the
two motions into which the step is naturally divided.

102. The principles of the step in quick time are
the same as for common time, but its swiftness is at
the rate of one hundred and ten steps per minute.

103. The instructor wishing the squad to march in
quick time, will command :

1. Squad, forward. 2. March.

Lesson IV.
Principles of the Double Quick Step.

104. The length of the double quick step is thirty-
three inches, and its swiftness at the rate of one hun-
dred and sixty-five steps per minute.

105. The instructor wishing to teach the recruits

School of the Soldier— Vurt I. 27

the principles and mechanism of the double quick
step, will command :

1. Double quick ttep. 2. March.

106. At the first command, the recruit will raise his
hands to a level with his hips, the hands closed, the
nails towards the body, the elbows to the rear.

107. At the second command he will raise to the
front his left leg bent, in order to give to the knee the
greatest elevation, the part of the leg between the
knee and the instep vertical, the toe depressed ; he
will then replace his foot in its former position ; with
the right leg he will execute what has just been pre-
scribed for the left, and the alternate movement of the
legs will be continued until the command :

1. Squad. 2. Halt,

108. At the second command, the recruit will bring
the foot which is raised by the side of the other, and
dropping at the same time his hands by his side, will
resume the position of the soldier without arms.

109. The instructor placing himself seven or eight
paces from, and facing the recruit, will indicate the
cadence by the commands, one and two, given alter-
nately at the instant each foot should be brought to
the ground, which at first will be in common time, but
its rapidity will be gradually augmented.

110. The recruit being suflSciently established in the
principles of this step, the instructor will command :

1. Squad forward. 2. Double quick. 3. March.

111. At the first command, the recruit will throw
the weight of his body on the right leg.

112. At the second command, he will place his arms
as indicated No. 106.

113. At the third command, he will carry forward

28 Sclwol of the Soldier— Fsivt 11.

the left foot, the \og slightly bent, the knee somewhat
raised — will plant his left foot, the toe first, thirty-
three inches from the right, and with the right foot
will then execute what has just been prescribed for
the left. This alternate movement of the legs will
take place by throwing the weight of the body on the
foot that is planted, and by allowing a natural, oscil-
latory motion to the arms.

114. The double quick step may be executed with
different degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circum-
stances the cadence of this step may be increased to
one hundred and eighty per minute. At this rate a
distance of four thousand yards would be passed over
in about twenty-five minutes.

115. The recruits will be exercised also in running.

116. The principles are the same as for the double
quick step, the only difference consisting in a greater
degree of swiftness.

117. It is recommended in marching at double quick
time, or the run, that the men should breathe as much
as possible through the nose, keeping the mouth closed.
Experience has proved that, by conforming to this
principle, a man can pass over a much longer distance
and with less fatigue.

PART SECOND.

GENERAL RULES.

118. The instructor will not pass the men to this
second part until they shall be well established in the
position of the body, and in the manner of marching
at the different steps.

119. lie will then unite four men, whom he will
place in the same rank, elbow to elbow, and in-
struct them in the position of shouldered arms, as
follows :

School of the Soldier— T art II. 29

MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE RIFLE.

Lesson I.

Principles of Shouldered Arms.

120. The recruit being placed as explained in the
first lesson of the first part, the instructor will cause
him to bend therio;ht arm slightly, and place the piece
in it, in the following manner:

121. The piece in the right hand — the barrel nearly
vertical and resting in the hollow of the shoulder —
the guard to the front, the arm hanging nearly at its
full length near the body ; the thumb and fore-finger
embracing the guard, the remaining fingers closed to-
gether, and grasping the swell of the stock just under
the cock, which rests on the little finger.

Lesson II.
Manual of Arms.

127. The manual of arms will be taught to four
men, placed, at first, in one rank, elbow to elbow, and
afterwards in twf> ranks.

128. Each command will be executed in one time
(or pause), but this time will be divided into motions,
the better to make known the mechanism.

129. The rate (or swiftness) of each motion, in the
manual of arms, with the exceptions herein indicated,
is fixed at the ninetieth part of a minute ; but, in
order not to fatigue the attention, the instructor will,
at first, look more particularly to the execution of the
motions, without requiring a nice observance of the
cadence, to which he will bring the recruits progres-
sively, and after they shall have become a little famil-
iarized with the handling of the piece.

30 School of the Soldier— VdiXt II.

130. As the motions relative to the cartridge, to the
rammer, and to the fixing and unfixing of the bayonet,
cannot be executed at the rate prescribed, nor even
with a uniform swiftness, they will not be subjected to
that cadence. The instructor will, however, labor to
cause these motions to be executed with promptness,
and, above all, with regularity.

131. The last syllable of the command will decide
the brisk execution of the first motion of each time (or
pause). The commands two, three, and four, will de-
cide the brisk execution of the other motions. As
soon as the recruits shall well comprehend the posi-
tions of the several motions of a time, they will be
taught to execute the time without resting on its dif-
ferent motions; the mechanism of the time will never-
theless be observed, as well to give a perfect use of the
piece, as to avoid the sinking of, or slurring over,
either of the motions.

132. The manual of arms will be taught in the fol-
lowing progression. The instructor will command:

Support — Aems.
One time and three motions.

133. [First motion.) Bring the piece, with the
right hand, perpendicularly to the front and between
the eyes, the barrel to the rear ; seize the piece with
the left hand at the lower band, raise this hand as high
us the chin, and seize the piece at the same time with
the right hand four inches below the cock.

134. [Second motion.) Turn the piece with the
right hand, the barrel to the front; carry the piece to
the left shoulder, and pass the fore-arm extended on
the breast between the right hand and the cock ; sup-
port the cock against the left fore-arm, the left hand
resting on the right breast.

135. [Third motion.) Drop the right hand by the
side.

School of the Soldier— V&rt II. 31

136. When the instructor may wish to give repose
in this position, he will command:

Rest.

137. At this command, the recruits will bring up
smartly the right hand to the handle of the piece
(small of the stock), when they will not be required to
preserve silence, or steadiness of position.

138. When the instructor may wish the recruits to
pass from this position to that of silence and steadi-
ness, he will command:

1. Attention. 2. Squad.

139. At the second word, the recruits will resume
the position of the third motion of support arms.

Shoulder — Arms.

One time and three motions.

140. {First motion.) Grasp the piece with the
right hand under and against the left fore-arm ; seize
it with the left hand at the lower band, the thumb ex-
tended ; detach the piece slightly from the shoulder,
the left fore-arm along the stock.

141. [Second motion.) Carry the piece vertically
to the right shoulder with both hands, the rammer to
the front, change the position of the right hand so as
to embrace the guard with the thumb and fore-finger,
slip the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the
fingers extended and joined, the right arm nearly
straight.

142. [Third motion.) Drop the left hand quickly
by the side.

Present — Arms.

One time and two motions.

143. [First motion.) With the right hand bring the
piece erect before the centre of the body, the rammer

32 School of the Soldier— TslH II.

to the front ; at the same time seize the piece with the
left hand half-way between the guide sight and lower
band, the thumb extended along the barrel and against
the stock, the fore-arm horizontal and resting against
the body, the hand as high as the elbow.

144. [Second motion.) Grasp the small of the stock
with the right hand below and against the guard.

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and two motions.

145. {First motion.) Bring the piece to the right
shoulder, at the same time change the position of the
right hand so as to embrace the guard with the thumb
and fore-finger, slip up the left hand to the height of
the shoulder, the fingers extended and joined, the
right arm nearly straight.

146. {Second motio7i.) Drop the left hand quickly
by the side.

Order — Arms.

One time and two motions.

147. {First motion.) Seize the piece briskly with
the left hand near the upper band, and detach it
slightly from the shoulder with the right hand; loosen
the grasp of the right hand, lower the piece with the
left, re-seize the piece with the right hand above the
lower band, the little finger in rear of the barrel, the
butt about four inches from the ground, the right
hand supported against the hip, drop the left hand by
the side.

148. {Second motion.) Let the piece slip through
the right hand to the ground by opening slightly the
fingers, and take the position about to be described.

Position of Order Arms.

149. The hand low, the barrel between the thumb
and fore-finger extended along the stock; the other

School of the Soldier— V2iXi IL 33

finp;ers extended and joined ; the muzzle about two
inches from the rio;ht shoulder; the rammer in
front; the toe (pr boak) of the butt, against, and in
aline with the toe of the right foot, the barrel per-
pendicular.

150. When the instructor may •wish to give repose
in this position, he will command:

Rest.

151. At this command, the recruits will not be re-
quired to preserve silence or steadiness.

152. When the instructor may wish the recruits to
pass from this position to that of silence and steadi-
ness, he will command:

1. Attention. 2. Squad.

153. At the second word, the recruits will resume
the position of order arms.

Shoulder — Arms .

One time and two motions.

154. [First motion.) Raise the piece vertically
with the right hand to the height of the right breast,
and opposite the shoulder, the elbow close to the body;
seize the piece with the left hand below the right, and
drop quickly the right hand to grasp the piece at
the swell of the stock, the thumb and fore-finger
embracing the guard; press the piece against the
shoulder with the left hand, the right arm nearly
straight.

155. [Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly
by the side.

34 School of tlie Soldier—VdiXi II.

Load in nine times.

1. Load.*
One time and one motion.

156. Grasp the piece with the left hand as hio;h as
the right elbow, and bring it vertically opposite the
middle of the body, shift the right hand to the upper
band, place the butt between the feet, the barrel to the
front; seize it with the left hand near the muzzle, which
should be three inches from the body; carry the right
hand to the cartridge box.

2. Handle — Cartridge.
One time and one motion.

157. Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next
two fingers, and place it between the teeth.

3. Tear — Cartridge.
One time and one motion.

158. Tear the paper to the powder, hold the car-
tridge upright between the thumb and first two fingers,
near the top ; in this position place it in front of
and near the muzzle — the back of the hand to the
front.

4. Charge — Cartridge.

One time and one motion.

159. Empty the powder into the barrel; disengage
the ball from the paper with the right hand and the

* Whenever the loadings and firings are to be executed, the
instructor will cause the cartridge boxes to be brought to the
front.

School of the Soldier — Part II. 35

thumb and first two finojers of the left; insert it into
the bore, the pointed end uppermost, and press it down
with the right thumb; seize the head of the rammer
with the thumb and fore-finger, of the right hand, the
other fingers closed, the elbows near the body.

5. Draw — Rammer.
One time and three motions.

160. {First motion.) Half draw the rammer by
extending the right arm ; steady it in this position
with the left thumb; grasp the rammer near the muz-
zle with the right hand, the little finger uppermost,
the nails to the front, the thumb extended along the
rammer.

161. {Second motion.) Clear the rammer from the
pipes by again extending the arm ; the rammer in the
prolongation of the pipes.

162. [Third motion.) Turn the rammer, the little
end of the rammer passing near the left shoulder ;
place the head of the rammer on the ball, the back of
the hand to the front.

6. Ram — Cartridge.
One time and one motion.

163. Insert the rammer as far as the right, and
steady it in this position with the thumb of the left
hand ; seize the rammer at the small end with the
thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, the back of
the hand to the front; press the ball home, the elbows
near the body.

7. Return — Rammer.
One time and three motions.

164. {First motion.) Draw the rammer half-way
out, and steady it in this position with the left thumb;

36 Sclwol of the Soldier— Tsxvt II.

grasp it near the muzzle with the right hand, the little
iinger uppermost, the uails to the front, the thumb
along the rammer ; clear the rammer from the bore by
extending the arm, the nails to the front, the rammer
in the prolongation of the bore.

165. {Second motion.) Turn the rammer, the head
of the rammer passing near the left shoulder, and
insert it in the pipes until the right hand reaches the
muzzle, the nails to the front.

166. [Third motion.) Force the rammer home by
placing the little finger of the right hand on the head
of the rammer ; pass the left hand down the barrel to
the extent of the arm, without depressing the shoulder.

8. Prime.*
One time and two motions.

167. {First motion.) With the left hand raise the
piece till the hand is as high as the eye, grasp the
small of the stock with the right hand ; half face to
the right ; place, at the same time, the right foot
behind and at right angles with the left ; the hol-
low of the right foot against the left heel. Slip the
left hand down to the lower band, the thumb along
the stock, the left elbow against the body ; bring the
piece to the right side, the butt below the right fore-
arm— the small of the stock against the body and two
inches below the right breast, the barrel upwards, the
muzzle on a level with the eye.

168. [Second motion.) Half cock with the thumb
of the right hand, the fingers supported against the

* If Maynard's primer be used, the command will be, load in
eight times, and the eighth command will be, shoulder arms,
and executed from return rammer, in one time and two motions, as
follows :

(First motion.) Raise the piece with the left hand, and take the
position of shoulder arms, as indicated No. 145.

{Second motion.) Drop tlie left hand quickly by the side.

School of the Soldier — Part II. 37

guard and the small of the stock— remove the old cap
with one of the fingers of the right hand, and with the
thumb and fore-finger of the same hand take a cap
from the pouch, place it on the nipple, and press it
dovyn with the thumb ; seize the small of the stock
with the right hand.

9 Shoulder — Arms.
One time and two viotions.

169. [First motion.) Bring the piece to the right
shoulder and support it there with the left hand, face
to the front ; bring the right heel to the side of and on
a line with the left; grasp the piece with the right
hand as indicated in the position of shoulder arms.

1/0. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly
by the side. *'

Ready.

One time and three motions.

171. (First motion.) Raise the piece slightly with
the right hand, making a half face to the right on the
left heel ; carry the right foot to the rear, and place it
at right angles to the left, the hollow of it opposite
to and against the left heel ; grasp the piece with the
lett hand at the lower baud and detach it slight^ from
the shoulder. ° *'

172 (Second motion.) Bring down the piece with
both hands, the barrel upwards, the left thumb ex-
tended along the stock, the butt below the right fore-
arm, the small of the stock against the body and two
inches below the right breast, the muzzle as high as
the eye, the left elbow against the side; place at the
same time the right thumb on the head of the cock
the other fingers under and against the guard

173. (Third motion.) Cock, and seize the piece at
the small of the stock without deranging the position
ot the butt. ^

38 School of the Soldier — Part II.

Aim.
One time and one motion.

174. Raise the piece with both hands, and support
the butt against the right shoulder; the left elbow
down, the right as high as the shoulder ; incline the
head upon the butt, so that the right eye may perceive
quickly the notch of the hausse, the front sight, and
the object aimed at ; the left eye closed, the right
thumb extended along the stock, the fore-finger on the
trigger.

175. When recruits are formed in two ranks to exe-
cute the firings, the front rank men will raise a little
less the right elbow, in order to facilitate the aim of
the rear rank men.

176. The rear rank men, in aiming, will each carry
the right foot about eight inches to the right, and to-
wards the left heel of the man next on the right,
inclining the upper part of the body forward.

Fire.
One time and one motion.

177. Press the fore-finger against the trigger, fire,
without lowering or turning the head, and remain in
this position.

Load.
One time and one motion.

179. Bring down the piece with both hands, at the
game time face to the front and take the position of
load as indicated No. 156. Each rear rank man will
bring his right foot by the side of the left.

180. The men being in this position, the instructor
will cause the loading to be continued by the com-
mands and means prescribed No. 156 and following.

School of the Soldier— T&ri II. 39

181. If, after firing, the instructor should not wish
the recruits to re-load, he will command ;

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and one motion.

182. Throw up the piece briskly with the left hand
and resume the position of shoulder arms, at the same
time face to the front, turning on the left heel, and
bring the right heel on a line with the left.

183. To accustom the recruits to wait for the com-
mand Jire, the instructor, when they are in the posi-
tion of aim, will command :

Recover — Aems.

One time and one motion.

184. At the first part of the command, withdraw
the finger from tho trigger ; at the command arms,
retake the position of the third motion of ready.

185. The recruits being in the position of the third
motion of ready, if the instructor should wish to bring
them to a shoulder, he will command :

Shoulder — Arm s .
One time and one motion.

186. At the command shoulder, place the thumb
upon the cock, the fore-finger On the trigger, half-
cock, and seize the small of the stock with the right
hand. At the command arms, bring up the piece
briskly to the right shoulder, and retake the position
of shoulder arms.

187. The recruits being at shoulder arms, when
the instructor shall wish to fix bayonets, he shall com-
mand:

40 School of the Soldier— Vd.vi II.

Fix — Bayonet.
One time and three motions.

188. [First motion.) Grasp the piece with the left
hand at the height of the shoulder, and detach it
slightly from the shoulder with the right hand.

189. [Second motion.) Quit the piece with the right
hand, lower it with the left hand, opposite the middle
of the body, and place the butt between the feet with-
out shock ; the rammer to the rear, the barrel vertical,
the muzzle three inches from the body ; seize it with
the right hand at the upper band, and carry the left
hand reversed to the handle of the sabre-bayonet.

190. [Third jnotion.) Draw the sabre-bayonet from
the scabbard and fix it on the extremity of the barrel;
seize the piece with the left hand, the arm extended,
the right hand at the upper band.

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and two motions.

191. [First motion.) Raise the piece with the left
hand, and place it against the right shoulder, the ram-
mer to the front ; seize the piece at the same timo
•with the right hand at the swell of the stock, the
thumb and fore-finger embracing the guard, the right
arm nearly extended.

192. [Second motion.) Drop briskly the left hand
by the side.

Charge — Bayonet.

One time and two motions.

193. [First motion.) Raise the piece slightly with
the right hand and make a half fiice to the right on
the left heel ; place the hollow of the right foot oppo-
site to, and three inches from the left heel, the feet
square ; seize the piece at the same time with the left
hand a little above the lower band.

School of the Soldier— V^vi 11. 41

194. [Second motion.) Bring down the piece with
both hands, the barrel uppermost, the left elbow
against the body ; seize the small of the stock, at the
same time, with the right hand, which will be sup-
ported against the hip; the point of the sabre-bayonet
as high as the eye.

Shoulder — Aems. •

One time and two motions.

195. [Fii'st motion.) Throw up the piece briskly
with the left hand in facing to the front, place ft
against the right shoulder, the rammer to the front ;
turn the right hand so as to embrace the guard ; slide
the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the right
hand nearly extended.

196. [Second motion.) Drop the left hand smartly
by the side.

Trail — Arms.

One time and two motions.

197. [First motion.) The same as the first motion
of order arms.

198. [Second motion.) Incline the muzzle slightly
to the front, the butt to the rear and about four inches
from the ground. The right hand supported at the
hip, will so hold the piece that the rear rank men may
not touch with their bayonets the men in the front
rank.

Shoulder — Arms.

199. At the command shoulder, raise the piece per-
pendicularly in the right hand, the little-finger in rear
of the barrel ; at the command ai^ns, execute what has
been prescribed for the shoxdder from the position of
order arms.

42 School of the JSoIdier^Tavt II.

Unjix — Bayonet.
One time and three motions.

200. {First and second motions.) The same as the
first and second motion of jf?x bayonet, except that, at
the end of the second command, the thumb of the
right hand will be placed on the spring of the sabre-
bayonet, and tlie left hand will embrace the handle of
the sabre-bayonet and the barrel, the thumb extended
along the blade.

201. {Third motion.) Press the thumb of the right
hand on the spring, .wrest off the sabre-bayonet, turn
it to the right, the edge to the front, lower the guard
until it touches the right hand, which will seize the
back and the edge of the blade between the thumb
and first two fingers, the other fingers holding the
piece; change the position of the hand without quit-
ting tbe handle, return the sabre-bayonet to the scab-
bard, and seize the piece with the left hand, the arm
extended.

Shoulder — Arm s .
One time and two motions.

202. {First motion.) The same as the first motion
from /laj bayonet, No. 191.

203. {Second motion.) The same as the second mo-
tion from^x bayonet, No. 192.

Secure — Arms.
One time and three motions.

204. {First motion.) The same as the first motion
of support arms, No. 133, except with the right hand
seize the piece at the small of the stock.

205. {Second motion.) Turn the piece with both
hands, the barrel to the front ; bring it opposite the
left shoulder, the butt against the hip, the left hand at

School of the Soldier — Part II. 43

the lower band, the thumb as high as the chin and
extended on the rammer ; the piece erect and detached
from the shoulder, the left fore-arm against the piece.

206. [Third motion.) Reverse the piece, pass it
under the left arm, the left hand remaining at the
lower band, the thumb on the rammer to prevent it
from sliding out, the little finger resting against the
hip, the right hand falling at the same time by the,
eide.

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and three motions.

207. {First motion,) Raise the piece with the left
hand, and seize it with the right hand at the small of
the stock. The piece erect and detached from the
shoulder, the butt against the hip, the left fore-arm
along the piece. ' '

208. [Second motion.) The same as the second mo-
tion of shoulder arms from a siqjport.

209. [Third motion.) The same as the third motion
of shoidder arms from a siipvort.

Right shoulder shift — Arms.
One time and two motions.

210. [First motion.) Detach the piece perpendicu-
larly from the shoulder with the right hand, and seize,
it with the left between the lower band and guide-
sight, raise the piece, the left hand at the height of
the shoulder, and four inches from it ; place, at the
same time, the right hand on the butt, the beak be-
tween the first two fingers, the other two fingers under
the butt plate.

211. [Second motion.) Quit the piece with the left
hand, raise and place the piece on the right shoulder
with the right hand, the lock plate upwards; let fall
at the same time, the left hand by the side.

44 School of the Soldier — Part II.

Shoulder — Arms,
One time and two motions.

212. [First motion.) Raise the piece perpendicu-
larly by extending the right arm to its full length, the
rammer to the front, at the same time seize the piece
with the left hand between the lower band and guide
eight.

213. [Second motion.) Quit the butt with the right
hand, which will immediately embrace the guard,
lower the piece to the position of shoulder arms, slide
lip the left hand to the height of the shoulder, the
lingers extended and closed. Drop the left hand by
the side.

214. The men being at support arms, the instructor
will sometimes cause pieces to be brought to the right
fihoulder. To this effect, he will command:

Right shoulder shift — Arms.
One time and two motions.

215. [First motion.) Seize the piece with the right
hand, below and near the left fore-arm, place the left
hand under the butt, the heel of the butt between the
first two fingers.

216. [Second motion.) Turn the piece with the left
hand, the lock plate upwards, carry it to the right
shoulder, the left hand still holding the butt, the
muzzle elevated ; hold the piece in this position and
place the right hand upon the butt as is prescribed
No. 210, and let fall the left hand by the side.

Support — Arms.
One time and two motions.

217. [First motion.) Tho same as the first motion
of shoulder arms, No. 212.

218. [Second rnoiion.) Turn the piece with both

ScJiool of the Soldier— Fart II. 45

hands, tho barrel to the front, carry it opposite the
left shoulder, slip the right hand to the small of the
stock, place the left fore-arm extended on the breast as
is prescribed No. 134, and let fall the ri^ht hand by
the side.

Ar7ns — At will.
Ohe time and one motion,

219. At this command, carry the piece at pleasure
on either shoulder, with one or both hands, the
muzzle elevated.

Shoulder — Arms.

One time and one motion.

220. At this command, retake quickly the position
of shoulder arms.

Inspection of Arms.

226. The recruits being at ordered arms, and hav-
ing the sabre-bayonet in the scabbard, if the instruc-'
tor wishes to cause an inspection of arms, he will
command:

Inspection — Arm s .

One time and two motions.

227. {First motion.) Seize the piece with the left
hand below and near the upper band, carry it with
both hands opposite the middle of the body, the butt
between the feet, the rammer to the rear, the barrel
vertical, the muzzle about three inches from the body;
carry the left hand reversed to the sabre-bayonet,
draw it from the scabbard and fix it on the barrel;
grasp the piece with the left hand below and near the
upper band, seize the rammer with the thumb and

46 School of the Soldier — Part II.

fore-finger of the right hand bent, the other fingers
closed.

228. {Second motion.) Draw the rammer as has
been explained in loading, and let it glide to the bot-
tom of the bore, replace the piece with the loft hand
opposite the right shoulder, and retake the position
of ordered arms.

229. The instructor will then inspect in succession
the piece of each recruit, in passing along the front of
the rank. Each, as the instructor reaches him, will
raise smartly his piece with his right hand, seize it
with the left between the lower band and guide sight,
the lock to the front, the left hand at the height of the
chin, the piece opposite to the left eye; the instructor
will take it with the right hand at the handle, and,
after inspecting it, will return it to the recruit, who
will receive it back with the right hand, and replace
it in the position of ordered arms.

230. When the instructor shall have passed him,
each recruit will retake the position prescribed at the
command inspection arms, return the rammer, and
jesume the position of ordered arms.

231. If, instead of inspection oj aj^ms, the instructor
should merely wish to cause bayonets to be fixed, he
will command:

Fix — Bayonet.

232. Take the position indicated No. 227, fix bayo-
nets as has been explained, and immediately resume
the position of ordered arms.

233. If it be the wish of the instructor, after firing,
to ascertain whether the pieces have been discharged,
he will command :

>S^nn^— Rammers.

234. Put the rammer in the barrel as has been
explained above, and immediately retake the position
of ordered arms.

School of the Soldier— P&ri II. 47

235. The instructor, for the purpose stated, can take
the rammer by the small end, and spring it in the
barrel, or cause each recruit to make it ring in the
barrel.

236. Each recruit, after the instructor passes him,
will return rammer, and resume the position of ordered
arms.

To mark time.

240. The four men marching in the direct step, the
iustructor will command :

1. Mark time. 2. March.

241. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant a foot is coming to the ground, the re-
cruits will make a semblance of marching, by bring-
ing the heels by the side of each other, and observing
the cadence of the step, by raising each foot alter-
nately without advancing.

242. The instructor, wishing the direct step to be
resumed, will command :

1. Forimrd. 2. Maech.

243. At the second command, which will be givea
as prescribed above, the recruits will retake the step
of twenty-eight inches.

To change step.

244. The squad being in march, the instructor will
command :

1. Change step. 2. March.

245. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant either foot is coming to the ground,
bring the foot which is in rear by the side of that
which is in front, and step off again with the foot
which was in front.

48 School of the Soldier— Tsivt II.

To march hacTcwards.

246. The instructor, wishing the squad to march
"backwards, will command :

1. Squad backward. 2. March.

247. At the second command, the recruits will step
off smartly with the left foot fourteen inches to the
rear, reckoning from heel to heel, and so on with the
feet in succession till the command halt, which will
always be preceded by the caution squad. The men
will halt at this command, and bring back the foot in
front by the side of the other.

248. This step will always be executed in quick
time.

249. The instructor will be watchful that the re-
cruits march straight to the rear, and that the erect
position of the body and the piece be not deranged.

Lesson III.
To load in four times.

251. The first time will be executed at the end of
the command; the three others at the commands, two^
three and four.

The instructor will command :

1. Load in four times. 2. Load.

252. Execute the times to include charge cartridge.

Two.

253. Execute the times to include ram cartridge.

Three.

254. Execute the times to include prime.

School of the Soldier— Turi II. 49

Four.

255. Execute the time of shoulder arms.

To load at will.

256. The instructor will next teach loading at will,
which will be executed as loading in four times, but
continued, and without resting on either of the times.
He will command :

1. Load at will. 2. Load.

257. The instructor will habituate the recruits, by
degrees, to load with the greatest possible promptitude,
each without regulating himself by his neighbor, and,
above all, without waiting for him.

258. The cadence prescribed, No. 129, is not appli-
cable to loading in four times, or at will.

Lesson IV.

Firings.

259. The firings are direct or oblique,^ and will be
executed as follows :

The direct fire.

260. The instructor will give the following com-
mands:

1. Fire by squad. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Aim.
5. Fire. 6. Load.

261. These several eommands will be executed as
has been prescribed in the Manual of Arms. At the
third command, the men will come to the position of
ready as heretofore explained. At the fourth, thev
will aim according to the rank in which each may find
himself placed, the rear rank men inclining forward a

60 School of the Soldier — Part II.

little the upper part of the body, in order that their
pieces may reach as much beyond the front rank as
possible.

262. At the sixth command, they will load their
pieces, and return immediately to the position of
ready.

263. The instructor will recommence the firing by
the commands :

1. Squad. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load.

264. When the instructor wishes the firing to cease,
he will command:

Cease firing.

265. At this command, the men will cease firing,
but will load their pieces, if unloaded, and afterwards
bring them to a shoulder.

Oblique firings.

266. The oblique firings will be executed to the
right and left, and by the same commands as the
direct fire, with this single difi"erence — the command
aim will always be preceded by the caution, right or
left oblique.

Position of the two ranks in the Oblique Fire to the right.

267. At the command ready, the two ranks will exe-
cute what has been prescribed for the direct fire.

268. At the cautionary command right oblique, the
two ranks will throw back the right shoulder and look
steadily at the object to be hit.

269. At the command aim, each front rank man will
aim to the right without deranging the feet; each rear
rank man will advance the left foot about eight inches
toward* the right heel of the man next on the right of
his fii-e leader and aim to the right, inclining the upper

School of the Soldier — Part II. 51

part of the body forward and bending a little the left
knee.

Positions of the two ranks in the Oblique Fire to the left.

270. At the cautionary command lejt ohlique, the
two ranks will throw back the left shoulder, and look
steadily at the object to be hit.

271. At the command aim, the front rank will take
aim to the left without deranging the feet ; each man
in the rear rank will advance the right foot about
eight inches towards the right heel of the next man
on the right of his tile leader, and aim to the left, in-
clining the upper part of the body forward and bend-
ing a little the right knee.

272. In both cases, at the command load, the men
of each rank will come to the position of load as pre-
scribed in the direct fire; the rear rank men bringing
back the foot which is to the right and front by the
side of the other. Each man will continue to load as
if isolated.

To Jire hy file*

273. The fire by file will be executed by the two
ranks, the files of which will fire successively, and
without regulating on each other, except for the first
fire.

274. The instructor will command :

1. Fire hy file. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Commence

FIRING.

275. At the third command, the two ranks will take
the position prescribed in the direct fire.

276. At the fourth command, the file on the right
will aim and fire ; the rear rank man in aiming will
take the position indicated, No. 176.

277. The men of this file will load their pieces

52 Schaol of the Soldier— Vurt II.

briskly and fire a second time ; re-load and fire again,
and 80 on in continuation.

278. The second file will aim at the instant the first
brings down pieces to re-load, and will conform, in all
respects, to that which has just been prescribed for
the first file.

279. After the first fire, the front and rear rank men
will not be required to fire at the same time.

280. Each man, after loading, will return to the
position of ready and continue the fire.

281. When the instructor wishes the firing to cease,
he will command :

Cease — Firing.

282. At this command, the men will cease firing.
If they have fired, they will load their pieces and
bring them to a shoulder ; if at the position of ready,
they will half-cock and shoulder arms ; if in the posi-
tion of aim, they will bring down their pieces, half-
cock, and shoulder arms.

To Jlre hy rank.

283. The fire by rank will be executed- by each
entire rank, alternately.

284. The instructor will command :

1. Fire hy rank. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Rear rank.
5. Aim. 6. Fire. 7. Load.

285. At the third command, the two ranks will
take the position of ready, as prescribed in the direct
fire.

286. At the seventh command, the rear rank will,
execute that which has been prescribed in the direct
fire, and afterwards take the position of ready.

287. As soon as the instructor sees several men of

ScTiool of the Soldier— 'P2iri II. 53

the rear rank in the position of ready, he will com-
mand :

1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load.

288. At these commands, the men in the front rank
will execute what has been prescribed for the rear
rank, but they will not step off with the right foot.

289. The instructor will re-commence the firing by
the rear rank, and will thus continue to alternate from
rank to rank, until he shall wish the firing to cease,
when he will command, cease firing, which will be
executed as heretofore prescribed.

Lesson V.
To Jire and load kneeling.

290. In this exercise the squad will be supposed
loaded and drawn up in one rank. The instruction
will be given to each man individually, without times
or motions, and in the following manner.

291. The instructor will command :

Fire and Load kneeling.

292. At this command, the man on the right of the
squad will move forward three paces and halt ; then
carry the right foot to the rear and to the right of the
left heel, and in a position convenient for placing the
right knee upon the ground in bending the left leg ;
place the right knee upon the ground ; lower the
piece, the left fore-arm supported upon the thigh on
the same side, the right hand on the small oif the
stock, the butt resting on the right thigh, the left
hand supporting the piece near the lower baud.

293. lie will next move the right leg to the left
around the knee supported on the ground, until this
leg is nearly perpendicular to the direction of the left

54 School of the Soldier — Part II.

foot, and thus seat himself comfortably on the right
heel.

294. Raise the piece with the ri^ht hand and sup-
port it with the left, holding it near the lower band,
the left elbow resting on the left thigh near the knee;
seize the hammer with the thumb, the forefinger under
the guard, cock and seize the piece at the small of the
stock ; bring the piece to the shoulder, aim and ^Ve.

295. Bring the piece down as soon as it is fired, and
support it with the left hand, the butt resting against
the right thigh ; carry the piece to the rear, rising on
the knee, the barrel downwards, the butt resting on
the ground; in this position support the piece with the
left hand at the upper band, draw cartridge witli the
right and load the piece, ramming the ball, if neces-
sary, with both hands.

296. When loaded, bring the piece to the front with
the left hand, which holds it at the upper band ; seize
it at the same time with the right hand at the small
of the stock ; turn the piece, the barrel uppermost and
nearly horizontal, the left elbow resting on the left
thigh ; half-cock, remove the old cap and prime, rise,
and return to the ranks.

297. The second man will then be taught what has
just been prescribed for the first, and so on through
the remainder of the squad.

To fire o.nd load lying.

298. In this exercise the squad will be in one rank
and loaded; the instruction will be given individually
and without times or motions.

299. The instructor will command:

Fire and load lying.

300. At this command, the man on the right of the
squad will move forward three paces and halt; he will
then bring his piece to an order, drop on both knees,

School of the Soldier — Part II. 65

and place himself on the ground flat on his belly. In
this position he will support the piece nearly hori-
zontal with the left hand, holding it near the lower
band, the butt end of the piece and the left elbow rest-
ing on the ground, the barrel uppermost; cock the
piece with the right hand, and carry this hand to the
small of the stock; raise the piece with both hands,
press the butt against the shoulder, and resting on
both elbows, aim and Jire.

301. As soon as he has fired, bring the piece down
and turn upon his left side, still resting on his left
elbow; bring back the piece until the cock is opposite
his breast, the butt end resting on the ground; take
out a cartridge with the right hand; seize the small of
the stock with this hand, holding the cartridge with
the thumb and two first fingers; he will then throw
himself on his back, still holding the piece with both
hands; carry the piece to the rear, place the butt be-
tween the heels, the barrel up, the muzzle elevated.
In this position, charge cartridge, draw rammer, ram
cartridge, and return rammer.

302. When finished loading, the man will turn
again upon his left side, remove the old cap and prime,
then raise the piece vertically, rise, turn about, and
resume his position in the ranks.

303. The second man will be taught what has just
been prescribed for the first, and so on throughout the
squad.

Lesson VI.

Bayonet Exercise.

304. The bayonet exercise in this book will be con-
fined to two movements, the guard against infantry,
and the guard against cavalry. The men will be
placed in one rank, with two paces interval, and being
at shoulder arms, the instructor will command:

56 School of the Soldier — Part II.

1. Guard against Infantry. 2. Guaed.
One time and two motions.

305. {First motion.) Make a half face to the right,
turning on both heels, the feet square to each other;
at the same time raise the piece slightly, and seize it
with the left hand above and near the lower band.

306. [Second motion.) Carry the right foot twenty
inches perpendicularly to the rear, the right heel oa
the prolongation of the left, the knees slightly bent,
the weight of the body resting equally on bcth legs;
lower the piece with both hands, the barrel uppermost,
the left elbow against the body ; seize the piece at the
same time with the right hand at the small of the
stock, the arms falling naturally, the point of the
bayonet slightly elevated.

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and one motion.

307. Throw up the piece with the left hand, and
place it against the right shoulder, at the same time
bring the right heel by the side of the left and face to
the front.

1. Guard against Cavalry. 2. Guard.

One time and two motions.

308. Both motions the same as for guard against
infantry, except that the right hand will be supported
against the hip, and the bayonet held at the height of
the eye, as in charge bayonet.

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and one motion.

309. Spring up the piece with the left hand and
place it against the right shoulder, at the same time
bring the right heel by the side of the left, and face to
the front.

School of the Soldier— Tart II. 57

MANUAL OF ARMS FOR THE MUSKET.*
Principles of Shouldered Arms.

94. Each soldier being in the position of the soldier,
the instructor will cause him to turn up the left hand
without bending the wrist, the left fore-arm only act-
ing. The instructor will raise the piece perpendicu-
larly, and place it as follows:

The piece in the left hand, the arm very slightly
bent, the elbow back near the body, the palm of the
hand pressing on the outer flat of the butt: the outer
edge of the latter on the upper joints of the fingers, the
heel of the butt between the middle and fore-fingers,
the thumb on the front screw of the butt plate, the re-
maining fingers under the butt, the butt more or less
kept back according to the conformation of the man,
so that the piece, seen from the front, shall appear
perpendicular, and also, that the movement of the
thigh, in marching, may not raise it or cause it to
waver; the stock below the tail band, resting against
the hollow of the shoulder, just within the joint, the
right arm hanging naturally as prescribed in the
position of the soldier.

The manual of the ransket will be taught in the fol-
lowing order. The instructor commands :

Support — Arms.

One time and three motions.

95. {First motion.) "With the right hand seize the
small of the stock briskly, 4 inches below the lock,
raising the piece a little, but not turning it.

{Second motion.) Take the left hand from the butt;
extend the left forearm upward across the body, and

*The numbers of these paragraphs are retained with them,
from Gilham's Manual.

58 Scliool of the Soldier— Tart II.

under the hammer, the left hand flat on the right
hreast.

[Third motion.) Drop the right arm smartly to its
position. The squad being at support arms, the in-
structor commands:

Carry — Akms.

One time and three motions.

96. First motion. Carry quickly the right hand to
the small of the stock.

Second motion. Place the left hand under the butt,
as in the position of shoulder arms.

Third motion. Let fall smartly the right hand to ita
position, and drop with the left, at the same time, the
piece into the position of shoulder arms.

Present — Aems.

One time and two motions.

97. First 7notion. Turn the piece with the left hand,
the lock out, and seize the small of the stock, at the
same time, with the right hand, the piece perpendic-
ular and detached from the shoulder, the left hand
remaining under the butt.

[Second motion.) Complete the turning inwards of
the piece, so as to bring it erect before the centre of
the body, the rammer to the front, the right hand
under and against the guard ; seize it smartly at the
same time with the left hand just above the lock, the
thumb extended along the barrel and on the stock, the
left fore-arm resting on the body without constraint,
and the hand at the height of the elbow.

Shoulder — Arms,

One time and two motions.

98. [First motion.) Turn the piece with the right
hand, the barrel to the front, raise and support it
against the left shoulder with the right hand, drop the

School of the Soldier— Vart II. 59

left under the butt, the right hand resting on, without
grasping, the small of the stock.

{Second motion.) Drop quickly the right hand into
its position.

Order — Arms.

One time and two motions.

99. {First motion.) Drop the piece smartly by ex-
tending the left arm, seize it at the same time with
the right hand, above and near the tail-band ; quit the
hold of the left hand, and carry the piece opposite to
the right shoulder, the rammer to the front, the little
finger behind the barrel, the right hand supported
against the hip, the butt three inches from the ground,
the piece erect, the left hand hanging by the side.

{Second motion.) Let the piece slip through the
right hand to the ground without shock, and take the
position about to be described.

Position of Order Arms.

100. The hand low, the barrel between the thumb
and fore-finger extended along the stock; the other
fingers extended and joined ; the muzzle about two
inches from the right shoulder ; the rammer in front ;
the toe of the butt against, and in line with, the toe
of the right foot, the barrel perpendicular.

101. When the instructor wishes to give repose in
this position, he commands :

Rest.

102. At this command the soldier will not be re-
quired to preserve silence or steadiness. They, how-
ever,will not quit their rank without special permission.
When the instructor wishes the men to pass from this
position to that of silence and steadiness, he commands :

1. Attention. 2. Squad.

60 School of the Soldier — Part II.

At the second word the men will resume the posi-
tion of order arras, and remain firm and silent.

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and two motions.

103. [First motion.) Raise smartly the piece "with
the right hand, carry it against the left shoulder, turn-
ing it so as to bring the barrel to the front ; at the
same time place the left hand under the butt and slip
the right hand down to the lock.

[Second motion.) Let the right hand fall briskly to
its position.

Charge — Bayonet.

One time and two motions.

104. [First motion.) Make a half face to the right
on the left heel, bring the left toe directly to the front,
at the same time place the right foot behind, and at
right angles with the left, the hollow of the right foot
opposite to, and about three inches from the left heel ;
turn the piece with the left hand, the lock outwards,
and seize the small of the stock at the same time with
the right hand, the musket perpendicular, and de-
tached from the shoulder, the left hand under the
butt.

[Second motion.) Bring down the piece with the
right hand, letting it fall firmly into the left, the latter
seizing it a little in advance of the tail band, the bar-
rel up, the left elbow near the body, the right hand
against the hip, the point of the bayonet as high as
the eye.

Shoulder — Arms.

One time and two motions.

105. [First motion.) Face to the front by turning on
the left heel, bring up the right by the side of the left

Scliool of the Soldier — Part II. 61

heel; at the same time briuj; up the piece with the
right hand to the left shoulder, and place the left hand
under the butt.

[Second motion.) Let the right hand fall promptly
into its position.

Load in ten times.

1. Load.

One tims and tioo motions.

106. [First motion.) Drop the piece by a smart ex-
tension of the left arm, seize it with the rif]jht hand
above and near the lower band; at the same time
carry the rij^ht foot forward, the heel against the hol-
low of the left foot.

[Second motion.) Drop the piece with the right hand
along the left thigh, seize it with the left hand above
the right, and with the left hand let it descend to the
ground, without shock, the piece touching the left
thigh, and the muzzle opposite the centre of the body ;
carry the right hand quickly to the cartridge box and
open it.

2. Handle — Cartridge.
One time and one motion.

107. Seize a cartridge with the thumb and the next
two fingers, and place it between the teeth.

3. Tear — Cartridge.
One time and one motion,

108. Tear the paper down to the powder, hold the
cartridge upright between the thumb and two next
fingers, near the top ; in this position place it in front
of and near the muzzle, the back of the hand to the
front.

62 School of the Soldier— Tari II.

4. Charge — Cartridge.

109. Fix the eye on the muzzle, turn quickly the
back of the right hand towards the body, in order to
discharge the powder into the barrel, raise the elbow
to the height of the wrist, shake the cartridge, force
it into the muzzle and leave the hand reversed, the
fingers closed, but not clenched.

5. Draw — Rammer.
One time and three motions.

110. {First motion.) Drop the right elbow smartly,
and seize the rammer between the thumb and fore-
finger bent, the other fingers shut ; draw it smartly,
extending the arm, seize the rammer again at the mid-
dle, between the thumb and fore-finger, the hand re-
versed, the palm to the front, the nails up, the eyes
following the movement of the hand, clear the ram-
mer from the pipes by again extending the arm.

[Second motion.) Turn rapidly the rammer between
the bayonet and the face, closing the fingers, the ram-
mers of the rear rank grazing the right shoulders of
the men of the same file in front, the rammer parallel
to the bayonet, the arm extended, the butt of the ram-
mer opposite to the muzzle, but not yet inserted, the
eyes fixed on the muzzle.

[Third motion.) Insert the butt of the rammer, and
force it down as low as the hand.

6. Ram — Cartridge.
One time and one motion.

111. Extend the arm to its full length to seize the
rammer between the right thumb extended and the
fore-finger bent, the other fingers closed ; with force
ram home twice and seize the rammer at the small
end between the thumb and fore-finger bent, the other
fingers closed, the right elbow touching the body.

School of the Soldier — Part II. 63

7. Return — Rammer.
One time and three motions.

112. {First motion.) Draw the rammer briskly, re-
seize it at the middle between the thumb and fore-
finger, the hand reversed, the palm to the front, the
nails up, the eyes following the hand, clear the ram-
mer from the barrel by extending the arm.

[Second motion.) Turn the rammer rapidly between
the bayonet and the face, closing the fingers, the ram-
mers of the rear rink grazing the right shoulders of
the men of the same file in front, the rammer parallel
to the bayonet, the arm extended, the little end of the
rammer opposite to the first pipe, but not yet inserted,
the eyes fixed on that pipe.

{Third motion.) Insert the small end, and with the
thumb, which will follow the movement, force it as
low as the middle band ; raise the hand quickly, a
little bent, place the little-finger on the butt of the
rammer, and force it down; lower the left hand on the
barrel to the extent of the arm, without depressing
the shoulder.

8. Cast — About.
One time and tivo motions.

113. [First motion.) With the left hand bring up
the piece vertically against the left shoulder, seize it
smartly with the right hand at the small of the stock,
and slide the left hand down as low as the chin.

[Second motion.) Make a half face to the right on
the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, place
the right foot at the same time close behind and at
right angles with the left, the hollow of the right foot
against the left heel ; carry the piece opposite to the
right shoulder ; bring down the piece with the right
hand into the left, which will seize it at the tail-band,
the thumb extended on the stock, the butt under the

64 School of the Soldier — Part 11.

right fore-arm, the small of the stock against the body,
and about two inches under the right breast, the muz-
zle at the height of the eye, the left elbow supported
against the side, the right hand grasping the small of
the stock.

9. Prime.

One time and one motion.

114. Place the thumb of the right hand on the ham-
mer (the fingers remaining under and against the
guard) and half-cock the piece ; brush off the old cap,
and with the thumb and first two fingers of the right
hand take the cap from the pouch, place it firmly on
the cone by pushing it down with the thumb, and
seize the piece by the small of the stock.

10. Shoulder — Aems.

One time and two motions.

115. [First ^notion.) Face to the front by turning
on the left heel ; at the same time bring the piece
briskly with the right hand to the left shoulder, and
place the left hand under the butt.

( Second motion.) Let the right hand fall smartly into
its position at shoulder arms.

Ready — (From the position of prime.)
One time and one motion.

116. Place the thumb of the right hand on the
hammer (the fingers remaining under and against the
guard), cock the piece, and seize the small of the stock.

Ready — (From the position of shoulder arms.)
One time and four motions.

117. [First motion.) Turn the piece with the left
hand, the lock to the front, seize it at the small of the

School of the Soldier — Part II. 65

stock -with the right hand ; at the same time make a
half face to the right on the left heel, bringing the
left toe to the front, and placing the right foot behind,
and at right angles to the left, the hollow of the foot
against the left heel.

{Second motion.) Bring the piece -with the right
hand to the middle of the body, place the left hand
just above the lock, the thumb extended along the
stock at the height of the chin, the counter (or S) plate
turned towards the body, the rammer obliquely to tho
left and front.

[Third motion.) Place the thumb on the hammer,
the fore-finger under and on the guard, the other three
fingers joined to the first, the elbow at the height of
the hand.

[Fourth motion.) Close the right elbow smartly to
the body in cockingy without bending the wrist, seize
the piece by the small of the stock, let it descend along
the body in the left hand to the tail-band, which will
remain at the height of the shoulder.

Aim.

118. (As in the manual for the Rifle.)

FiBE.

119. (As in the manual for the Rifle.)

Load — (From the Fire.)
One time and two motions.

120. [First motion.) Bring back the piece quickly
with both hands, depress the butt strongly by extend-
ing the right arm, and carry it with the arm thus
extended, to the left side, the barrel to the front and
opposite to the left shoulder, the left hand at the height
of the chin, the back of the hand to the front, the left

GG t^chool of the Soldier— V-^ri II.

fore-arm toncliinp; the stock : at the same time face to
the front and carry the rip;ht foot forward, the heel
against the hollow of the left foot.

[Srcond inofion.) Let go the handle with the rip;ht
liand, let the ])iece descend throu;;h the left to the
ground, without shock, aud take the position of the
second motion of load.

Shoulder — Arms. (From the fire.)
One time and tico motions.

121. [First motion.) Bring back the piece with both
hands, face to the front, carry the piece against the
left shoulder, and place the left hand under the butt.

[Second motion.) Let the right hand iall smartly
to its position. The squad being in position of aim,
the instructor, to habituate the soldiers to wait for the
word fire, sometimes commands:

Recover — Arms.

122. (As in manual for Rifle.) The men being in
the position of the fourth motion of ready, if the
instructor wishes them to come to a shoulder, he com-
mands :

Shoulder — Arms.

123. At the word shoulder, the squad will face to
the front, and bring tlicir pieces to the middle of the
body again ; the loft thumb at the height of the chin^
the little finger just above the lock; next place the
right thumb on the head of the hammer, su|)pt)rt the
fore-finger on the trigger, sustain the hammer carefully
in its descent at the same time, to the position of half-
cock, then seize the small of the stock with the right
hand. At the word arms, carry the piece to the
shoulder smartly, and take the position of shoulder
arms.

School of the Soldier — Part II. 67

To load in /our times — (or pauses,')

124. The instructor commands :

1. Load in four times. 2. Load.

Execute the first time of loading, handle cartridge,
tear cartridge, charge cartridge.

Two.

125. Draw rammer, enter it as far as the hand and
ram twice.

Three.

126. Return rammer, cast about, and prime.

Four.

127. Execute the tenth time of loading.

128. The soldiers being at a shoulder, when the
instruetor may wish to return bayonets, he commands :

Unfix — Bayonets.
One time and three motions.

{Fi7'st motion.) Drop the piece by a smart extension
of the left arm, seize it with the right hand above and
near the tail-band.

[Second motion.) Drop the piece with the right hand
along the left thigh, seize it with the left hand abov©
the right, lengthen out the left arm, rest the butt on
the ground, without shock, and carry the right hand
at the same time to the bayonet, with the thumb lower
the clasp against the stop, and then seize the bayonet
at the socket and shank.

[Third motion.) "Wrest off the bayonet, return it to
the scabbard, place the little finger on the butt of the
rammer, lower the left hand along the barrel in extend-
ing the arm, without depressing the shoulder.

68 School of the Sohlicr—VaH II.

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and three motions.

129. {First mntion.) Raise the piece witli the left
hfind ftlunj; the loft hide, the hand at the height of the
chin, the fore-arm touching the piece, tljo harrel to the
fn)nt ; dmp at tlie name time tlie riglit liand to seize
the piece a little above the handle, the f(ire-finger
touching the cock, and the thumb on the counter-plate.

(Second motion.) Raise the piece with the right
hand, drop the left, and place it under the butt, ])ring
back the right heel to the side of the left, anil on the
panic line; support the piece with the right hand
against the shoulder, in the position prescribed for
shoulder arms, the right hand resting on, without
grasping the piece.

( Tliird motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand into
its position by the side of the thigh.

Fix — Bayonet.

130. {Fir.st and second vwlionn.) As the first and
second niittions of unfix bayonet, except that at the
end of the second motion, the right hand will go to
seize bayunct by the s(K'ket and shank, so that the
lower (now upper) end of the socket shall extend about
an inch above the heel of the palm.

[Third motion.) Draw the Itayonet from the scab-
bard, carry and fix it on the muzzle, turning the clasp
towjirds the body with the right thumb; phtoe the
little finger on the head of the rammer, lower the left
hand along the barrel, in extending the arm.

Shoulder — Arms.
The same as from the unfix bayonet.

School of the Soldier — Part II. G9

Secure — Arms.
One time and two motions.

131. [First motion.) Seize quickly the piece with
the rio[;ht hand, the thumb on the counter plate, and
the fore-finger against the cock ; detach the piece from
the shoulder at the same instant, the barrel to the
front, seize it at the tail-band with the left hand, the
thumb extended on the rammer, the piece erect, oppo-
site to the shoulder, the left elbow on the piece.

[Second motion.) Reverse the piece, p<is8 it under
the left arm, the left hand remaining at the tail-band,
the thumb on the rammer to prevent it from sliding
out, the little finger resting against the hip, and the
right hand falling at the same time into its position.

Shoulder — Arms.

One time and two motions. '

132. [First motion.) Raise the piece with the left
hand, but not too suddenly, lest the rammer should fly
out; seize the handle with the right hand to support it
against the shoulder, quit the hold of the left hand,
and place quickly this hand under the butt.

[Second motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand
into its position ; drop at the same time the piece into
the position of shouldered arms.

Trail — Arms.

One time and two motions.

133. [First motion.) As the first motion of order
arms.

[Second motion.) Incline a little the muzzle to the
front, the butt to the rear, and about three inches from
the ground ; the right hand supported at the hip, will
sustain the piece so that the men of the rear rank may
not touch with their bayonets the men in front of
them.

70 Sclwol of the Soldier— VMi II.

Shoulder — Arms.

134. At the command shoulder, raise the piece per-
pendicularly in the right hand; at the command arms,
execute \Yhat has been prescribed for the shoulder from
the position of order arms.

To right shoulder, shift — Arms.

One time and one motion.

135. Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock to
the front, seize it at the same time with the right hand
at the handle, place it on the right shoulder, the left
hand not quitting the butt, the lock plate upwards, the
muzzle up; sustain the piece in this position by plac-
ing the right hand on the flat of the butt; let fall the
left hand by the side.

Shoulder — Arms.

13G. Raise the piece by extending the right arm,
seize it with the left hand above the lock, carry it
against the left shoulder, turning the barrel to the
froiit, the right hand being at the handle, place the
left hand under the butt, and let the right fall into its
position.

Arms — At will. '

One time and one motion.

137. Carry the piece at pleasure on either shoulder,
or with one or both hands, the muzzle always up.

Shoulder — Arms.

138. Retake smartly the position of shoulder arms.

School of the Soldier— Vhrt 11. 71

Inspection of Arms.

139. The squad being at ordered arms, and having
the bayonet in the scabbard, if the instructor wishes
to cause an inspection of arms, he will command:

Inspection of — Arms.

One time and three motions.

{First motion.) Face to the right once and a half
on the left heel, carrying the right foot perpendicu-
larly to the rear of the alignment, about six inches
from, and at right angles with, the left foot, seize
promptly the piece with the left hand a little above the
the middle band, incline the muzzle to the rear with-
out displacing the heel of the butt, the rammer turned
towards the body ; carry at the same time the right
hand to the bayonet, and seize it as has been pre-
scribed, No. 130.

[Second motion.) Draw the bayonet from the scab-
bard, carry and tix it on the muzzle; seize next the
rammer, draw it as has been explained in loading ia
ten times, and let it glide to the bottom of the bore.

[Third motion.) Face promptly to the front, seize
the piece with the right hand, and retake the position
of ordered arms.

The instructor will then inspect in succession the
piece of each man, in passing along the front of the
rank. Each, as the instructor reaches him, will raise
smartly his piece with his right hand, seize it with the
left between the tail-band and the feather-spring [or
guide sight], the lock to the front, the left hand at the
height of the chin, the piece opposite to the left eye.
The instructor will take it with the right hand at the
handle, and after inspecting it, will return it to the
soldier, who will receive it back with the right hand
and replace it in the position of ordered arms.

72 School of the Soldier— V^ri II.

"When the instructor shall have passed him, each
soldier will retake the position prescribed at the com-
mand inspection of arms, and return the rammer;
after which he will face to the front.

140. If, instead of inspection of arms, it be the vrish
of the instructor only to cause bayonet to be fixed, he
•will command:

Fix — Bayonet.

Take the position indicated, No. 130, (first motion),
fix bayonets as has been explained, and immediately
face to the front.

Bayonets fixed, if it be the wish of the instructor,
after firinf^. to ascertain whether the pieces have been
discharged, he will command :

Spring — Rammers.

As in manual for the rifle.

The instructor, for the purpose stated, can take the
rammer by the small end, and spring it in the barrel,
or cause each man to make the rammer ring in the
barrel.

Each man, after the instructor passes him, -will re-
turn rammer, and face to the front.

Arms — Port.

^ One time and one motion.

141. Throw the piece diagonally across the body,
the lock to the front, seize it smartly at the same in-
stant with both hands, the right at the handle, the left
at the tail-band, the two thumbs pointing towards the
muzzle, the barrel sloping upwards and crossing oppo-
site to the point of the left shoulder, the butt propor-
tionally lowered. The palm of the right hand will be
above, and that of the left under the piece, the nails of
of both hands next to the body, to which the eibowa
will be closed.

School of the Soldier— Vart III. 73

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and two motions.

(First motion.) Bring the piece smartly to the left
shoulder, placing the left hand under the butt.

{Second motion.) Drop the right hand smartly by
the side.

PART THIRD.

310. When the recruits are well established in the
principles and mechanism of the step^ the jjosition of
the body, and manual of arms , the instructor will unite
eight men, at least, and twelve men, at most, in order
to teach them the principles of alignment, the princi-
ples of the touch of elbows in marching to the front,
the principles of the march by the flank, wheeling
from a halt, wheeling in marching, and the change of
direction to the side of the guide. He will place the
squad in one rank elbow to elbow, and number the
men from right to left.

Lesson I.
Alignments.

311. The instructor will at first teach the recruits to
align themselves man by man, in order the better to
make them comprehend the principles of alignment;
to this end, he will command the two men on the right
flank to march two paces to the front, and having
aligned them, he will caution the remainder of the
squad to move up, as they may be successively called,
each by his number, and align themselves successively
on the line of the first two men.

312. Each recruit, as designated by his number,
will turn the head and eyes to the right as prescribed

74 School of the Soldier— V^xi III.

in the firat lesson of the first part, and will march in
quick time two paces forward, shortening; the last, so
as to find himself about six inches behind the new
alignment, which he ought never to pass: he will
next move up steadily by steps of two or three inches,
the hams extended, to the side of the man next to
him on the alignment, so that, without deranging the
head, the line of the eyes, or that of the shoulders, he
may find himself in the exact line of his neighbor,
whose elbow he will lightly touch without opening his
own.

313. The instructor seeing the rank well aligned,
will command :

Front.

314. At this, the recruits will turn eyes to the front,
and remain firm.

315. Alignments to the left will be executed on the
same principles.

316. When the recruits shall have thus learned to
align themselves man by man, correctly, and without
groping or jostling, the instructor will cause the entire
rank to align itself at once by the command :

Right (or left) — Dress.

317. At this, the rank, except the two men placed
in advance as a basis of alignment, will move up in
quick time, and place themselves on the new line, ac-
cording to the principles prescribed No. 312.

318. The instructor, placed five or six paces in front,
and facing the rank, will carefully observe that the
principles are followed, and then pass to the flank that
has served as the basis, to verify the alignment.

310. The instructor seeing the greater number of
the rank aligned, will command :

Front.

320. The instructor may afterwards order tMs or

School of the Soldier— Tart III. 75

that ^\e forward or hack, designating each by its num-
ber. The file or files designated, only, will slightly
turn the head towards the basis, to judge how much
they ought to move up or back, steadily place them-
selves on the line, and then turn eyes to the front,
without a particular command to that eff'ect.

321. Alignments to the rear will be executed on
the same principles, the recruits stepping back a
little beyond the line, and then dressing up according
to the principles prescribed No. 312, the instructor
commanding :

Hiffht (or left) backward — Dress.

322. After each alignment, the instructor will ex-
amine the position of the men, and cause the rank to
come to ordered arms, to prevent too much fatigue,
and also the danger of negligence at shoiddered arms.

Lesson II.

323. The men having learned, in the first and second
parts, to march with steadiness in common time, and
to take steps equal in length and swiftness, will be
exercised in the third part only in quick time, double
quick time, and the run; the instructor will cause
them to execute successively, at these different gaits,
the march to the front, the facing about in marching,
the march by the flank, the wheels at a halt and in
marching, and the changes of direction to the side of
the guide.

324. The instructor will inform the recruits that
at the command march, they will always move off in
quick time, unless this command should be preceded
by that of double quick.

To march to the front.

325. The rank being correctly aligned, when the
instructor shall wish to cause it to march by the front,

76 School of the SoIdier^TsiTt III.

he will place a well instructed man on the ri^ht or the
left, accordinp; to the pide on which he may wish the
guide to be, and command :

1. Squad forward. 2. Guide Tight [or left).
3. March.

?>1C\. At the command march, the rank will step off
Rmarlly with the left loot ; the guide will take care to
march straight to the front, keeping his shoulders
always in a square with that line.

.''27. The instructor will observe, in marching to the
front, that the men touch lightly the elbow towards
the side of the guide ; that they do not open out the
left elbow, nor the right arm ; that they yieUl to pres-
sure coming from the side of the guide, and resist that
coming from the opposite side ; that they recover by
insensible degrees the slight touch of the elbow, if
lost; that they maintain the head direct to the front,
no matter on which side the guide may be ; and if
found before or behind the alignment, that the man in
fault corrects himself by shortening or lengthening
the step, by degrees, almost insensible.

3'{(l. The men being well established in the principles
of the direct march, the instructor will exercise them
in marching obliquely. The rank being in march, the
instructor will command :

1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March.

331. At the second command, each man will make
a half face to the right or left and will then march
straight forward in the new direction. As the men
no longer touch elbows, they will glance ah)ng the
shoulders of the nearest liles, towards the side to
which they are obliquing, and will regulate their steps
BO that the shoulders shall always be behind that of
their next neighbor on that side, and that his head
shall conceal the heads of the other men in the rank.

School of the Soldier— Part III. 77

Besides this, the men should preserve the same length
of pace, and the same decree of obliquity.

332. The instructor wishing to resume the primitive
direction, will command :

1. Forward. 2. March.

333. At the second command, each man will make
a half face to the left (or right), and all will then
march straight to the front, conforming to the princi-
ples of the direct march.

To march to the front in double quick time.

334. "When the several principles, heretofore ex-
plained, have become familiar to the recruits, and they
shall be well established in the position of the body,
the bearing of arms, and the mechanism, length and
swiftness of the step, the instructor will pass them
from quick to double quick time, and the reverse, observ-
ing not to make them march obliquely in double quick
time, till they are well established in the cadence of
this step.

335. The squad being at a march in quick time, the
instructor will command :

1. Double quick. 2. March.

336. At the command march, which will be given
when either foot is coming to the ground, the squad
will step off in double quick time. The men will
endeavor to follow the principles laid down in the first
part of this book, and to preserve the alignment.

337. AVhen the instructor wishes the squad to resume
the step in quick time, he will command :

1. Quick time. 2. March.

338. At the command march, which will be given
■when either foot is coming to the ground, the squad
will retake the step in quick time.

78 School of the SoUier—ruTt III.

339. The squad bcinj; in march, the instructor will
halt it hj the commands and means prescribed Nos.
Oh and 00. The command h<ilt will be given an instant
before the foot \» ready to be phiced on the ground.

.'U<l. The P(juad being in march in doul)le quick
time, the instructor will occasinnally cause it to mark
time by the comtnands prcHcribed No. 240. The men
will then mark double quick time, without altering
the cadence of the step. lie will aho cause them to
pasM from the direct to the oblique step, and recifiro-
cally. conforming to what has been prescribed No. 330,
and f(dl(»wing.

341. The squad being at a halt, the instructor will
cause it to march in double quick time, by preceding
the command march, by double quick.

34'J. The instructor will endeavor to regulate well
the cadence of this step.

To face about in marching.

343. If the squad be marching in quick, or double
quick time, and the instructor should wish to march it
in retreat, he will command :

1. Squad, right about. 2. March.

344. At the command //?a/r/t, which will be given at
the instant the left foot is coming to the ground, the
recruit will bring this foot to the ground, and turning
on it will face to the rear ; he will then place the right
foot in the new direction, and step off with the left
foot.

To march backicanh.

34r), The squad being at a halt, if the instructor
should wish to march it in the back step, he will com-
mand :

School of the Soldier— Tart 111. 79

1. Squad backward. 2. Guide left (or right.) 3. March.

346. The back step will be executed by the means
prescribed No. 247.

347. The instructor, in this step, will be watchful
that the men do not lean on each other.

348. As the march to the front in quick time should
only be executed at shouldered arms, the instructor
in order not to fatigue the men too much, and also to
prevent negligence in gait and position, will halt the
equad from time to time, and cause arms to be ordered.

349. In marching at double quick time, the men will
always carry their pieces on the right shoulder, or at a
trail. This rule is general.

350. If the instructor shall wish the pieces carried
at a trail, he will give the command trail arms, before
the command double quick. If, on the contrary, this
command be not given, the men will shift their pieces
to the right shoulder at the command double quick. In
either case, at the command halt, the men will bring
their pieces to the position of shoulder arms. This rule
is general.

Lesson III.
The march hy the JianJc.

351. The rank being at a halt, and correctly aligned,
the instructor will command :

1. Squad, right — Face. 2. Forward. 3. March.

352. At the last part of the first command, the rank
will face to the right; the even numbered men, after
facing to the right, will step quickly to the right side
of the odd numbered men, the latter standing fast, so
that when the movement is executed, the men will be
formed into files of two men abreast.

80 School of the Soldiei — Part III.

353. At the third command, the squad will step off
smartly with the left foot ; the files keeping aligned,
and preserving their intervals.

354. The march by the left flank will be executed
by the same commands, substituting the word left, for
right, 'Andi by inverse means; in this case, the even
numbered men, after facing to the left, will stand fast
and the odd numbered will place themselves on their
left.

355. The instructor will place a well instructed
soldier by the side of the recruit who is at the head of
the rank, to regulate the step, and to conduct him ;
and it will be enjoined on this recruit to march always
elbow to elbow with the soldier.

358. When he shall wish to halt the rank, marching
by the flank, and to cause it to face to the front, he
will command :

1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Front.

359. At the second command, the rank will halt,
and afterwards no man will stir, although he may have
lost his distance. This prohibition is necessary, to
habituate the men to a constant preservation of their
distances.

360. At the third command, each man will front by
facing to the left, if marching by the right flank, and
by a face to the right, if marching by the left flank.
The rear rank men will at the same time move quickly
into their places, so as to form the squad again into
one rank.

361. When the men have become accustomed to
marching by the flank, the instructor will cause them
to change direction by file ; for this purpose, he will
command :

1. By file left (or right). 2. March.

362. At the command march, the first file will change

School of the Soldier— TslH III. 81

direction to the left [or right] in describing a small
arc of a circle, and will then march straight forward ;
the two men of this file, in wheeling, will keep up the
touch of the elbows, and the man on the side to which
the wheel is made, will shorten the first three or four
pteps. Each file will come successively to wheel on
the same spot where that which preceded it wheeled.
363. The instructor will also cause the squad to face
by the right or left flank in marching, and for this
purpose will command:

1. Squad by the right (or left) flank. 2. March.

3G4. At the second command, which will be given a
little before either foot comes to the ground, the recruits
will turn the body, plant the foot that is raised in the
new direction, and step oflT with the other foot without
altering the cadence of the step ; the men will double
or undouble rapidly.

305. If, in facing by the right or the left flank, the
squad should fjice to the rear, the men will come into
one rank, agreeably to the principles indicated No.
360. It is to be remarked it is the men who are in
rear who always move up to form into single rank, and
in such manner as never to invert the order of the
numbers in the rank.

360. If, when the squad has been faced to the rear,
the instructor should cause it to face by the left flank,
it is the even numbers who will double by moving to
the left of the odd numbers ; but if by the right flank,
it is the odd numbers who will double to the right of
the even numbers.

367. This lesson, like the preceding one, will be
practiced with pieces at a shoulder ; but the instructor
may, to give relief by change, occasionally order siq)-
port arms, and he will require of the recruits marching
in this position, as much regularity as in the former.

82 ScJwol of the Soldier— FsiTt III.

The march hy the jianlc in double quick time.

368. The principles of the march by the flank in
double quick time, are the same as in quick time. The
instructor will give the commands prescribed No. 351,
taking care always to give the command double quick
before that of march.

360. He will pay the greatest attention to the cadence
of the step.

370. The instructor will cause the change of direc-
tion, and the march by the flank, to be executed in
double quick time, by the same commands, and accord-
ing to the same principles, as in quick time.

371. The instructor will cause the pieces to be car-
ried either on the rlglit shoidder or at a trail.

372. The instructor will sometimes march the squad
by the flank, without doubling the files.

373. The principles of this march are the same as
in two ranks, and it will always be executed in quick
time.

374. The instructor will give the commands pre-
scribed No. 351, but he will be careful to caution the
squad not to double files.

375. The instructor will be watchful that the men
do not bend their knees unequally, which would cause
them to tread on the heels of the men in front, and
also to lose the cadence of the step and their distances.

376. The various movements in this lesson will be
executed in single rank. In the changes of direction,
the leading man will change direction without altering
the length or the cadence of the step. The instructor
will recall to the attention of the men, that in facing
by the right or left flank in marching, they will not
double, but march in one rank.

School of the Soldier— Vd^xi III. 83

Lesson IV.

WHEELINGS.

General principles of wheeling.

377. Wheelings are of two kinds: from halts, or on
fixed pivots, and in march, or on moveable pivots..

378. Wheeling on a fixed pivot takes place in pass-
ing a corps from the order in battle to the order in
column, or from the latter to the former.

379. Wheels in marching take place in changes of
direction in column, as often as this movement ia exe-
cuted to the side opposite the guide.

380. In wheels from a halt, the pivot-man only turns
in his place, without advancing or receding.

381. In the wheels in marching, the pivot takes
steps of nine or eleven inches, according as the squad
is marching in quick or double quick time, so as to
clear the wheeling point, which is necessary, in order
that the subdivisions of a column may change direc-
tion without losing their distances, as will be explained
in the school of the company.

382. The man on the wheeling flank will take the
full step of twenty eight inches, or thirty-three inches,
according to the gait.

Wheeling from a Jialt, or on a fxcd pivot.

383. The rank being at a halt, the instructor will
place a well-instructed man on the wheeling flank to
conduct it, and then command :

1. By squad, right wheel. 2. March.

384. At the second command, the rank will step oflf
with the left foot, turning at the same time the head a
little to the left, the eyes fixed on the line of the eyes

84 School of the Soldier— Fart III.

of the men to their left ; the pivot-man -will merely
mark time in gradually turning his body, in order to
conform himself to the movement of the marching
flank; the man who conducts this flank will take steps
of twenty-eight inches, and from the first step advance
a little the left shoulder, cast his eyes from time to
time along the rank, and feel constantly the elbow of
the next man lightly, but never push him.

3S5. The other men will feel lightly the elbow of
the next man towards the pivot, resist pressure com-
ing from the opposite side, and each will conform
himself to the marching flank — shortening his step
according to his approximation to the pivot.

386. The instructor will make the rank wheel round
the circle once or twice before halting, in order to
cause the principles to be the better understood, and
he will be watchful that the centre does not break.

387. He will cause the wheel to the left to be exe-
cuted according to the same principles.

388. When the instructor shall wish to arrest the
wheel, he will command :

1. Squad. 2. Halt.

389. At the second command, the rank will halt,
and no man stir. The instructor, going to the flank
opposite the pivot, will place the two outer men of
that flank in the direction he may wish to give to the
rank, without, however, displacing the pivot, who will
conform the line of his shoulders to this direction.
The instructor will take care to have between these
two men, and the pivot, only the space necessary to
contain the other men. He will then command :

Left (or riffht) — Dress.

390. At this tjie rank will place itself on the align-
ment of the two men established as the basisj, in con-
formity with the principles prescribed.

School of the Soldier — Part III. 85

391. The instructor will next command Front
■which will be executed as prescribed No. 314. '

Wheeling in marching, or on a moveable pivot.

393. When the recruits have been brought to exe-
cute well the wheel from a halt, they will be taueht to
wheel in marching.

394. To this end, the rank being in march, when
the instructor shall wish to cause it to change direc-
tion to the reverse flank, (to the side opposite to the
guide or .pivot flank,) he will command :

1. Right (or left) wheel. 2. March.

^ 395. The first command will be given when the rank
18 yet Jour paces from the wheeling point.

390. At the second command, the wheel will be ex-
ecuted in the same manner as from a halt, except that
the touch of the elbow will remain towards the march-
ing flank ((.r side of the guide) instead of the side of
the actual pivot ; that the pivot man, instead of merely
turning in his place, will conform himself to the move-
nient of the marching flank, feel lightly the elbow of
the next man, take steps of full nine inches, and thus
gain ground forward in describing a small curve so as
to clear the point of the wheel. The middle of the rank
will bend slightly to the rear. As soon as the move-
ment shall commence, the man who conducts the
marching flank will cast his eyes on the ground over
which he will have to pass.

397. The wheel being ended, the instructor will
command :

1. Forward. 2. March.

398. The first command will be pronounced when
four paces are yet required to complete the chang^e of

86 School of the Soldier— Part III.

399. At the command march, which will be given
at the instant of completing the wheel, the man who
conducts the marching flank will direct himself straight
forward ; the pivot man and all the rank will retake
the step of twenty-eight inches, and bring the head
direct to the front.

Turning, or change of direction to the side of the
guide.

400. The change of direction to the side of the guide,
in marching, will be executed as follows : The in-
structor will command :

1. Left (or right) turn. 2. March.

401. The first command will be given when the rank
is yet four paces from the turning point.

402. At the command march, to be pronounced at
the instant the rank ought to turn, the guide will face
to the left (or right) in marching, and move forward in
the new direction without slackening or quickening
the cadence, and without shortening or lengthening the
step. The whole rank will promptly conform itself to
the new direction : to effect which, each man "will ad-
vance the shoulder opposite to the guide, take the dou-
ble quick step, to carry himself in the new direction,
turn the head and eyes to the side of the guide, and
retake the touch of the elbow on that side, in placing
himself on the alignment of the guide, from whom he
will take the step, and then resume the direct position
of the head. Each man will thus arrive successively
on the alignment.

Wheeling and changing direction to the side of the
guide, in double quick time.

403. When the recruits comprehend and execute
well, in quick time, the wheels at a halt, and in

School of the Soldier— Part Til. 87

marching, and the change of direction to the side of
the guide, the instructor -will cause the same move-
ments to be repeated in double quick time.

404. These various movements will be executed by
the same commands and according to the same princi-
ples as in quick time, except that the command double
quick will precede that of march. In wheeling while
marching, the pivot man will take steps of eleven
inches, and in the changes of direction to the side
of the guide, the men on the side opposite the guide
must increase the gait in order to bring themselves
into line.

405. The instructor, in order not to fatigue the
recruits, and not to divide their attention, will cause
them to execute the several movements of which this
lesson is composed, first without arms, and next, after
the mechanism be well comprehended, with arms.

Lesson V.
To stacJc arms.

The men being at order arms, the instructor will
command :

Stack — Arms. ' •

410. At this command, the front rank man of every
even numbered file will pass his piece before him,
seizing it with the left hand near the upper band ; will
place the butt a little in advance of his left toe, the
barrel turned towards the body, and draw the rammer
slightly from its place ; the front rank man of every
odd numbered file will also draw the rammer slightly,
and pass his piece to the man next on his left, who
will seize it with the right hand near the upper band,
and place the butt a little in advance of the right toe
of the man next on his right, the barrel turned to the

88 School of the Soldier— Vart III.

front ; he will then cross the rammers of the two
pieces, the rammer of the piece of the odd numbered
man being inside ; the rear rank man of every even
file will also draw his rammer, lean his piece forward,
the lock-plate downwards, advance the right foot about
six inches, and insert the rammer between the rammer
and barrel of the piece of his front rank man ; with
his left hand he will place the butt of his piece on the
ground, thirty-two inches in rear of, and perpendicu-
lar to, the front rank, bringing back his right foot by
the side of the left ; the front rank man of every even
file will at the same time lean the stack to the rear,
quit it with his right hand and force all the rammers
down. The stack being thus formed, the rear rank
man of every odd file will pass his piece into his left
hand, the barrel to the front and inclining it forward,
will rest it on the stack.

411. The men of both ranks having taken the posi-
tion of the soldier without arms, the instructor will
command :

1. Break ranks. 2. March.

To resume arms.

412. Both ranks being re-formed in rear of their
stacks, the instructor will command:

Take — Arms.

413. At this command, the rear rank man of every
odd numbered file will withdraw his piece from the
stack ; the front rank man of every even file will seize
his own piece with the left hand and that of the man
on his right with his right hand, both above the lower
band ; the rear rank man of the even file will seize
his piece with the right hand below the lower band ;
these two men will raise up the stack to loosen the
rammers ; the front rank man of every od*d file will

School of the Soldier— Vavi III. 89

facilitate the disenfj^agement of the rammers, if neces-
sary, by drawing them out slightly with the left hand,
and will receive his piece from the hand of the man
next on his left ; the four men will retake the position
of the soldier at order arms.

END OF THE SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER.

TITLE THIRD.

SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

General Rules and Division of the School of the
Company.

1. Instruction by company will always precede that
by battalion, and the object being to prepare the sol-
diers for the higher school, the exercises of detail by
company will be strictly adhered to, as well in respect
to principles, as the order of progression herein pre-
scribed.

2. There will be attached to a company undergoing
elementary instruction, a captain, a covering ser-
geant, and a certain number of file-closers, the whole
posted in the manner indicated. Title First, and, ac-
cording to the same Title, the officer charged with the
exercise of such company will herein be denominated
the instructor.

Manner of forming the company.^

216. The whole company being assembled on its
parade ground, or in the rendezvous, the first, or or-
derly sergeant, will command :

Fall in — Company.

At this command, the corporals and privates will
form in one rank, faced to the right, and in the order

* Gilham.

School of the Company. 91

of height from right to left, the tallest man on the
right (now head of the company), the next tallest man
immediately covering the first, and so on to the left or
rear of the rank, in which position will be placed the
shortest man. The other sergeants will take post in
the rank of file-closers, two paces to the right of the
company, and assist the first sergeant in forming the
company.

When the men have their places, the first sergeant
•will command :

Front.

The second sergeant, who is the left guide of the
company, will now place himself on tho left of the
company, and the orderly sergeant will promptly com-
mand :

1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Left — Face.
3. March.

At the command left face, the whole company will
face to the left, except the guide and man on the left,
who stand fast.

At the command march, the whole of the men who
faced to the left will step off together ; the second
man, counting from the left, will place himself in the
rear rank, behind the man next to the guide, and face
to the front ; the two following men will, in like man-
ner, in closing up, form the next file, the third man in
the front, and the fourth in the rear rank behind him,
and all the other men will come successively to form
files, two deep, to the right of those already formed.*

The officers will now take their posts as prescribed
in No. 12 ; if the captain has to discharge the duties
of instructor, the first lieutenant will take his place

*When the company is in good discipline, the files may be
formed in two ranks at once, each man having his proper number
in the company depending upon his height, and being able to take
his appropriate place without creating confusion.

92 School of the Company — Lesson I.

on the right of the front rank, the second lieutenant
replacing the first behind the centre of the fourth
section.

4. The instructor will then cause the files to be
numbered, and fur this purpose will command :

In each rank — Count twos. h

5. At this command, the men will count in each
rank, from right to left, pronouncing in a loud and
distinct voice, in the same tone, without hurry and
without turning the head, one, two, according to the
place which each one occupies. He will also cause the
company to be divided into platoons and sections,
taking care that the first platoon is always composed
of an even number of files.

LESSON FIRST.

Article First.
To ojpen ranks.

8. The company being at ordered arms, the ranks
and file-closers well aligned, when the instructor shall
wish to cause the ranks to be opened, he will direct
the left guide to place himself on the left of the front
rank, which being executed, he will command :

1. Attention. 2. Company. 8. Shoulder — Arms.
4. To the rear open order.

9. At the fourth command, the covering sergeant,
and the left guide will step ojff smartly to the rear,
four paces from the front rank, in order to mark the
alignment of the rear rank. They will judge this
distance by the eye, without counting the steps.

10. The instructor will place himself at the same
time on the right flank, in order to observe if these

School of the Company — Lesson I. 93

two non-commissioned officers are on a line parallel to
the front rank, and, if necessary, to correct their po-
sitions, which being executed, he will command :

5. March.

11. At this command, the front rank will stand
fast.

12. The rear rank will step to the rear without
counting the steps, and will place themselves on the
alignment marked for this rank, conforming to what
is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 321.

13. The covering sergeant will align the rear rank
on the left guide placed to mark the left of this rank.

14. The file-closers will march to the rear at the
same time with the rear rank, and will place them-
selves two paces from this rank when it is aligned.

15. The instructor seeing the rear rank aligned,
will command :

6. Front.

16. At this command, the sergeant on the left of
the rear rank will return to his place as a file-closer.

Article Second.
Alignments in open ranks.

18. The ranks being open, the instructor will, in
the first exercises, align the ranks, man by man, the
better to inculcate the principles.

19. To effect this, he will cause two or four men on
the right or left of each rank to march two or three
paces forward, and, after having aligned them, com-
mand:

By file right (or left) — Dress.

20. At this the men of each rank will move up suc-
cessively on the alignment, each man being preceded

94 Sclwol of the Company — Lesson I.

by his neighlx»r in the 8nme rank, towards the basifl,
by two pacc«. and huvinj; correctly aligned himself,
will cant his eve.s to the front.

21. SuccosHive ali/^nmcnts having habituated the
8(»Kli<T'< t') (IrrsH correctly, the instructor ■will cause
the ranks to align themselves at once, forward and
backward, soinctinics in a direction parallel, and some-
times in one oblique, to the original direction, giving,
in each case, two, or four men to serve as a basis of
alignment to each rank. To effect which, he will com-
uiund :

1. liiffht (or l^/i)—Dv.F.39. 2. Front.

1. Right {or left) backward — Dress. 2. Front.

22. In oblique alignments, in opened ranks, the
men of the rear rank will not seek to cover their tile-
leaders, as the sole ohject of the exercise is to teach
tliem to align themselves correctly in their respective
ranks, in the different directions.

2.i. In the several alignments, the captain will su-
perintend the front rank and the covering sergeant the
rear rank. For this purpose, they will place them-
selves on the side by "Aliich the ranks are dressed.

24. In oblique alignments, the men will conform the
line of their shoulders to tlio new direction of their
ranks, and will place themselves on the alignment as
has been prescribed in the school of the soldier. No.
317, or No. 321, according as the now direction
shall be in front or rear of the original one.

Article Fourth.
To close ranJcs.
28. Tho instructor will command:

1. Close order. 2. March.

School of the Company — Lesson I. 95

29. At the command march, the rear rank will close
up in quick time, each man directing himself on his
file leader.

Article Fifth.
Alignments J and manual of arms in closed ranks,

30. The ranks being closed, the instructor will cause
to be executed parallel and oblique alignments by the
right and left, forward and backward, observing to
place always two or four files to serve as a basis of
alignment. He will give the commands prescribed,
No. 21. ^

31. In alignments in closed ranks, the captain will
superintend the front rank, and the covering sergeant
the rear rank. They will habituate themselves to
judge the alignment by the lines of the eyes and
shoulders, in casting a glance of the eye along the
front and rear of the ranks.

32. The moment the captain perceives the greater
number of the front rank aligned, he will command
Front, and rectify, afterwards, if necessary, the align-
ment of the other men by the means prescribed in the
school of the soldier. No. 320. The rear rank will
conform to the alignment of the front rank, superin-
tended by the covering sergeant.

33. The ranks being steady, the instructor will
place himself on the dank, to verify their alignment.
lie will also see that each rear rank man covers accu-
rately his file-leader.

35. In all alignments, the file-closers will preserve
the distance of two paces from the rear rank.

36. The alignments being ended, the instructor will
cause to be executed the manual of arms.

41. The instructor may also, when he shall judge
proper, cause arms to be stacked, which will be exe-
cuted as prescribed, school of the soldier.

96 School oj the .Company — Lesson 11.

LESSON SECOND.

42. The instructor, wishing to pass to the second
lesson, Avill cause the company to take arms, if stacks
have been formed, and command :

1. Attention, 2. Company. 3. Shoulder — Arms.

43. The instructor will then cause loadings and
firings to be executed in the following order:

Article First.
To load in four times and at will.

44. Loading in four times will be commanded and
executed as prescribed in the school of the soldier,
No 251, and following. The instructor will cause this
exercise to be often repeated, in succession, before
passing to loading at will.

45. Loading at will will be commanded and execu-
cuted as prescribed in the school of the soldier, No.
256. In priming, when loading in four times, and
also at will, the captain and covering sergeant will
half face to the right with the men, and face to the
front when the man next to them, respectively, brings
his piece to the shoulder.

Article Second.
To fire hy company.

48. The instructor, wishing to cause the fire by com-
pany to be executed, will command :

1. Fire by company. 2. Commence firing.

49. At the first command, the captain will promptly
place himself opposite the centre of his company, and

School of the Company — Lesson II. 97

four paces in rear of the line of file-closers; the cov-
ering sergeant will retire to that line, and place him-
self opposite to his interval. This rule is general, for
both the captain and covering sergeant, in all the differ-
ent firings,

50. At the second command, the captain will add:
1. Company; 2. Ready; 3. Aim; 4. Fire; 5. Load.

5L At the command load, the men will load their
pieces, and then take the position of ready, as pre-
scribed in the school of the soldier.

52. The captain will immediately recommence the
firing, by the commands :

1. Company. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load.

53. The firing will be thus continued until the sig-
nal to cease firing is sounded.

54. The captain will sometimes cause aim to be
taken to the right and left, simply observing to pro-
nounce right (ur left) oblique, before the command
aim.

Article Third.
The fire hy file.

55. The instructor wishing to cause the fire by file
to be executed, will command :

1. Fire by file. 2. Company. 3. Ready.
4. Commence firing.

56. The third and fourth commands will be execu-
ted as prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 275
and following.

57. The fire will be commenced by the right file of
the company ; the next file will take aim at the in-
stant the first brings down pieces to-reload, and so on
to the left ; but this progression will only be observed
in the first discharge, after which each man will re-

98 Scliool of the Company — Lesson II.

load and fire without regulating; himself by others,
conforming himself to what is prescribed in the school
of the soldier, No. 280.

Article Fourth.

The fire hy ranlc.

58. The instructor wishing the fire by rank to be
executed, will command :

1. Fire hy rank. 2. Company. 3. Ready.
4. Rear rank — Aim. 5. Fire. 6. Load.

69. The fifth and sixth commands will be executed
as is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 285
and following.

GO. When the instructor sees one or two pieces in
the rear rank at a ready, he will command :

1. Front rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load.

61. The firing will be continued thus by alternate
ranks, until the signal is given to cease firing.

62. The instructor will sometimes cause aim to be
taken to the right and left, conforming to what is pre-
scribed, No. 54.

6.3. The instructor will cause the firing to cease,
whether by company, by file, or by rank, by sounding
the signal to cease firing, and at the instant this sound
commences, the men will cease to fire, conforming to
what is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No.
282.

64. The signal to cease firing will be always followed
by a bugle note, or tap of the drum; at which sound,
the captain and covering sergeant will promptly resume
their places in line, and will rectify, if necessary, the
alignment of the ranks. • j

67. The fire by file being that which is most fre-j
quently used against an enemy, it is highly important

School of ilie Compani/— Lesson II. 99

that it be rendered perfectly. familiar to the troops.
The instructor will, therefore, give it almost exclusive
preference, and labor to cause the men to aim vrith
care, and always, if possible, at some particular object.
As it is of the utmost importance that the men should
aim with precision in battle, this principle will be
rigidly enforced in the exercises for purposes of in-
struction.

Article Fifth.
To Jire hy the rear ranJc,

68. The instructor will cause the several fires to be
executed to the rear, that is, by the rear rank. To
effect this, he will command :

1. Face by the rear rank, 2. Company. 3. About — Face.

69. At the first command, the captain will step out
and place himself near to, and facing the right file of
his company ; the covering sergeant, and file closers,
will pass quickly through the captain's interval, and
place themselves faced to the rear, the covering ser-
geant a pace behind the captain, and the file closers
two paces from the front rank opposite to their places
in line, each passing behind the covering sergeant.

70. At the third command, which will be given at
the instant the last file closer shall have passed through
the interval, the company will face about ; the captain
•will place himself in his interval in the rear rank,
now become the front, and the covering sergeant will
cover him in the front rank, now become the rear.

71. The company having faced by the rear rank,
the instructor will cause it to execute the fire by com-
pany, both direct and oblique, the fire by tile, and the
fire by rank, by the commands and means prescribed
in the three preceding articles ; the captain, covering

100 School of the Company — Lesson III.

sergeant, and the men will conform themselves, in like
manner, to what is therein prescribed.

72. The fire by tile will commence on the left of the
company, now become the right. In the fire by rank,
the firing will commence with the front rank, now
become the rear.

73. To resume the proper front, the instructor will
command :

1. Face by the front rank. 2. Company. 3. About — Face.

74. At the first command, the captain, covering ser-
geant and file closers will conform to what is prescribed
Nos. G9 and 70.

75. At the third command, the company having
faced about, the captain and covering sergeant will
resume their places in line.

76. In this lesson, the instructor will impress on the
men the importance of aiming always at some partic-
ular object, and of holding the piece as prescribed in
the school of the soldier, No. 178.

77. The instructor will recommend to the captain to
make a short pause between the commands aim and

fire, to give the men time to aim with accuracy.

LESSON THIRD.

Article First.

To advance in line of battle.

84. The company being in line of battle, and cor-
rectly aligned, when the instructor shall wish to
exercise it in marching by the front, he will assure
himself that the shoulders of the captain and covering
sergeant are perfectly in the direction of their respec-
tive ranks, and that the sergeant accurately covers the
captain ; the instructor will then place himself twenty-

School of the Company — Lesson III. 101

five or thirty paces in front of them, face to the rear,
and place himself exactly on the prolongation of the
line passing between their heels.

85. The instructor, being aligned on the directing
file, will command: °

1. Company, forward.

86. At this, a sergeant, previously designated, \^ill
move six paces in advance of the captain : the instruc-
tor, from the position prescribed, will correctly align
this sergeant on the prolongation of the directing fife.

87. This advanced sergeant who is to be charged
with the direction, will, the moment his position is
assured, take two points on the ground in the straight
line which would pass between his own and the heels
of the instructor.

88. These dispositions being made, the instructor
will step aside, and command :

2. March.

80. At this, the company will step ofi" with life.
The directing sergeant will observe, with the greatest
precision, the length and cadence of the step, march-
ing on the two points he has chosen ; he will take in
succession, and always a little before arriving at the
point nearest to him, new points in advance, exiictly in
the same line with the first two, and at the same distance
of some fifteen or twenty paces from each other. The
captain will march steadily in the trace of the direct-
ing sergeant, keeping always six paces from him ; the
men will each maintain the head direct to the front,
feel lightly the elbow of his neighbor on the side of
direction, and conform himself to the principles pre-
scribed, school of the soldier, for the march by the
front. "^

90. The man next to the captain, will take special
care not to pass him ; to this end he will keep the line
9*

102 ScJiool of the Company — Lesson III.

of his shoulders a little in the rear, but in the same
direction with those of the captain.

91. The file closers will march at the habitual dis-
tance of two paces behind the rear rank.

92. If the men lose the step, the instructor will
command:

To <Ae— Step.

93. At this command, the men will glance towards
the directing sergeant, retake the step from him, and
again direct their eyes to the front.

94. The instructor will cause the captain and cover-
ing sergeant to be posted sometimes on the right, and
sometimes on the left of the company.

95. The directing sergeant, in advance, having the
greatest influence on the march of the company, he
will be selected for the precision of his step, his habit
of maintaining his shoulders in a square with a given
lino of direction, and of prolonging that line without
variation.

Article Second.

To halt the compani/, marching in line of hattUy
and to align it.

99. The instructor, wishing to halt the company,
will command :

1. Company. 2. Halt.

100. At the second command, the company will
halt ; the directing sergeant will remain in advance,
unless ordered to return to the line of file-closers.
The company being at a halt, the instructor may ad-
vance the first three or four files on the side of direc-
tion, and align the company on that basis, or he may
confine himself to causing the alignment to be rectified.

School of the Company — Lesson III. 103

In this last case, he will command : Captain, rectify
the alignment. The captain will direct the covering
sergeant to attend to the rear rank, when each, glanc-
ing his eyes along his rank, will promptly rectify it,
conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the
soldier, No. 320.

Article Third.

Oblique march in line of battle.

101. The company being in the direct march, when
the instructor shall wish to cause it to march obliquely,
he will command :

1. Riffkt (or left) obliqu3. 2. March.

102. At the command march, the company will take
the oblique step. The ruen will accurately observe
the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier,
No. 331. The rear rank men will preserve their dis-
tances, and march in rear of the man next on the right
(or left) of their habitual file-leaders.

103. When the instructor wishes the direct march
to be resumed, he will command:

1. Forward. 2. March.

104. At the command march, the company will re-
sume the direct march. The instructor will move
briskly twenty paces in front of the captain, and facing
the company, will place himself exactly in the pro-
longation of the captain and covering sergeant ; and
then, by a sign, will move the directing sergeant on
the same line, if he be not already on it; the latter
will immediately take two points on the ground be-
tween himself and the instructor, and as he advances,
will take new points of direction, as is explained
No. 89.

104 ScJiool of the Company — Lesson III.

105. In the oblique march, the men not having the
touch of elbows, the guide will always be on the
side towards which the oblique is made, without any
indication to that effect being given ; and when the
direct march is resumed, the guide will be, equally
without indication, on the side where it was previous
to the oblique.

Article Fourth.

To mark time, to march in douhle quick time, and
the hack step.

109. The company being in the direct march and in
quick time, the instructor, to cause it to mark time,
will command :

1. Mark time. 2. March.

110. To resume the marcb, he will command:

1. Forward. 2. March.

111. To cause the march in double quick time, the
instructor will command :

1. Douhle quick. 2. March.

112. The command march will be pronounced at
the instant either foot is coming to the ground.

113. To resume quick time, the instructor will com-
mand :

1. Quick time. 2. March.

114. The command march will be pronounced at the
instant either foot is coming to the ground.

115. The company being at a halt, the instructor
may cause it to march in the back step ; to this effect,
he will command :

1. Company backward. 2. March.

School of the Company — Lesson III. 105

116. The back step will be executed according to
the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier
No. 247, but the use of it being rare, the instructor
will not cause more than fifteen or twenty steps to be
taken in succession, and to that extent but seldom.

117. The instructor ought not to exercise the com-
pany in marching in double quick time till the men
are well established in the length and swiftness of the
pace in quick time: he will then endeavor to render
the march of one hundred and sixty-five steps in the
minute equally easy and familiar, and also cause them
to observe the same erectness of body and composure
of mind, as if marching in quick time.

Article Fifth.
To march in retreat.

119. The company being halted and correctly aligned,
when the instructor shall wish to cause it to march in
retreat, he will command :

1. Company. 2. About — Face.

120. The company having faced to the rear, the
instructor will place himself in front of the directing
file, conforming to what is prescribed, No. 84.

121. The instructor, being correctly established on
the prolongation of the directing file, will command :

3. Company^ forward.

122. At this, the directing sergeant will conform
himself to what is prescribed, "Nos. 8G and 87, with
this difference — he will place himself six paces in front
of the line of file closers, now leading.

123. The covering sergeant will step into the line of
file closers, opposite to his interval, and the captain

106 School of the Company — Lesson III.

will place himself in the rear rank, now become the
front.

124. This disposition being promptly made, the
instructor will command:

4. March.

125. At this, the directing sergeant, the captain,
and the men, will conform themselves to what is pre-
Bcril)ed No. 89, and following.

126. The instructor will cause to be executed, march-
ing in retreat, all that is prescribed for marching in
advance; the commands and the means of execution
will be the same.

127. The instructor having halted the company,
will, when he may wish, cause it to face to the front
by the commands prescribed No. 119. The captain,
the covering sergeant, and the directing sergeant, will
resume their habitual places in line, the moment they
shall have faced about.

128. The company being in march by the front rank,
if the instructor should wish it to march in retreat, he
will cause the right about to be executed while march-
ing, and to this effect will command:

1. Company. 2. Rightabout. 3. March. /"""'

129. At the third command, the company will
promptly face about, and re-commence the march by
the rear rank.

130. The directing Sergeant will face about with the
company, and will move rapidly six paces in front of
the tile closers, and upon the prolongation of the guide.
The instructor will place him in the proper direction
by the means prescribed No. 104. The captain, the
covering sergeant, and the men, will conform to the
principles prescribed for the march in retreat.

131. When the instructor wishes the company to
march by the front rank, he will give the same com-

School of the Company — Lesson IV. 107

mands, and will regulate the direction of the march
by the same means.

132. The instructor will cause to he executed in
double quick time, all the movements prescribed in
the 3d, 4th, 5th and 6th lessons of this school, with the
exception of the march backwards, which will be exe-
cuted only in quick time. lie will give the same
commands, observing to add double quick before the
command march.

133. When the pieces are carried on the right
shoulder, in quick time, the distance between the ranks
will be sixteen inches. Whenever, therefore, the in-
structor brings the company from a shoulder to this
position, the rear rank must shorten a little the first
steps in order to gain the prescribed distance, and
will lengthen the steps, on the contrary, in order
to close up when the pieces are again brought to a
shoulder. In marching in double quick time, the
distance between the ranks will be twenty-six inches,
and the pieces will be carried habitually on the right
shoulder.

134. Whenever a company is halted, the men will
bring their pieces at once to a shoulder at the com-
mand hall. The rear rank will close to its proper dis-
tance. These rules are general.

LESSON FOURTH.

Article First.

To march hy the flanlc.

135. The company being in line of battle, and at a
halt, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to
march by the right flank, he will command:

108 ScJiooI of the Compant/ — Lesson IV.

1. Company, right — Face. 2. Forward. 3. March.

13G. At the first command, the company -vrill face to
tho riojht, the covering sergeant will place himself at
the head of the front rank, the captain having: stepped
out for the purpose, so far as to find himself by the
side of the sergeant, and on his left; the front rank
will double as is prescribed in the school of the soldier,
No. 352; the rear rank -will, at the same time, side
step to the right one pace, and double in the same
manner; so that when the movement is completed, the
files will be formed of four men aligned, and elbow to
elbow. The intervals will be preserved.

137. The file closers will also move by side step to
the right, so that when the ranks are formed, they
will be two paces from the rearmost rank.

138. At the command march, the company will
move ofi" briskly in quick time; the covering sergeant
at the head of the front rank, and the captain on his
left, will march straight forward. The men of each
file will march abreast of their respective front rank
men, heads direct to the front; the file closers will
march opposite their places in line of battle.

140. The instructor will cause the march by the left
flank to be executed by the same commands, substi-
tuting left for right; the ranks will double as has been
prescribed in the school for the soldier, No. 354; the
rear rank will side-step to the left one pace before
doubling.

141. At the instant the company faces to the left,
the left guide will place himself at the head of the
front rank ; the captain wmII pass rapidly to the left,
and place himself by the right side of this guide; the
covering sergeant will replace the captain in the front
rank, the moment the latter quits it to go to the left.

School of the Company — Lesson IV. 109

Article Second.
To change direction hy file.

142. The company being faced by the flank, and
either in march, or at a halt, when the instructor
shall wish to cause it to wheel by file, he will com-
mand:

1. By file, left, (or right.) 2. March.

143. At the command march, the first file will
wheel; if to the side of the front rank man, the latter
will take care not to turn at once, but to describe a
short arc of a circle, shortening a little the first five or
sis steps in order to give time to the fourth man of
this file to conform himself to the movement. If the
wheel be to the side of the rear rank, the front rank
man will wheel in the step of twenty-eight inches, and
the fourth man will conform himself to the movement
by describing a short arc of a circle, as has been ex-
plained. Each file wall come to a wheel on the same
ground where that which preceded it wheeled.

144. The instructor will see that the wheel be exe-
cuted according to these principles, in order that the
distance between the files may always be preserved,
and that there be no check or hindrance at the wheel-
ing point. ■

Article Third.

To halt the company marching hy the fianJc, and
to face it to the front.

145. To eflTect these objects the instructor will com-
mand :

1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front.
10

110 School of the Company — Lesson IV.

14G. The second and third commands will be exe-
cuted as proscribed in the school of the soldier, Nos.
359 and 3t)0. As soon as the files have undoubled, the
rear rank will close to its proper distance. The cap-
tain and cdverinf!; sergeant, as -well as the left guide,
if the march be by the left flank, will return to their
habitual places in line at the instant the company
faces to the front,

147. The instructor may then align the company by
GDC of the means prescribed, No. 100.

Article Fourth.

The company heing in march hy the Jlank, to form
it on the right (or left) hy file into line of battle.

148. If the company be marching by the right fl^ank,
the instructor will command :

1. On ike rights by file into line. 2. March.

140. At the command march, the rear rank men
doubled will mark time ; the captain and the covering
ser;;eant will turn to the right, march straight forward,
and be halted by the instructor when they shall have-
passed at least six paces beyond the rank of file
closers ; the captain will place himself correctly on the
line of battle, and will direct the alignment as the
men of the front rank successively arrive ; the cover-
ing sergeant will place himself behind the captain at
the distance of the rear rank ; the two men on the
right of the front rank doubled, will continue to march,
and passing beyond the covering sergeant and the cap-
tain, will turn to the right; after turning, they will
continue to march elbow to elbow, and direct them-
Bclves towards the line of battle, but when they shall
arrive at two paces from this line, the even number
will shorten the step so that the odd number may pre-

School of the Company — Lesson lY. Ill

cede him on the line, the odd number placing himself
by the side and on the left of the captain ; the eren
number will afterwards oblique to the left, and place
himself on the left of the odd number; the next two
men of the front rank doubled, will pass in the same
manner behind the two first, turn then to the right,
and place themselves, according to the means just
explained, to the left, and by the side of, the two men
already established on the line ; the remaining files of
this rank will follow in succession, and be formed to
the left in the same manner. The rear rank doubled
•will execute the movement in the manner already
explained for the front rank, taking care not to com-
mence the movement until four men of the front rank
are established on the line of battle ; the rear rank
men, as they arrive on the line, will cover accurately
their file leaders.

150. If the company be marching by the left flank,
the instructor will cause it to form by file on the left
into line of battle, according to the same principles
and by the same commands, substituting the indica-
tion left for right. In this case, the odd numbers will
shorten the step, so that the even numbers may pre-
cede them on the line. The captain, placed on the
left of the front rank, and the left guide, will return
to their places in line of battle, by order of the in-
structor, after the company shall be formed and
aligned.

151. To enable the men the better to comprehend
the mechanism of this movement, the instructor will
at first cause it to be executed separately by each rank
doubled, and afterwards by the two ranks united and
doubled.

112 ScJwol of the Covipani/— Lesson IV.

Article Fifth.

The company being in march by the flank ^ to form
it by company, or by platoon, into line, and to
came it to face to the riyht and left in marching.

153 The company being in march by the right
flank the instructor will order the captain to form it
into line ; the captain will immediately command : 1.
Jhl company, into line : 2. March.

■l')4. At the command march, the covering sergeant
will continue to march straight forward ; the men will
advance the right shoulder, take the double quick step,
and move into line, by the shortest route, taking c^are
to undouble the files, and to come on the line one after

the other. , . .

155 As the front rank men successively arrive in
line with the covering sergeant, they will take from
him the stco, and then turn their eyes to the tront.

15G The men of the rear rank will conform to the
movements of their respective file leaders, but without
cndeavorin g to arrive in line at the same time with the

latter. , . ,,

157 At the instant the movement begins, the cap-
tain will face to his company in order to follow up the
execution ; and. as soon as the company is formed, he
will command, guide left, place himself two paces
before the centre, face to the front, and take the step
of the company. ^ , . .

158 At the command guide left, the second sergeant
will promptly place himself in the front rank, on the
left to serve as guide, and the covering sergeant who
is on the opposite flank will remain there

159. When the company marches by the lett nanK,
this movement will be executed by the same commands,
and according to the same principles ; the company
bein<r formed, the captain will command guide rig/it,
and place himself in front of his company as above ;

School of the Company — Lesson IV. 113

the covering sergeant who is on the right of the front
ranlc will serve as guide, and the second sergeant
placed on the left flank will remain there.

160. Thus, in a column by company, right or left ia
front, the covering sergeant and the second sergeant
of each company will always be placed on the right
and left, respectively, of the front rank; they will be
denominated right guide and left guide, and the one or

'the other charged with the direction.

161. The company being in march by the flank, if
it be the wish of the instructor to nau^e it to form
platoons, he will give an order to that effect to the
captain, who will command :

1. By platoon, into line. 2. March.

162. The movement will be executed by each platoon
according to the above principles. The captain will
place himself before the centre of the first platoon, and
the first lieutenant before the centre of the second,
passing through the opening made in the centre of the
company, if the march be by the right flank, and around
the left of his platoon, if the march be by the left : in
this last case, the captain will also pass around the left
of the second platoon in order to place himself in front
of the first. Both the captain and lieutenant, without
waiting for each other, will command guide left (or
right) at the instant their respective platoons are formed.

163. At the command guide left [or right), the guide
of each platoon will pass rapidly to .the indicated flank
of the platoon, if not already there.

164. The right guide of the company will always
serve as the guide of the right or left of the first
platoon, and the left guide of the company will serve,
in like manner, as the guide of the second platoon.

165. Thus, in a column, by platoon, there will be
but one guide to each platoon ; he will always be
placed on its left flank, if the right be in front, and
on the right flank, if the left be in front.

10*

114 School of the Company — Lesson V.

166. In these movements, the file-closers will follow
the plat<»on8 to which they are attached.

107. The instructor may cause the company, march-
in^]; by the flank, to form by company, or by platoon,
into line, by his own direct commands, using those
prescribed for the captain. No. 153 or 161.

168. The instructor will exercise the company in
passin;^, without a halt, from the march by the front,
to the march by the flank, and reciprocally. In either
case, lie will employ the commands prescribed in the
school of the soldier, No. 363, substituting company
for squad. The company will face to the right or left,
in marching, and the captain, the guides and file-
closers will conform themselves to what is ])rescribed
for each in the march by the flank, or in the march
by the front of a company supposed to be a subdivi-
sion of a column.

109. If, after facing to Ihe right or left, in march-
ing, the company find itself faced by the rear rank,
the captain will place himself two paces behind the
centre of the front rank, now in the rear, the guides
will pass to the rear rank, now leading, and the file-
closers will march in front of this rank.

170. The instructor, in order to avoid fatiguing the
men, and to prevent them from being negligent, in the
position of shoulder arms, will sometimes order sup-
port arms in marching by the flank, and arms on the
right shoulder, when marching in line.

LESSON FIFTH.

Article First.

To break into column hy platoon, either at a halt
or in march.

171. The company being at a halt, in line of battle,

JScJiool of the Company — Lesson V. 115

the instructor, wishing to break into column, by pla-
toon to the right, will command :

1. By platoon y right wheel. 2. March.

172. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon
will rapidly place themselves two paces before the cen-
tres of their respective platoons, the lieutenant passing
around the left of the company. They need not oc-
cupy themselves with dressing, one upon the other.
The covering sergeant will replace the captain in the
front rank.

173. At the command march, the right front rank
man of each platoon will face to the right, the cover-
ing sergeant standing fast ; the chief of each platoon
will move quickly by the shortest line, a little beyond
the point at which the marching flank will rest when
the wheel shall be completed, face to the late rear,
and place himself so that the line which he forms
with the man on the right (who had faced) shall be
perpendicular to that occupied by the company in
line of battle ; each platoon will wheel according to
the principles prescribed for the wheel on a fixod
pivot, and when the man who conducts the marching
flank shall approach near to the perpendicular, its
chief will command:

1. Platoon. 2. Halt.

174. At the command lialt, which will be given at
the instant the man who conducts the marching flank
shall have arrived at three paces from the perpendicu-
lar, the platoon will halt ; the covering sergeant will
move to the point where the left of the first platoon is
at rest, passing by the front rank ; the second sergeant
will place himself in like manner, in respect to the
second platoon. Each will take care to leave between
himself and the man on the right of his platoon a
space equal to its front ; the captain and first lieuten-
ant will look to this, and each take care to align the

116 School of the Company — Lesson V.

sergeant between himself and the man of the platoon
■vvho luid faced to the right.

175. The guide of each platoon, being thus estab-
lished on the perpendicular, each chief will place him-
self two paces outside of his guide, and facing towards
him, will command :

3. Left — Dress.

176. The alignment teing ended, each chief of pla-
toon will command. Front, and place himself two
paces before its centre.

177. The tile-closers will conform themselves to the
movement of their respective platoons, preserving
always the distance of two paces from the rear rank.

178. The company will break by platoon to the left,
according to the same principles. The instructor will
command :

1. By platoon, left wheel. 2. March.

170. The first command will be executed in the
same manner as if breaking by platoon to the right.

180. At the command march, the left front rank
man of each platoon will face to the left, and the pla-
toons will wheel to the left, according to the principles
prescribed for the wheel on a fixed pivot ; the chiefs
of platoon will conform to the principles indicated
Nos. 173 and 174.

18i. At the command halt, given by the chief of
each platoon, the covering sergeant on the right of the
front rank of the first platoon, and the second ser-
geant near the left of the second platoon, will each
move to the points where the right of his platoon is to
rest. The chief of each platoon should be careful to
align the sergeant between himself and the man of
the platoon who had faced to the left, and will then
command :

Etght — Dress.

School of the Company — Lesson Y. 117

182. The platoons beinp; aligned, each chief of pla-
toon will command, Front, and place himself oppo-
site its centre.

183. The instructor wishing to break the company
by platoon to the right, and to move the column for-
ward after the wheel is completed, will caution the com-
pany to that effect, and command :

1. By platoon, right ivheel. 2. March.

184. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon
will move rapidly in front of their respective platoons,
conforming to what has been prescribed No. 172, and
will remain in this position during the continuance of
the wheel. The covering sergeant will replace the
chief of the first platoon in the front rank.

185. At the command march, the platoons will
wheel to the right, conforming to the principles herein
prescribed ; the man on the pivot will cot face to the
right, but will mark time, conforming himself to the
movement of the marching flank; and when the man
who is on the left of this flank shall arrive near the
perpendicular, the instructor will command :

3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide left.

186. At the fourth command, which will be given
at the instant the wheel is completed, the platoons will
move straight to the front, all the men taking the step
of twenty-eight inches. The covering sergeant and
the second sergeant will move rapidly to the left of
their respective platoons, the former passing before
the front rank. The leading guide will immediately
take points on the ground in the direction which may
be indicated to him by the instructor.

187. At the fifth command, the men will take the
touch of elbows lightly to the left.

188. If the guide of the second platoon should lose
his distance, or the line of direction, he will conform
to the principles herein prescribed Nos. 202 and 203.

118 StJux>l of the Company — Lesson Y.

If^O. If the company be marching in line to the
front, the inntructor will caune it to break by phitoon
to the ri^ht by the Kume coiinnandH. At the command
march, the platoons will wheel in the manner already
ezphiined ; the man du the pivot will take care to mark
time in his phice, without advancing or receding; the
iuHtruotor, tlic chiefs of platoon, and the guides, will
conform to what has been prescribed, Nos. 184 and
following.

r.X). The company may be broken by platoons to the
left, according to the same principles, and by inverse
means the instructor giving the commands prescribed
Nos. 183 and 185, substituting left for rijht, and recip-
rocally.

Article Second.
To march in column.

105. The company having broken by platoon, right
(or left) in front, the instructor, wishing to cause the
column to march, will throw himself twenty-five or
thirty paces in front, face to the guides, place himself
correctly, on their direction, and caution the leading
guide to take points on the ground.

I'JO. The instructor being thus placed, the guide
of the leading platoon will take two points on the
ground in the straight line passing between his own
and the lieels of the instructor.

1D7. These dispositions being made, the instructor
"will step aside, and command :

1. Column, forward. 2. Guide Uft (or right). 8. March.

108. At the command march, promptly repeated by
the chiefs of platoon, they, as well as the guides, will
lead oft', by a decided step, their respective phitoons,
in order that tlie whole may move smartly, and at the
same moment.

School of the Company — Lesson V. 119

109. The men will each feel lightly the elbow of his
neighbor towards the guide, and conform himself, in
marching, to the principles prescribed in the school
of the soldier, No. 327. The man next to the guide,
in each platoon, will take care never to pass him, and
also to march always about six inches to the right
(or left) from him, in order not to push him out of the
direction.

200. The leading guide will observe, with the great-
est precision, the length and cadence of the step, and
maintain the direction of his march by the means
prescribed No. 89.

201. The following guide will march exactly in the
trace of the leading one, preserving between the latter
and himself a distance precisely equal to the front of
his platoon, and marching in the same step with the
leading guide.

Article Third.

To change direction,

211. The changes of direction of a column while
marching, will be executed according to the principles
prescribed for wheeling on the march. Whenever,
therefore, a column is to change direction, the in-
structor will change the guide, if not already there,
to the flank opposite the side to which the change is to
be made.

212. The column being in march right in front, if it
be the wish of the instructor to change direction to the
right, he will give the order to the chief of the first
platoon, and immediately go himself, or send a marker
to the point at which the change of direction is to be
made ; the instructor, or marker, will place himself on
the direction of the guides, so as to present the breast
to that flank of the column.

213. The leading guide will direct his march on that
person, so that, in passing, his left arm may just graze

120 School of the Company — Lesson Y.

his breast. When the leading guide shall have ap-
proached near to the marker, the chief of his platoon
will command :

1. RigJit wheel. 2. March.

214. The first command will be given when the pla-
toon is at the distance of four paces from the marker.

215. At the command march, which will be pro-
nounced at the instant the guide shall have arrived
opposite the marker, the platoon will wheel to the
right, conforming to what is prescribed in the school
of the soldier, No. 39G.

210. The wheel being finished, the chief of each
platoon will command :

3. Forward. 4. March.

217. These commands will be pronounced and exe-
cuted as is prescribed in the school of the soldier, Nos.
398 and 399. The guide of the first platoon will take
points on the ground in the new direction, in order
the better to regulate the march.

218. The second platoon will continue to march
straight forward till up with the marker, when it will
wheel to the right, and re-take the direct march by the
same commands and the same means which governed
the first platoon.

219. The column being in march right in front, if
the instructor should wish to change direction to the
left, ho will command, gvide right. At this command,
the two guides will move rapidly to the right of their
respective platoons, each passing in front of his subdi-
Tision ; the men will take the touch of elbows to the
right; the instructor will afterwards conform to what
is prescribed No. 212.

220. The change of direction to the left will then be
executed according to the same principles as the
change of direction to the right, but by inverse means.

School of the Comjyani/ — Lesson V. 121

221. When the change of direction is completed, the
instructor will command, guide left.

222. The changes of direction in a column, left
in front, will be executed according to the same prin-
ciples.

223. In changes of direction in double quick time,
the platoons will wheel according to the principles
prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 404.

224. In order to prepare the men for those forma-
tions in line, which can be executed only by turning
to the right or the left, the instructor will sometimes
cause the column to change direction to the side of the
guide. In this case, the chief of the leading platoon
will command: Left (or right) turn, instead of left
(or right) ivheel. The subdivisions will each turn, in
succession, conforming to what is prescribed in the
school of the soldier. No. 402. The leading guide, as
soon as he has turned, will take points on the ground,
the better to regulate the direction of the march..

Article Fourth.
To halt the column.

231. The column being in march, when the ia-
structor shall wish to halt it, he w^ill command :

1. Column. 2. Halt.

232. At the second command, promptly repeated by
the chiefs of platoon, the column will halt ; the guides
also will stand fast, although they may have lost both
distance and direction.

233. If the command halt, be not repeated with the
greatest vivacity, and executed at the same instant,
distances will be lost.

234. If a guide, having lost his distance, seek to
recover it after that command, he will oaly throve

122 School of the Company — Lesson V.

his fault on the following guide, who, if he have
marched well, will no longer be at his proper dis-
tance ; and if the latter regain what he has thus
lost, the movement will be propagated to the rear of
the column.

Article Fifth.

Being in column hy platoon, to form, to the right or
hfl into line of battle, either at a halt or on the
march.

235. The instructor having halted the column, right
is front, and wishing to form it into line of battle, will
place himself at platoon distance in front of the leading
guide, face to him, and rectify, if necessary, the posi-
tion of the guide beyond ; which being executed, he
will command:

Left — Dress.

236. At thifl command, which will not be repeated
by the chiefs of platoon, each of them. will place him-
self briskly two paces outside of his guide, and direct
the alignment of the platoon perpendicularly to the
direction of the column.

237. Each chief having aligned his platoon, will
command Front, and return quickly to his place in
column.

238. This disposition being made, the instructor
will command-:

1. Left into lint, vhteL 2. March.

239. At the command march, briskly repeated by
^theehiefs wf platoon, the front rank man on the left of
each platoon will face to the left, and place his breast
lightly agaiimt the arm of the guide by his side, who
btandti £kst; the platoons will wheel to the left on the

School of the Company — Lesson Y. 123

principle of wheels from a halt, and in conformity to
•what is prescribed No. 194. Each chief will turn to
his platoon to observe its movement, and when the
marchin;j; flank has approached near the line of battle,
he will command :

1. Platoon. 2. Halt.

240. The command halt, will be given when the
marching flank of the platoon is three paces from the
line of battle.

241. The chief of the second platoon, having halted
it, will return to his place as a file closer, passing
around the left of his subdivision.

242. The captain having halted the first platoon,
•will move rapidly to the point at which the right of
the company will rei*t in line of battle, and command:

Right — Dress.

243. At this command, the two platoons will dress
lip on the alignment; the front rank man on the right
of the leading platoon, who finds himself opposite the
instructor established on the direction of the guides,
will place his breast lightly against the left arm of
this officer. The captain will direct the alignment
from the right on the man on the opposite flank of the
company.

244. The company being aligned, the captain will
command:

Feont.

245. The instructor seeing the company in line of
battle, will command:

Guides — Posts.

24G. At this command, the covering sergeant will
cover the captain, and the left guide will return to his
place as a file closer.

124 School of the Company — Lesson V.

247. If the column be left in front, and the instruc-
tor should wish to form it to the rif];ht into line of bat-
tle, he will [ilaee himself at platoon distance in front
of the leadinjj; ^uide, face to him, and rectify, if neces-
Fary, the position of the p;uide beyond; which being
executed, he will command:

1. Right into line wheel. 2. Mabch.

248. At the command marcl), the front rank man on
the ri^ht of each platoon will face to tlie right and
place his breast lightly against the left arm of the
guide by his side, who stands fast: each platoon will
wheel to the right, and will be halted by its chief,
when the marching flank has approached near the line
of battj^, for this purpose, the chief of each platoon
will comTfeand:

1. Platoon. 2. Halt.

249. The command halt, will be given when the
marching flank of the platoon is three paces from the
line of battle. The chief of the second platoon having
halted his platoon, will resume his place in the rank
of file closers.

250. The captain having halted the first platoon,
will move briskly to the point at which the left of the
company will rest, and command:

Left — Dress.

251. At this command, the two platoons will dress
up on the alignment; the man on the left of the second
platoon, opposite the instructor, will place his breast
lightly against the right arm of this oflicer, and the
captain will direct the alignment from the left on the
man on the opposite flank of the company.

252. The company being aligned, the captain will
command:

Front.

School of the Company — Lesson Y . 125

253. The instructor will afterwards command:

Guides — Posts.

254. At this command, the captain will move to the
right of his company, the covering sergeant will cover
him, and the left guide will return to his place as a
file closer.

255. The instructor may omit the command left or
riijkt dress, previous to commanding left or right into
line, ivheel, unless, after rectifying the position of the
guides, it should become necessary to dress the pla-
toons, or one of them, laterallj' to the right or left.

25G. The instructor, before the command left (or
right) into line, wheel, will assure himself that the
rearmost platoon is at its exact wheeling distance from
the one in front. This attention is important, in
order to detect negligence on the part of guides in this
essential point.

257. If the column be marching right in front, and
the instructor should wish to form it into line without
halting the column, he will give the commands pre-
scribed No. 238, and move rapidly to platoon distance
in front of the leading guide.

258. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt short,
the instructor, the chiefs of platoon, and the pla-
toons, will conform to what is prescribed No. 239, and
following.

259. If the column be in march left in front, this
formation will be made according to the same princi-
ples, and by inverse means.

2G0. If the column be marching right in front, and
the instructor should wish to form it into line without
halting the column, and to march the company in line
to the front, he will command :

1. By platoons left wheel. 2. March.
11*

126 School of the Cowjmni/— Lesson Y.

201. At the ooniniJind march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of phitoon, the left guides will hnlt: the man
next to the left guide in each platoon will mark time:
the pl'itoona will wheel to the left, conforming to the
principles of the wheel on a fixed pivot. AVhen the
right of the platoons shall arrive near the line ot
battle, the instructor will command:

3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide right (or left.)

202. At the fourth command, given at the instant
the w'^heel is completed, all the men of the company
will move off together with the step of twenty-eight
inches; the captain, the chief of the second platoon,
the covering sergeant, and the left guide, will take
their positions as in line of battle.

203 At the tifth command, which will be given im-
me^diately after the fourth, the captain and covering
sergeant, if not already there, will move briskly to the
side on which the guide is designated. The non-com-
missioned officer charged with the direction will move
rapidly in front of the guide, and will be assured in
his line of march by the instructor, as is prescribed
No. 104. That non-commissioned officer will imme-
diatelv take points on the ground as indicated in the
same number. The men will take the touch of elbows
to the side of the guide, conforming themselves to the
principles of the march in line.

204. The same principles are applicable to a column
left in front.

School of the Company — Lesson YI. 127

LESSON SIXTH.

Article First.

To break the company into platoons^ and to re-form
the company.

To hreaJc the cmnpany into platoons.

265. The company marching in the cadenced step,
and supposed to make part of a column, right in front,
when the instructor shall wish to cause it to break by
platoon, he will give the order to the captain, who
will command: 1. Break into platoons, and imme-
diately place himself before the centre of the first
platoon.

266. At the command hreak into platoons, the first
lieutenant will pass quickly around the left to the
centre of his platoon, and give the caution : Mark
time.

267. The captain will then command : 2. March.

268. The first platoon will continue to march
straight forward ; the covering sergeant will move
rapidly to the left flank of this platoon (passing by the
front rank) as soon as the flank shall be disengaged.

269. At the command march, given by the captain,
the second platoon will begin to mark time ; and
its chief will immediately add: 1. Right oblique ; 2.
March. The last command will be given so that this
platoon may commence obliquing the instant the rear
rank of the first platoon shall have passed. The men
will shorten the step in obliquing, so that when the
command Jonvard march is given, the platoon may
have its exact distance.

270. The guide of the second platoon being near
the direction of the guide of the first, the chief of the
second, will command Forward, and add March, the

128 School of the Company — Lesson VI.

instant that the guide of his platoon shall cover the
guide of tlie first.

271. In a column, left in front, the company -will
break into platoons by inverse means, applying to the
first platoon all that has been prescribed for the second,
and reciprocally.

272. In this case, the left guide of the company Avill
shift to the right flank of the second platoon, and the
covering sergeant will remair^on the right of the first.

To reform the cortipany.

273. The column, by platoon, being in march, right
in front, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to
form company, he will give the order to the captain,
who will command: Form company.

274. Having given this command, the captain will
immediately add : 1. First jylaioon ; 2. Jllghi oblique.

275. The chief of the second platoon will caution it
to continue to march straight forward.

27G. The captain will then command : 3. March.

277. At this command, repeated by the chief of the
second, the first platoon will oblique to the right, in
order to unmask the second ; the covering sergeant, on
the left of the first platoon, will return to the right of
the company, passing by the front rank.

278. When the first platoon shall have nearly un-
masked the second, the captain will command : 1.
Mark time, and at the instant the unmasking shall be
complete, he will add: 2. March. The first platoon
will then cease to oblique, and mark time.

279. In the mean time the second platoon will have
continued to march straightforward, and when it shall
be nearly up with the first, the captain will command
Foncard, and at the instant the two platoons shall
unite, add March ; the first platoon will then cease to
mark time.

280. In a column left in front, the same jnovement

School of the Company/ — Lesson VI. 129

will be executed by inverse means, the chief of the
second platoon giving the command Forward, and the
captain adding the command March, when the pla-
toons are united.

281. The guide of the second platoon, on its right,
will pass to its left flank the moment the platoon begins
to oblique ; the guide of the first, on its right, remain-
ing on that flank of the phxtoon.

282. The instructor will also sometimes cause the
company to break and re-form, by platoon, by his own
direct commands. In this case, he will give the gen-
eral commands prescribed for the captain above : 1.
Break into platoons; 2. March; and 1. Form com-
pamj ; 2. March.

283. If, in breaking the company into platoons, the
subdivision that breaks off should mark time too long,
it might, in a column of many subdivisions, arrest the
march of the following one, which would cause a
lengthening of the column, and a loss of distances.

Article Second,

Being in calumny to break files to the rear^ and to
cause them to re-enter into line.

289. The company being in march, and supposed to
constitute a subdivision of a column, right (or left) in
front, when the instructor shall wish to cause files to
break off he will give the order to the captain, who
will immediately turn to his company, and command :

1. Two files from left (or riff hi) to rear. 2. March.

290. At the command march, the two files on the
left (or right) of the company will mark time, the
others will continue to march straight forward ; the
two rear rank men of these files will, as soon the rear
rank of the company shall clear them, move to the

130 School of the Company — Lesson VI.

right by advancing the outer shoulder ; the odd num-
ber will place himself behind the third file from that
flank, the even number behind the fourth, passing for
this purpose behind the odd number ; the two front
rank men will, in like manner, move to the right when
the rear rank of the company shall clear them, the odd
number will place himself behind the first file, the
even number behind the second file, passing for this
purpose behind the odd number. If the files are
broken from the right, the men will move to the left,
advancing the outer shoulder, the even number of the
rear rank will place himself behind the third file, the
odd number of the same rank behind the fourth ; the
even number of the front rank behind the first file,
the odd number of the same rank behind the second,
the odd numbers for this purpose passing behind the
even numbers. The men will be careful not to lose
their distances and to keep aligned.

291. If the instructor should still wish to break two
files from the same side, he will give the order to the
captain, who will proceed as above directed.

202. At the command march, given by the captain,
the files already broken, advancing a little the outer
shoulder, will gain the space of two files to the right,
if the files are broken from the left, and to the left, if
the files are broken from the right, shortening, at
the same time, the step, in order to make room between
themselves and the rear rank of the company for the
files last ordered to the rear ; the latter will break by
the same commands and in the same manner as the
first. The men who double should increase the length
of the step in order to prevent distances from being
lost.

293. The instructor may thus diminish the front of
a company by breaking off successive groups of two
files, but the new files must always be broken from the
same side.

294. The instructor, wishing to cause files broken

School of the Company — Lesson YI. 131

off to return into line, will give the order to the cap-
tain, who will immediately command :

1. Two files into line. 2. March.

295. At the command march, the first two files of
those marching by the flank will return briskly into
line, and the others will gain the space of two files by
advancing the inner shoulder towards the flank to
which they belong.

290. The captain will turn to his company, to watch
the observance of the principles which have just been
prescribed.

297. The instructor having caused groups of two
files to break one after another, and to return again
into line, will afterwards cause two or three groups to
break together, and for this purpose, will command :
Four or six files from left (or right) to rear ; March.
The files designated will mark time; each rank will
advance a little the outer shoulder as soon as the "rear
rank of the company shall clear it, will oblique at
once, and each group will place itself behind the four
neighboring files, and in the same manner, as if the
movement had been executed group by group, taking
care that the distances are preserved.

298. The instructor will next order the captain to
cause two or three groups to be brought into line at
once, who turning to the company, will command:

Four or six files into line — March.

290. At the command march, the files designated
will advance the inner shoulder, move up and form on
the flank of the company by the shortest lines.

300. As often as the files shall break off to the rear,
the guide on that flank will gradually close on the
nearest front rank man remaining in line, and he will
also Dpen out to make room for files ordered into line.

301. The tiles which march in the rear are disposed

132 School of the Compani/ — Lesson VI.

in the followinp; order : the left files as if the company
^vaa marching by the rij2;ht flank, and the right files as
if the company was marching by the left flank. Con-
sequently, whenever there is on the ri|!;ht or left of a
subdivision, a file which does not belong to a group, it
will be broken singly.

30'2. It is necessary to the preservation of distances
in column that the men should be habituated in the
schools of detail to execute the movements of this
article with precision.

303. If the new files broken off do not step well to
the left or right in obliquing; if, when files are ordered
into line, they do not move up with promptitude and
precision, in either case the following files will be
arrested in their march, and thereby cause the column
to be lengthened out.

304. The instructor will place himself on the flank
from which the files are brv)ken, to assure himself of
the exact observance of the principles.

305. Files will only be broken off from the side of
direction, in order that the whole company may easily
pass from the front to the flank march.

Article Third.

To march the column in route, and to execute the
movements incidental thereto.

306. The swiftness of the route step will be one hun-
dred and ten steps in a minute ; this swiftness will be
habitually maintained in column in route, when the
roads and ground may permit.

i)07. The company being at a halt, and supposed to
constitute a subdivision of a column, when the instruc-
tor shall wish to cause it to march in the route step,
he will command:

1. Column, forward. 2. Guide left (of right).
3. Route step. 4. March.

School of the Company — Lesson VI. 133

308. At the command march, repeated by the cap-
tain, the two ranks -will step off together; the rear
rank will take, in marching, by shortening a few steps,
a distance of one pace (twenty-eight inches) from the
rank preceding, which distance will be computed from
the breasts of the men in the rear rank, to the knap-
sacks of the men in the front rank. The men, with-
out further command, will immediately carry their
arms at will, as indicated in the school of the soldier,
No. 210. They will no longer be required to march
in the cadenced pace, or with the same foot, or to re-
main silent. The files will march at ease ; but care
will be taken to prevent the ranks from intermix-
ing, the front rank from getting in advance of the
guides, and the rear rank from opening to too great a
distance.

309. The company marching in the route step, the
instructor will cause it to change direction, which will
be executed without formal commands, on a simple
caution from the captain ; the rear rank will come up
to change direction in the same manner as the front
rank. Each rank will conform itself, although in the
route step, to the principles which have been pre-
scribed for the change in closed ranks, with this
difference only : that the pivot man, instead of taking
steps of nine, will take steps of fourteen inches, in
order to clear the wheeling point.

310. The company marching in the route step, to
cause it to pass to the cadenced step, the instructor will
first order pieces to be brought to the right shoulder,
and then command :

1. Quick time, 2. March.

311. At the command marchy the men will resume
the cadenced step, and will close so as to leave a dis-
tance of sixteen inches between each rank.

312. The company marching in the cadenced pace,

134 School of the Company — Lesson VI.

the instructor, to cause it to take the route step, will
command :

1. Route step. 2. March.

313. At the commMid march, the front rank will
continue the step of t\v?nty-eight inches, the rear rank
will take, hy gradually shortening the step, the dis-
tance (tf twenty-eight inches from the front rank ; th«
men will carry their arms at will.

314. If the company be marching in the route step,
and the instructor should suppose the necessity of
marching by flank in the same direction, he will com-
mand:

1. Company bij the right (or left) flank. 2. By file left
(or right). 3. March.

315. At the command march, the company will face
to the right (or left) in marching, the captain will
place himself by the side of the guide who conducts
the leading flank ; this guide will wheel immediately
to the left or right ; all the files will come in succes-
sion to wheel on the same spot as the guide ; if there
be files broken off to the rear, they will by wheeling,
regain their respective places, and follow the move-
ment of the company.

31G. The instructor having caused the company to
be again formed into line, will exercise it in increasing
and diminishing front, by platoon, which will be exe-
cuted hy the eame commands, and the same means,
as if the company were marching in the cadenced
step. When the company breaks into platoons, the
chief of each will move to the flank of his platoon, -
and will take tlie place of the guide, who will step
back into the rear rank.

317. The company being in column, by platoon,
and supposed to march in the route step, the instructor
can cause the front to be diminished and increased, by

School of the Company — Lesson VI. 135

section, if the platoons have a front of twelve files or
more.

318. The movement of diminishing and increasing
front, by section, will be executed according to the
principles indicated for the same movements by pla-
toon. The right sections of platoons will be commanded
by the captain and first lieutenant, respectively ; the
left sections, by the two next subalterns in rank, or, in
their absence, by sergeants.

319. The instructor wishing to diminish by section^,^
will give the order to the captain, who will commanoT

1. Break into sections. 2. March,

320. As soon as the platoons shall be broken, each
chief of section will place himself on its directing
flank in the front rank, the guides who will be thus
displaced, will fall back into the rear rank ; the file-
closers will close up to within one pace of this rank.

321. Platoons will be broken into sections only in
the column in route, the movement will never be exe-
cuted in the manoeuvres, whatever may be the fronfe
of the company.

322. When the instructor shall wish to re-form pla-
toons, he will give the order to the captain, who will
command :

1. Form platoon. 2. March.

323. At the first command, each chief of section
will place himself before its centre, and the guides
will pass into the front rank. At the command 7na?x'A,
the movement will be executed as has been prescribed
for forming company. The moment the platoons are
formed, the chiefs of the left sections will return to
their places as file-closers.

324. The instructor will also cause to be executed
the diminishing and increasing front by files, as pre-
scribed in the preceding article, and in the same man-

136 ScJiooI of the Company — Lesson VI.

ner as if marcliinj^ in the cadenccd step. When the
Cfunpan}* i>< broken into sections, the subdivisions must
not be roduoed to front of less than six files, not
counting the chief of the section.

325. The company being broken by platoon, or by
section, the instructor will cause it, marching in the
route step, to march by the flank in the same direc-
tion, by the commands and the means indicated, Nos.
314 and .'U5. The moment the subdivisions shall face
to the ri^ht (or left,) the first file of each will wheel
to the left (or right,) in marching, to prolong the di-
rection, and to unite with the rear file of the subdi-
vision immediately preceding. The file-closers will
take their habitual places in the march by the flank,
before the union of the subdivisions.

320. If the company be marching by the right flank,
and the instructor should wish to undouble the files,
which might sometimes be found necessary, he will
inform the captain, who, after causing ^the cadenced
step to be resumed, and arms to be shouKlered or sup-
ported, will command :

1. //I two ranks, undouble files. 2. March.

327. At the second command, the odd numbers will
continue to march straight forward, the even numbers
will shorten the step, and obliquing to the left will
place themselves promptly behind the odd numbers ;
the rear rank will gain a step to the left so as to re-
take the touch of elbows on the side of the front rank.

328. If the company be marching by the left flank,
it will be the even numbers who will continue to
march forward, and the odd numbers who will un-
double.

329. If the instructor should wish to double the
files, he will give the order to the captain, who will
command :

1. In four ranks, double files. 2. Marcii.

School of the Company — Lesson VI. 137

330. At the command march, the files ■will double
in the manner as explained, when the company faces
by the ria;ht or the left flank. The instructor will
afterwards cause the route step to be resumed.

331. The various movements prescribed in this les-
son may be executed in double quick time. The men
"will be brought by degrees to pass over at this gait
about eleven hundred yards in seven minutes.

332. AYhen the company marching in the route step
shall halt, the rear rank will close up at the command
halt, and the whole will shoulder arms.

333. Marching in the route step, the men will be
permitted to carry their pieces in the manner they
shall find most convenient, paying attention only to
holding the muzzles up, so as to avoid accidents.

Article Fourth.
Countermarch.

334. The company being at a halt, and supposed to
constitute a part of a column, right in front, when the
instructor shall wish to cause it to countermarch, he
will command :

1. Countermarch. 2. Company, right — Face. 3. By file
left. 4. March.

335. At the second command, the company will face
to the right, the two guides to the right about ; the
captain will go to the right of his company and cause
two files to break to the rear, and then place himself
by the side of the front rank man, to conduct him.

33G. At the command march, both guides will stand
fast; the company will step ofi" smartly ; the first tile,
conducted by the captain, will wheel around the right
guide, and direct its march along the front rank so as
to arrive behind, and two paces from the left guide ;
12*

138 School of the Company — Lesson YI.

each file will come in succeission fo wheel on the same
ground around the right guide ; the leading file having
arrived at a point opposite to the left guide, the cap-
tain will command :

1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right — Dress.

337. The first command will be given aXfoiw paces
from the point where the leading file is to rest.

338. At the second command, the company will
halt.

339. At the third, it will face to the front.

340. At the fourth, the company will dress by the
right ; the captain will step two paces outside of the
left guide, now on the right, and direct the alignment,
so that the front rank may be enclosed between the
two guides; the company being aligned, he will com-
mand Front, and place himself before the centre of
the company as if in column ; the guides, passing
along the front rank, will shift to their proper places,
on the right and left of that rank.

341. In a column by platoon, the countermarch will
be executed by the same commands, and according to
the same principles ; the guide of each platoon will
face about, and its chief will place himself by the side
of the file on the right, to conduct it.

342. In a column, left in front, the countermarch
will be executed by inverse commands and means, but
according to the same principles. Thus, the move-
ment will be made by the right flank of subdivisions,
if the right be in front, and by the left flank, if the
left be in front ; in both cases the subdivisions will
wheel by file to the side of the front rank.

JSchool of the Company — Lesson VI. 139

Article Fifth.

Being in column hy 'platoon^ to form on the right
(or left) into line of battle.

343. The column by platoon, right in front, being in
march, the instructor, wishing to form it on the right
into line of battle, will command :

1. On the right into line. 2. Guide right.

844. At the second command, the guide of each
platoon will shift quickly to its right flank, and the
men will touch elbows to the right ; the column will
continue to march straight forward.

345. The instructor having given the second com-
mand, will move briskly to the point at which the
right of the company ought to rest in line, and place
himself facing the point of direction to the left which
he will choose.

346. The line of battle ought to be so chosen that
the guide of each platoon, after having turned to the
right, may have, at least, ten paces to take before
arriving upon that line.

347. The head of the column being nearly opposite
to the instructor, the chief of the first platoon will
command; 1. Right turn ; and when exactly opposite
to that point, he will add :

2. March.

348. At the command march, the first platoon will
turn to the right, in conformity with the principles
prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 402. Its
guide will so direct his march as to bring the front
rank man, next on his left, opposite to the instructor ;
the chief of the platoon will march before its centre ;

140 School of the Comjpany — Lesson VI.

and when its f;uide shall be near the line of battle, he
■will command ;

1. Platoon. 2. Halt.

349. At the command halt, which will be given at
the instant the right of the platoon shall arrive at the
distance of three paces from the line of battle, the
platoon -svill halt; the files not yet in line, will come
up promptly. The guide will throw himself on the
line of battle, opposite to one of the three left files of
his platoon ; he will face to the instructor, who will
align him on the point of direction to the left. The
chief of platoon having, at the same time, gone to the
point where the right of the company is to rest, will,
as soon as he sees all the files of the platoon in line,
command :

Right — Dhess.

350. At this, the first platoon will align itself; the
front rank man, who finds himself opposite to the guide,
will rest his breast lightly against the right arm of
this guide, and the chief of the platoon, from the right,
will direct the alignment on this man.

351. The second platoon will continue to march
straight forward, until its guide shall arrive opposite
to the left file of the first; it will then turn to the
right at the command of its chief, and march towards
the line of battle, its guide directing himself on the
left file of the first platoon.

352. The guide having arrived at the distance of
three paces from the line of battle, this platoon will
be halted, as prescribed for the first; at the instant it
halts, its guide Avill spring on the line of battle, oppo-
site to one of the three left files of his platoon, and
will be assured in his position by the instructor.

353. The chief of the second platoon, seeing all its
files in line, and its guide established on the direction,
will command :

Right — Dress.

School of the Company — Lesson VI. 141

354. Ilavino; given this command, he will return to
his place as a tile closer, passing around the left ; the
second platoon will dress up on the alij2;nment of the
first, and when established, the captain will command :

Front.

355. The movement ended, the instructor will com-
mand :

Guides — Posts.

356. At this command, the two guides will return
to their places in line of battle.

357. A column, by platoon, left in front, will form
on the left into line of battle, according to the same
principles, and, by inverse means, applying to the
second platoon what is prescribed for the first, and
reciprocally. The chief of the second platoon having
aligned it, from the point of appui, (the left,) will
retire to his place as a file closer. The captain hav-
ing halted the first platoon three paces behind the line
of battle, Ayll go to the same point to align this pla-
toon, and then command : Front. At the command,
guides — posts, given by the instructor, the captain will
shift to his proper flank, and the guides take their
places in the line of battle.

358. When the companies of a regiment are to be
exercised, at the same time, in the school of the company,
the colonel will indicate the lesson or lessons they are
severally to execute. The whole will commence by a
bugle signal, and terminate in like manner.

Formation of a company from tioo ranks into
single rankj and reciprocally.

359. The company being formed into two ranks in
the manner indicated No. 8, school of the soldier, and
supposed to make part of a column, right or left in

142 School of the Company — Lesson VI.

front, whon the instructor shall wish to form it into
single rank, he will command:

1. In one rank, form company. 2. March.

300. At the first command, the right guide will face
to the right.

301. At the command march, the right guide "will
step off and march in the prolongation of the front
rank.

302. The fir.«'t file "will otep off at the same time with
the guide ; the front rank man will turn to the right
at the first step, follow the guide, and be himself fol-
lowed by the rear rank man of his file, who will come
to turn on the same spot where he had turned. The
second file, and successively all the other files, will
step off as has been prescribed for the first, the front
rank man of each file following immediately the rear
rank man of the file next on his right. The captain
■will superintend the movement, and when the last man
shall have stepped off, he will halt the company, and
face it to the front.

303. The file closers, will take their places in line
of battle, two paces in the rear of the rank.

304. The company being in single rank, when the
instructor shall wish to form it into two ranks, he will
command :

1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Company, right — Face.
3. March.

305. At the second command the company will face
to the right : the right guide and the man on the right
will remain faced to the front.

300. At the command march, the men who have
faced to the right, will step off, and form files in the
following manner: the second man in the rank will
place himself behind the first to form the first file ;
the third will place himself by the side of the first in

School of the Company — Lesson YI. 143

the front rank ; the fourth behind the third in the
rear rank. All the others will, in like manner, place
themselves, alternately in the front and rear rank, and
will thus form files of two men, on the left of those
already formed.

3G7. The formations above described will be habitu-
ally executed by the right of companies ; but when
the instructor shall wish to have them executed by the
left, he will face the company about, and post the
guides in the rear rank.

368. The formation nill then be executed by the
same commands, and according to the same prin-
ciples as by the front rank : the movement commenc-
ing with the left file, now become the right, and in
each file by the rear rank man, now become the front;
the left guide will conform to what has been prescribed
for the right.

3G9. The formation ended, the instructor will face
the company to its proper front.

370. When a battalion in line has to execute either
of the formations above described, the colonel will
cause it to break to the rear by the right or left of
companies, and will then give the commands just pre-
scribed for the instructor. Each company will execute
the movement as if acting singly.

Formation of a company from two ranks into four j
and reciprocally^ at a halt, and in march.

371. The company being formed in two ranks, at a
halt, and supposed to form part of a column right in
front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into
four ranks, he will command :

1. In four ranks, form company. 2. Company, left — Face.
3. March (or double quick — Maech).

372. At the second command, the left guide will
remain faced to the front, the company will face to the

144 School of the Company — Lesson VI.

left : the rear rank will gain the distance of one pace
from tlie front rank bv a side step to the left and rear,
and the nion will form into four ranks as prescribed
in the 8ch(tol of the soldier.

37.']. A.t the command march, the first file of four
men will reface to the front without uudoublinor.
All the other files of four will step off, and closing
Buccessivcly to about five inches of the preceding file,
will halt, and immediately face to the front, the men
remaining doubled.

374. Tiie file-closers will take their new places in
line of battle, at two paces in rear of the fourth rank.

375. The captain will superintend the movement.
37G. The company being in four ranks, when the

instructor shall wish to form it into two ranks, he will
command :

1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Company^ right — Face.
3. Marcu (or double quick — March).

377. At the second command the left guide will
stand fast, the company will face to the right.

378. At the command march, the right guide will
step off and march in the prolongation of the front
rank. The leading file of four men will step off at
the same time, the other files standing fast ; the second
file will step off when there shall be between it and
the first space sufiicient to form into two ranks. The
follovi-ing files will execute sucjjessively what has been
prescribed for the second. As t^oon as the last file shall
nave its distance, the instructor will command :

1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front.

379. At the command front, the company will face
to the front, and the tiles will undouble.

380. The company being formed in two ranks, and

ScJiool of (he Compant/ — Lesson VI. 145

marching to the front, when the instructor shall wish
to form it into four ranks, he will command :

1. In four ranks, form company. 2. By the left, double
files. 3. M.A.^cn {ov double quick — March).

381. At the command march, the left guide and the
left file of the company will continue to march straight
to the front: the company will make a half face to the
left, the odd numbers placing themselves behind the
even numbers. The even numbers of the rear rank
will shorten their steps a little, to permit the odd num-
bers of the front rank to get between them and the
even numbers of that rank. The files thus formed of
fours, except the left file, will continue to march ob-
liquely, lengthening their steps slightly, so as to keep
constantly abreast of the guide ; each file will close
successively on the file next on its left, and when at
the proper distance from that file, will face to the front
by a half face to the right, and take the touch of
elbows to the left.

382. The company being in march to the front in
four" ranks, when the instructor shall wish to form it
into two ranks, he will command :

1. In two ranks, form company. 2. By the right, undouble
files. 3. M-Kv^cn {^Qv double quick — March).

383. At the command march, the left guide and
the left file of the company will continue to march
straight to the front ; the company will make a
half face to the right and march obliquely, length-
ening the step a little, in order to keep, as near as
possible, abreast of the guide. As soon as the second
file from the left shall have gained to the right the
interval necessary for the left file to form into two
ranks, the second file will face to the front by a half
face to the left and march straight forward ; the
left file will immediately form into two ranks, and

146 School of the Company — Lesson VI.

take the touch of elbows to the left. Each file will
execute Bucccssively, what has just been prescribed for
the file next to the left, and each file will form into
two ranks when the file next on its right has obliqued
the required distance and faced to the front.

,'^H4, If the company be supposed to make part of a
column, left in fr()nt, these difi'erent movements will
be executed according to the same principles and by
inverse means, substituting the indication left for right.

END OF THE SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.

Sword Manual, etc. 147

MANUAL OF THE SWORD OR SABRE, FOR
OFFICERS.

POSITION OF THE SWORD OR SABRE, UNDER ARMS.

The carry. The ^ripe is in the right hand, which
■will be supported against the right hip, the back of
the blade against the shoulder.

TO SALUTE WITH THE SWORD OR SABRE.

Three times (or pauses).

One. At the distance of six paces from the person
to be saluted, raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly,
the point up, the flat of the blade opposite to the right
eye, the guard at the height of the shoulder, the elbow
supported on the body.

Two. Drop the point of the sword or sabre by
extending the arm, so that the. right hand may be
brought to the side of the right thigh, and remain
in that position until the person to whom the salute
is rendered shall be passed, or shall have passed, six
paces.

Three. Raise the sword or sabre smartly, and place
the back of the blade against the right shoulder.

148 Color- SahUe^ etc.

COLOR-SALUTE.

In the ranks, the color-bearer, whether at a halt or
in march, will always carry the heel of the color-lance
supported at the right hip, the right hand generally
placed on the lance at the height of the shoulder, to
hold it steady. When the color has to render honors,
the color-bearer will salute as follows :

At the distance of six paces slip the right hand
along the lance to the height of the eye ; lower the
lance by straightening the arm to its full extent,
the heel of the lance remaining at the hip, and
bring back the lance to the habitual position when
the person saluted shall be passed, or shall have
passed, six paces. *

MANUAL

FOR RELIEVING SENTINELS.

Arms — Port.

One time and one motion.

Throw the piece diagonally across the body, the lock
to the front, seize it smartly at the same instant with
both hands, the right at the handle, the left at the
lower band, the two thumbs pointing towards the
muzzle, the barrel sloping upwards and crossing oppo-
site the point of the left shoulder, the butt propor-
tionally lowered. The palm of the right hand will be
above, and that of the left under the piece, the nails

Relieving Sentinels. 149

of both hands next to the body, to -which the elbows
will be closed.

Shoulder — Arms.
One time and two motions.

[First motion.) Bring the piece smartly to the right
shoulder, placing the right hand as in the position of
shoulder arms, slip the left hand to the height of the
shoulder, 4he fingers extended.

[Second motion.) Drop the left hand smartly by the
side.

Being on parade and at order arms, if it be wished
to give the men rest, the command will be :

Parade — Rest.

At the command rest, turn the piece on the heel of
the butt, the barrel to the left, the muzzle in front of
the centre of the body ; seize it at the same time with
the left hand just above, and with the right at the
upper band ; carry the right foot six inches to the
rear, the left knee slightly bent.

13*

RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS.

TITLE FOURTH.

SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

Formation of the Battalion,

1. Every colonel will labor to habituate his batta-
lion to form line of battle, by night as well as by day,
with the greatest possible promptitude.

2. The color-company will generally be designated
as the directing company. That, as soon as formed,
will be placed on the direction the colonel may have
determined for the line of battle. The other compa-
nies will form on it, to the right and left, on the
principles of successive formations which will be
herein prescribed.

3. The color-bearer may have received the color
from the hands of the colonel ; but if there be day-
light, and time, the color will be produced with due
solemnity.

Composition and march of the color-escort.

4. When the battalion turns out under arms, and
the color is wanted, a company, other than that of the
color, will be put in march to receive and escort it.

5. The march will be in the following order, in
quick time, and without music : the field music, fol-
lowed by the band ; the escort in column by platoon,

School of the Battalion — Part I. 151

right in front, with arms on the right shoulder, and
the cohir-bearer between the platoons.

6. Arrived in front of the tent or quarters of the
colonel, the escort will form line, the field music and
band on the right, and arms will be brought to a
shoulder.

7. The moment the escort is in line, the color-bearer
preceded by the first lieutenant, and followed by a
sergeant of the escort, will go to receive the color.

8. When the color-bearer shall come out, followed
by the lieutenant and sergeant, he will halt before the
entrance ; the escort will present arms, and the field
music will sound to the color.

9. After some twenty seconds, the captain will cause
the sound to cease, arms to be shouldered, and then
break by platoon into column ; the color-bearer will
place himself between the platoons, and the lieutenant
and sergeant will resume their posts.

10. The escort will march back to the battalion to
the sound of music in quick time, and in the same
order as above, the guide on the right. The march
will be so conducted that when the escort arrives at
one hundred and fifty paces in front of the right of
the battalion, the direction of the march will be par-
allel to its front, and when the color arrives nearly
opposite its place in line, the column will change
direction to the left, and the right guide will direct
himself on the centre of the battalion.

Honors paid to the color.

11. Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from
the battalion, the escort \^411 halt, and the music cease ;
the colonel will place himself six paces before the
centre of the battalion, the coloi-bearer will approach
the colonel, by the front, in quick time ; when at the
distance of ten paces, he will halt ; the colonel will
cause arms to be presented, and to the color to be

152 School of the Battalion — Part I.

sounded, which hcing executed, the color-bearer will
take his place in the front rank of the color-guard,
and the battalion, by command, shoulder arms.

12. Tiie escort, field music, and band, will return in
quick time to their several places in line of battle,
marching by the rear of the battalion.

13. The color will be escorted back to the colonel's
tent or quarters in the above order.

PART FIRST.

Ojoening and closing ranks, and the execution of
the different fires.

Article First.

To open and to close ranks.

22. The colonel, wishing the ranks to be opened,
will command:

1. Prepare to open ranks.

23. At this command, the lieutenant colonel and
major will place themselves on the right of the batta-
lion, the first on the flank of the file-closers, and
the second four paces from the front rank of the
battalion.

24. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command :

2. To the rear, open order. 3. Marcu.

25. At the second command, the covering sergeants,
and the sergeant on the left of the battalion, will place
themselves four paces in rear of the front rank, and
opposite their places in line of battle, in order to mark
the new alignment of the rear rank ; they will be
aligned by the major on the left sergeant of the batta-
lion, who will be careful to place himself exactly fo.ur

School of the Battalion — Part I. 153

paces in rear of the front rank, and to hold his piece
between the eyes, erect and inverted, the better to in-
dicate to the major the direction to be given to the
covering sergeants.

26. At the command march, the rear rank and the
file-closers will step to the rear without counting steps ;
the men will pass a little in rear of the line traced
for this rank, halt, and dress forwjird on the covering
sergeants, who will align correctly the men of their
respective companies.

27. The file-closers will fall back and preserve the
distance of two paces from the rear rank, glancing
eyes to the right ; the lieutenant colonel will, from the
right, align them on the file-closer of the left, who,
having placed himself accurately two paces from the
rear rank, will invert his piece, and hold it up erect
between his eyes, the better to be seen by the lieuten-
ant colonel.

28. The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will com-
mand:

4. Front.

At this command, the lieutenant colonel, major, and
the left sergeant, will retake their places in line of
battle.

29. The colonel will cause the ranks to be closed by
the commands prescribed for the instructor in the
the school of the company, No. 28.

Article Third.
The firings.

32. The colonel will cause to be executed the fire
by company, the fire by wing, the fire by battalion,
the fire by file, and the fire by rank, by the commands
to be herein indicated.

33. The fire by company and the fire by file w^ill
always be direct ; the fire by battalion, the fire by

154 School of the Battalion— Fart I.

wing, and the fire by rank, may either be direct or
oblique.

34. When the fire ought to be oblique, the colonel
will give, at every round, the caution right (or left)
ohh''jue, between the commands ready and aim.

36. The lire by company will be executed alter-
nately by the right and left companies of each divi-
sion, as if the division were alone. The right company
will fire first ; the captain of the left will not give his
first command till he shall see one or two pieces at a
ready in the right company ; the captain of the latter,
after the first discharge, will observe the same rule
in respect to the left company ; and the fire will thus
be continued alternately.

3G. The colonel will observe the same rule in the
firing by wing.

37. The fire by file will commence in all the compa-
nies at once, and will be executed as has been pre-
scribed in the school of the company, No. 55, and
following. The fire by rank will be executed by each
rank alternately, as has been prescribed in school of
the company, No. 58, and following.

38. The color-guard will not fire, but reserve itself
for the defence of the color.

The f re hy company.

39. The colonel, wishing the fire by company to be
executed, will command :

1. Fire hy company. 2. Commence firing.

40. At the first command, the captains and covering
sergeants will take the positions indicated in the school
of the company. No. 49.

41. The color and its guard will step back at the
same time, so as to bring the front rank of the guard
in a line with the rear rank of the battalion. This
rule is general for all the different Jirimjs.

School of the Battalion — Part I. 155

42. At the second command, the odd numbered com-
panies will commence to fire ; their captains will each
give the commands prescribed in the school of the
company, No. 50, observing to precede the command
company by that oi Jirst, third, Jifth^ or seventh, ac-
cording to the number of each.

43. The captains of the even numbered companies
will give, in their turn, the same commands, observing
to precede them by the number of their respective
companies.

44. In order that the odd numbered companies may
not all fire at once, their captains will observe, but only
for the first discharge, to give the command five one
after another ; thus, the captain of the third company
will not give the command j^Ve until he has heard the
fire of the first company ; the captain of the fifth will
observe the same rule with respect to the third, and
the captain of the seventh the same rule with respect
to the fifth.

45. The colonel will cause the fire to cease by the
sound to cease Jiring ; at this sound the men will exe-
cute what is prescribed in the school of the company,
No. 63 ; at the sound for officers to take their places
after tiring, the captains, covering sergeants, and color-
guard, will promptly resume their places in line of
battle. This rule is general for all the firings.

The fire hy wing.

46. When the colonel shall wish this fire to be exe-
cuted, he will command :

1. Fire by wing. 2. Right wing. 3. Ready. 4. Aim.
6. Fire. 6. Load.

47. The colonel will cause the wings to fire alter-
nately, and he will recommence the fire by the com-
mands, 1. Right icing; 2. Aim; 3. Fire; 4. Load.
1. Left wing ; 2. Aim ; 3. Fire ; 4. Load ; in con-
forming to what is prescribed, No. 35,

156 School of the BaftaUon— Tart I.

The Jire hy hattalion.

48. The colonel will cause this fire to be executed
by the commands last prescribed, substituting for the
first two, 1. Fire hy battalion ; 2. Battalion.

The fire hy file.

49. To cause this to be executed, the colonel will
command :

1. Fire hy file. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready.
4. Commence firing,

50. At the fourth command, the fire will commence
on the rif^ht of each company, as prescribed in the
school of the company, No. 57. The colonel may, if
he thinks proper, cause the fire to commence on the
right of each platoon.

The fire hy rank.

51. To cause this fire to be executed, the colonel
will command :

1. Fire by rank. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 4. Rear
rank. 5. Aim. 6. Fire. 7. Load.

52. This fire will be executed as has been explained
in the school of the company. No. 59, in following the
progression prescribed for the two ranks which should
fire alternately.

To fire hy the rear rank.

53. When the colonel shall wish the battalion to fire
to the rear, he will command :

1. Face hy the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About — Face.

54. At the first command, the captains, covering ser-

School of the Battalion — Part I. 157

geants and file-closers, vrill execute what has been
prescribed in the school of the company ; the color-
bearer will pass into the rear rank, and for this pur-
pose, the corporal of his file will step before the
corporal next on his right to let the color-bearer pass,
and will then take his place in the front rank ; the
lieutenant colonel, adjutant, major, sergeant major,
and the music will place themselves before the front
rank, and face to the rear, each opposite his place in
the line of battle — the first two passing around the
right, and the others around the left of the battalion.

55. At the third command, the battalion will face
about ; the captains and covering sergeants observing
what is prescribed in the school of the company, No.
70.

56, The battalion facing thus by the rear rank, the
colonel will cause it to execute the difierent fires
by the same commands as if it were faced by the
front rank.

61. The colonel, after firing to the rear, wishing to
face the battalion to its proper front, will command :

1. Face by the front rank. 2. Battalion. Z. About — Face.

62. At these commands, the battalion will return
to its proper front by the means prescribed, Nos. 54
and 55.

63. The fire by file being that most used in war, the
colonel will give it the preference in the preparatory
exercises, in order that the battalion may be brought
to execute it with the greatest possible regularity.

158 School of the Battalion— Tart II.

PART SECOND.

Different modes of passing from the order in hattle
to (he order in column.

Article First.

To IreaJc to the right or the left into column.

08. Lines of battle will habitually break into column
by company ; they may also break by division or by
platocm.

GO. It is here supposed that the colonel wishes to
break by company to the right, he will! command :

1. By company, right wheel. 2. "M. KB.cn [or double quick-^
March.)

70. At the first command, each captain will place
himfielf rapidly before the centre of his company, and
caution it that it has to wheel to the right ; each cov-
ering sergeant will replace his captain in the front
rank.

71. At the command march, each company will
break to the right, according to the principles pre-
scribed in the school of the company, No. 173; each
captain will conform himself to what is prescribed for
the chiefs of platoon ; the left guide, as soon as ho
can pass, will place himself on the left of the front
rank to conduct the marching flank, and when he shall
have approached near to the perpendicular, the cap-
tain will command : 1. Such company: 2. Halt,

72. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant the left guide shall be at the distance
of three paces from the perpendicular, the company
will halt ; the guide will advance and place his left

School of the Battalion — Part II. 159

arm lightly against the breast of the captain, who will
establish him on the alignment of the man who has
faced to the right; the covering sergeant will place
himself correctly on the alignment on the right of
that man ; which being executed, the captain will
align his company by the left, command Front, and
place himself two paces before its centre.

73. The captains having commanded Front, the
guides, although some of them may not be in the di-
rection of the preceding guides, will stand fast, in
order that the error of a company that has wheeled
too much or too little may not be propagated ; the
guides not in the direction will readily come into it
when the column is put in march.

74. A battalion in line of battle will break into
column by company to the left, according to the same
principles and by inverse means.

* 80. AVhen the colonel shall wish to move the
column forward without halting it, he will caution the
battalion to that effect, and when the wheel is nearly
completed, command :

3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide left.

84. If the battalion be marching in line of battle,
the colonel will cause it to wheel to the right or left,
by the same commands and the same means ; but he
should previously caution the battalion that it is to
continue the march.

86. When a battalion has to prolong itself in column
towards the right or left, or has to direct its march in
column perpendicularly or diagonally in front, or in
rear of either flank, the colonel will cause it to break
by company to the right or left, as has just been pre-
scribed ; hut when the line breaks to the right, in
order to march towards the left, or reverse, the colonel
will command: Break to the right to march to the left,

*In this case the captains will remain in front of their companies

160 School of the Batfalion— 'Part II.

or break fo the hft to march to the right, before i^iving
the commiind. //// company, rijht (or /^/V) wheel. As
80on as the battalion is broken, the lieutenant-colonel
will place a marker abreast with the ri;z;ht guide of
the leading company. The instant the column ia put
in motion, this company will wheel to the left (or
right) march ten paces to the front without changing
the guide, and wheel again to the left (or right.) Tho
second wheel being completed, the captain will imme-
diately command guide left (or right.) The guide of
this company will march in a direction parallel to the
guides of the column. The lieutenant colonel will be
careful to place a second marker at the point where
the first company is to change direction the second
time.

Article Second.

To hrcah to the rear, hy the right or left, into
column, and advance or retire hy the right or
left of companies.

87. When the colonel shall wish to cause the bat-
talion to break to the rear, by the right, into column
by company, he will command :

1. By the right of companies to the rear into column. 2.
Batfalion right — Face. 3. Marcu (or double quick —
March.)

88. At the first command, each captain will place
himself before the centre of his company, and caution
it to face to the right ; the covering sergeants will step
into the front rank.

89. At the second command, the battalion will face
to the right ; each captain will hasten to the right of
his company, and break two files to tho rear; the first
file will break the whole depth of the two ranks ; the

Scliool of the Battalion — Part 11. 161

second file leas ; which being executed, the captain
will place himself so that his breast may touch lightly
the left arm of the front rank man of the last file in
the compay next on the right of his own. The captain
of the right company will place himself as if there
were a ct)mpany on his right, and will align himself
on the other captains. The covering sergeant of each
company will break to the rear with the right files,
and place himself before the front rank of the first
file, to conduct him.

90. At the command march, the first file of each
company will wheel to the right; the covering ser-
geant, placed before this file, will conduct it perpen-
dicularly to the rear. The other files will come
successively to wheel on the same spot. The captains
will stand fast, see their companies file past, and at
the instant the last file shall have wheeled, each cap-
tain will command :

1. Such company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Left —
Dress.

91. At the instant the company faces to the front,
its left guide will place himself so that his left arm
may touch lightly the breast of his captain.

92. At the fourth command, the company will align
itself on its left guide, the captain so directing it, that
the new alignment may be perpendicular to that which
the company had occupied in line of battle, and, the
better to judge this, he will step back two paces, from
the flank.

93. The company being aligned, the captain will
command: Front, and take his place before its centre.

94. The battalion marching in the line of battle,
when the colonel shall wish tj break into column by
company, to the rear, by the right, he will command:

1. By the right of companies to the rear into column. 2.
Battalion, by the right Jlank. 3. March, (or double
quick — March.)

14*

162 School of the BattaUon—Vart II.

95. At the first command, each captain will step
briskly in front of the centre of his company, and
caution it to lace bij the right flank.

96. At the command march, the battalion will face
to the right ; each captain will move rapidly to the
right of his company and cause it to break to the right;
the first file of each company will wheel to the right,
and the covering sergeant placed in front of this file
will conduct it perpendicularly to the rear; the other
files will wheel successively at the same place as the
first. The captains will see their companies file past
them ; when the last files have wheeled, the colonel
will command :

3. Battalion^ by the left Jlank — March. 4. Guide left.

07. At the command march, the companies will face
to the left, and march in column in the new direction.
The captains will place themselves in front of the
centres of their respective compani'es.

98. To break to the rear by the left, the colonel will
give the same commands as in the case of breaking to
the rear by the right, substituting the indication left
for that of right.

102. The battalion may be broken by division to the
rear, by the right or left, in like manner.

105. If the battalion be in line and at a halt, and
the colonel should wish to advance or retire by the
right of companies, he will command :

1. By the right of companies to the front (or rear). 2. Bat'
talion right — Face. 3, March, (or double quick —
March). 4. Guide right, {left) or [centre).

106. At the first command, each captain will move
rapidly two paces in front of the centre of his com-
pany, and caution it to face to the right; the covering
sergeants will replace the captains in the front rank.

107. At the second command, the battalion will face
to the right, and each captain moving quickly to the

School of the Battalion — Part II. 163

right of his company will cause files to break to the
front, according to the principles indicated No. 89.

108. At the command march, each captain placing
himself on the left of his leading guide will conduct
his company perpendicularly to the original line. At
the fourth command, the guide of each company will
dress to the right, left, or centre, according to the indi-
cation given, taking care to preserve accurately his
distance.

109. If the colonel should wish to move to the front,
or rear, by the left of companies, the movement will
be executed by the same means and the same com-
mands, substituting left for right.

110. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel
should wish to advance or retire by the right of com-
panies, he will command :

1. By the right of companies to the front (or rear). 2. Bat-
talion, by the right flank. 3. March, (or double quick —
March. 4. Guide right (left) or [centre).

111. Which will be executed according to the prin-
ciples and means prescribed Nos. 95 and following,
and 106 and following. At the first command, the
color and general guides will take their places as in
column.

112. If the colonel should wish to advance or retire
by the left of companies, the movement will be exe-
cuted by the same means and the same commands,
substituting left for right.

113. If the battalion be advancing by the right or
left of companies, and the colonel should wish to form
line to the front, he will command :

1. By companies into line. 2. March (or double quick —
March). 3. Guide centre.

114. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains, each company will be formed into line,
as prescribed in the school of the company, |^o. 154.

164 Scliool of the Battalion — Part II.

115. At the third command, the color and general
guides ■svill move rapidly to their places iu line, as
•will be hereinafter prescribed, No. 405.

116. If the battalion be retiring by the right or left
of companies, and the colonel should wish to form line
facing the enemy, he will first cause the companies to
face about while marching, and immediately form in
line by the commands and means prescribed, Nos. 113
and following.

Article Third.

To "ploy the hattalion into close column.

117. This movement may be executed by company
or by division, on the right or left subdivision, or on
any other subdivision, right or left in front.

119. To ploy the battalion into close column by
division in rear of the first, the colonel will command:

1. Close colurtm, by division. 2. On the first division, right
in front. 3. Battalion, right — Face. 4. March (or
double quick — March).

120. At the second command, all the chiefs of divi-
sion will place themselves before the centres of their
divisions ; the chief of the first will caution it to stand
fast ; the chiefs of the three others will remind them
that they will have to face to the right, and the cover-
ing sergeant of the right company of each division will
replace his captain in the front rank, as soon as the
latter steps out.

121. At the third command, the last three divisions
will face to the right; the chief of each division will
hasten to its right, and cause files to be broken to the
rear, as indicated. No. 89 ; the right guide will break
at the same time, and place himself before the front
rank man of the first file, to conduct him, and each

School of the Battalion — Part II. 165

chief of division will place himself by the side of this
guide.

122. The moment these divisions face to the right,
the junior captain in each will place himself on the
left of the covering sergeant of the left company, who
will place himself in the front rank. This rule is
general for all the ployments bi/ division.

123. At tlic command march, the chief of the first
division will add, guide left; at this, its left guide will
place himself on its left, as soon as the movement of
the second division may permit, and the file-closers
will advance one pace upon the rear rank.

124. AH the other divisions, each conducted by its
chief, will step off together, to take their places in the
column ; the second will gain, in wheeling by file to
the rear, the space of six paces, which ought to sepa-
rate its guide from the guide of the first division, and
so direct its march as to enter the column on a line
parallel to this division; the third and fourth divisions
will direct themselves diagonally towards, but a little
in rear of, the points at which they ought respectively
to enter the column; at six paces from the left flank
of the column, the head of each of these divisions will
incline a little to the left, in order to enter the column
as has just been prescribed for the second, taking care
also to leave the distance of six paces between its
guide and the guide of the preceding division. At the
moment the divisions put themselves in march to enter
the column, the file closers of each will incline to the
left, so as to bring themselves to the distance of a pace
from the rear rank.

125. Each chief of these three divisions will conduct
his division till he shall be up with the guide of the
directing one ; the chief will then himself halt, see his
division file past, and halt it the instant the last file
shall have passed, commanding: 1. Such division;
2. Halt ; 3. Front ; 4. Left— Dress.

126. At the second command, the division will halt;

166 School of the Battalion — Part II.

the left guide will place himself promptly on the di-
rection, six paces from the guide which precedes him,
in order that, the column being formed, the divisions
may ])e separated the distance of four paces.

127. At the third command, the division will face
to tlie front ; at the fourth, it will be aligned by its
chief, who will place himself two paces outside of his
guide, and direct the alignment so that his division
may be parallel to that which precedes — which being
done, he will command Front, and place himself
before the centre of his division.

130. The lieutenant colonel, placing himself in sue-,
cession in rear of the left guides, will assure them on
the direction as they arrive, and then move to his
place outside of the left flank of the column six paces
from, and abreast with, the first division. In assuring
the guides on the direction, he will be a mere observer,
unless one or more should fail to cover exactly the
guide or guides already established. This rule is
general.

131. The major will follow the movement abreast
with the left of the fourth division, and afterwards
take his position outside of the left flank of the column,
six paces from, and abreast with, this division.

132. To ploy the battalion in front of the first divi-
sion, the colonel will give the same commands, sub-
stituting the indication left for that of right in front.

133. At the second and third commands, the chiefs
of division and the junior captains will conform them-
selves to what is prescribed, Nos. 120, 121, 122; but
the chiefs of the last three divisions, instead of caus-
ing the first two files to break to the rear, will cause
them to break to the front.

134. At the fourth command, the chief of the first
division will add. Guide right.

135. The three other divisions will step ofi" together
to take their places in the column in front of the di-
recting division ; each will direct itself as prescribed,

School of tlie Battalion — Part II. 167

No. 124, and will enter in such manner that, when
halted, its guide may find himself six paces from the
guide of the division next previously established in
the column.

136. Each chief of these divisions will conduct his
division, till his right guide shall be nearly up with
the guide of the directing one ; he will then halt his
division, and cause it to face to the front ; at the in-
stant it halts, its right guide will face to the rear,
place himself six paces from the preceding guide, and
cover him exactly — which being done, the chief will
align his division by the right.

137. The lieutenant colonel, placed in front of the
right guide of the first division, will assure the guides
on the direction as they successively arrive, and then
move outside of the right flank of the column, to a
point six paces from, and abreast with, the fourth
division, now in front.

138. The major will conform himself to what is pre-
scribed. No. 131, and then move outside of the right
flank of the column, six paces from, and abreast with,
the first division, now in the rear.

139. The movement being ended, the colonel will
command :

Guides, about — Face.

140. At this, the guides, who are faced to the rear,
will face to the front.

141. To ploy the battalion in rear, or in front of the
fourth division, the colonel will command:

1. Close column by division. 2. On the fourth division, left
Tor riykt) in front. Battalion, left — Face. 4. March
(or double quick — March).

142. These movements will be executed according
to the principles of those which precede, but by i»-
verse means; the fourth division on which the bat-

1G8 School of the Battalion— Tart II.

talion ploys will stand fast; the instant the movement
commences, its chief will command, guide right (or
lejt).

143. The foregoing; examples embrace all the prin-
ciples ; thus, when the colonel shall wish to ploy tho
battalion on an interior division, he will command :

1, Close column hy divinon. 2. On such division, right (or
left) in front. 3. Battalion inwards — Face. 4. March
(or double quick — March). >

144. The instant the movement commences, the
chief of the directing division will command, guide
left (or right).

145. The divisions which, in the order in battle,
are to the right of the directing division, will face to
the left ; those which are to the left, will face to the
right.

146. If the right is to be in front, the right divi-
sions will ploy in front of the directing division, and
the left in its rear ; the reverse, if the left is to be in
front.

147. In all the ployments on an interior division,
the lieutenant colonel will assure the positions of the
guides in front, and the major those in rear of the
directing division.

148. If the battalion be in march, instead of at a
halt, the movement will be executed by combining the
two gaits of quick and double quick time, and always
in rear of one of the flank divisions.

149. The battalion being in march, to ploy it in
rear of the first division, the colonel will command :

1. Close column by division. 2. On the first division.
3. Battalion — by the right flank. 4. Double quick —
March.

152. At the command march, the chief of the first
division will command: Guide left. At this, the left

Scliool of the Battalion—Tart III. 169

guide will move to the left flank of the division and
direct himself on the point indicated.

153. The three other divisions will face to the right
and move off in double quick time, breakinp; to the
right to take their places in column ; each 'chief of
division will move rapidly to the right of his division
in order to conduct it. The files will be careful to
preserve their distances, and to march with a uniform
and decided step. The color-bearer and general guides
will retake their places in the ranks.

154. The second division will immediately enter the
column, marching parallel to the first diVision • its
chief will allow it to tile past him, and when the last
file is abreast of him, will command: 1. Second
division, by the left Jiank—mx^cn. 2. Guide left, tan^
place himself in front of the centre of his division.

155. At the command march, the division will face
to the left ; at the second command, the left guide will
march in the trace of the left guide of the first divi-
sion ; the men will take the touch of elbows to the left.
When the second division has closed to its proper dis-
tance, its chief will command: Quick time—'^KRcn
^^I'f/'mf'"" ^'^' *^^" change its step to quick time!

15b. Ihe chiefs of the third and fourth divisions
will execute their movements according to the same
principles, taking care to gain as much ground as
possible towards the head of the column.

PART THIRD.

Article First.
To march in column at full distance.

^ IGl. When the colonel shall wish to put the column
m march he will indicate to the leading guide two
distinct objects in front, on the line which the guide
15 °

170 School of the Battalion— TsxH III.

ought to follow. This guide will immediately put his
phoulders in a square with that line, take the more
distant cthjoct as the point of direction, and the nearer
one as the intermediate point.

164. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command :

1. Column forward. Guide left (or right.) 3. March (or
double quick — March).

105. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of subdivision, the column will put itself in
march, conforming to what is prcvscribed in the school
of the company No. 200 and following.

166. The leading guide may always maintain him-
self correctly on the direction by keeping steadily in
view the two points indicated to him, or chosen by
himself; if these points have a certain elevation, he
may be assured he is on the true direction, when the
nearer masks the more distant point.

167. The following guide will preserve with exact-
ness both step and distance; each will march in the
trace of the guide who immediately precedes him,
without occupying himself with the general direction.

168. The lieutenant-colonel will hold himself, habit-
ually, abreast with the leading guide, to see that he
does not deviate from the direction, and will observe,
also, that the next guide marches exactly in the trace
of the first.

169. The major will generally be abreast with the
last subdivision ; he will see that each guide marches
exactly in the trace of the one immediately preceding;
if either deviate from the direction, the major will
promptly rectify the error, and prevent its being propa-
gated ; but he need not interfere, in this way, unless
the deviation has become sensible, or material.

170. The column being in march, the colonel will
frequently cause the about to be executed while march-
ing ; to this effect, he will command :

School of the Battalion — Part III. 171

1. Battalion, right about. 2. March. 3. Guide right.

171. At the second command, the companies will
face to the right about, and the column will then
march forward in an opposite direction ; the chiefs of
subdivision will remain behind the front rank, the file
closers in front of the rear rank, and the guides will
place themselves in the same rank. The lieutenant-
colonel will remain abreast of the first division, now
in rear; the major will give a point of direction to
the leading guide, and march abreast of him.

Article Third.
To change direction in column at full distance.

231. The column being in march in the cadenced
step, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to change
direction, he will go to the point at which the change
ought to be commenced, and establish a marker there,
presenting the breast to the flank of the column ; this
marker, no matter to which side the change of direc-
tion is to be made, will be posted on the opposite side,
and he will remain in position till the last subdivision
of the battalion shall have passed. The leading sub-
division being within a few paces of the marker, the
colonel will command :

Head of column to the left (or right).

232. At this, the chief of the leading subdivision
will immediately take the guide on the side opposite
the change of direction, if not already there. This
guide will direct himself so as to graze the breast of
the marker ; arrived at this point, the chief will cause
his subdivision to change direction by the commands
and according to the principles prescribed in the school
of the company. When the wheel is completed, the

172 School of the Battalion— Vd^ri III.

chief of this subdivision will retake the guide, if
chanj^ed, on the'side of the primitive direction.

2.'^3. The chief of each succeeding subdivision, as
well as the guides, will conform to what has just been
explained for the leading subdivision.

Article Fourth.
To halt the column.

239. The column being in march, when the colonel
shall wish to halt it, he will command :

1. Column. 2. Halt.

240. At the second command, brisklj repeated by
the captains, the column will halt ; no guide will stir,
though he may have lost his distance, or be out of the
direction of the preceding guides.

241. The column being in march, in double quick
time, will be halted by the same commands. At the
command halt, the men will halt in their places, and
will themselves rectify their positions in the ranks.

242. The column being halted, when the colonel
shall wMsh to form it into line of battle, he will move
a little in front of the leading guide, and face to hira ;
this guide and the following one will fix their eyes on
the colonel, in order promptly to conform themselves
to his directions.

243. If the colonel judge it not necessary to give a
general direction to the guides, he will limit himself
to rectifying the position of such as may be without, or
within the direction, by the command guide of (such)
company, or guides of (such) companies, to the right,
(or to the left;) at this command, the guides designa-
ted will place themselves on the direction ; the others
will stand fast.

244. If, on the contrary, the colonel judge it neces-

School of the Battalion — Part III. 173

sary to give a general direction to the guides of the
column, he will place the first two on the direction he
shall have chosen, and command :

Guides, cover.

242. At this, the following guides will promptly
place themselves on the direction covering the first
two in file, and each precisely at a distance equal to
the front of his company, from the guide immediately
preceding ; the lieutenant-colonel will assure them in
the direction, and the colonel will command :

Left^ (or right) — Dress.

246. At this command, each company will incline to
the right or left, and dress forward or backward, so as
to bring the designated flank to rest on its guide ; each
captain will place himself two paces outside of his
guide, promptly align his company parallelly with that
which precedes, then command Front, and return to
his place in column.

Article Fifth.
To close the column to half distance^ or in mass.

252. A column by company being at full distance
right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall
wish to cause it to close to half distance, on the leading
company, he will command:

1. To half distance, close column. 2. March, (or double
quick — March.)

253. At the first command, the captain of the lead-
ing company will caution it to stand fast.

254. At the command march, which will be repeated
by all the captains, except the captain of the leading

15*

174 School of the BattaUo7i— Tart III.

company, this company will stand fast, and its chief
will align it by the left ; the file closers will close one
pace upon the rear rank.

255. All the other companies will continue to
march, and as each in succession arrives at platoon
distance from the one which precedes, its captain will
halt it.

25G. At the instant that each company halts, its
guide will place himself on the direction of the guides
who precede, and the captain will ali^n the company
by the left ; the file closers will close one pace upon
the rear rank.

257. No particular attention need be given to the
general direction of the guides before they respectively
halt ; it will sufiice if each follow in the trace of the
one who precedes him.

258. The colonel, on the side of the guides, will
superintend the execution of the movement, observing
that the captains halt their companies exactly at pla-
toon distance the one from the other.

259. The lieutenant colonel, a few paces in front,
will face to the leading guide, and assure the positions
of the following guides, as they successively place
themselves on the direction.

200. The major will follow the movement abreast
with the last guide.

261. If the column be in march, the colonel will
cause it to close by the same commands.

202. If the column be marching in double quick
time, at the first command, the captain of the leading
company will command quick time; the chiefs of the
other companies will caution them to continue their
march.

203. At the command march, the leading company
will march in quick, and the other companies in double
quick time ; and as each arrives at platoon distance
from the preceding one, its chief will cause it to march
in quick time.

School of the Battalion — Part III. 175

264. When the rearmost company shall have gained
its distance, the colonel will command :

Double quick — March.

265. "When the colonel shall wish to halt the column
and to cause it to close to half distance at the same
time, he will notify the captain of the leadino; company
of his intention, who, at the command march, will halt
his company and align it by the left.

266. If the column be marching in quick time, and
the colonel should not give the command double quick,
the captain of the leading company will halt his com-
pany at the command march, and align it by the left.
In the case where the colonel adds the command /io?^ We
quick, the captains of companies will conform to what
is prescribed No. 262, and the movement will be exe-
cuted as indicated No. 263.

To close the column on the eighth^ or rearmost
company.

267. The column being at a halt, if instead of caus-
ing it to close to half distance on the first company,
the colonel should wish to cause it to close on the
eighth, he will command:

1. On the -eighth company, to half distance close column.
2. Battalion, about — Face. 3. Column forward. 4.
Guide right. 5. March (or double quick — March).

268. At the second command, all the companies,
except the eighth, will face about, and their guides
will remain in the front rank, now the rear.

269. At the fourth command, all the captains will
place themselves two paces outside of their companies
on the directing flank.

270. At the command march, the eighth company
will stand fast, and its captain will align it by the left,

17G School of tlie Battalion— Vart III.

the other companies will put themselves in march,
and, as each arrives at platoon distance from the one
estahiished before it, its captain will halt it and face
it to the front. At the moment that each company
halts, the left guide, remaining faced to the rear, will
place himself promptly on the direction of the guides
already established. Immediately after, the captaia
will align his company by the left, and the file closers
will close one pace on the rear rank. If this move-
ment be executed in double quick time, each captain,
in turn, will halt, and command, Such company, right
about — Halt. At this command, the company desig-
nated will face to the right about and halt.

271. All the companies being aligned, the colonel
will cause the guides, who stand faced to the rear, to
face about.

272. The lieutenant colonel, placing himself behind
the rearmost guide, will assure successively the posi-
tions of the other guides, the major will remain abreast
with the rearmost company.

273. The column being in march, when the colonel
shall wish to close it on the eighth company, he will
command :

1. On the eighth company, to half distance, close column.
2. Battalion right about. 3. March (or double quick — •
March). 4. Guide right.

274. At the first command, the captain of the eighth
company will caution his company that it will remain
faced to the front ; the captains of the other companies
will caution their companies that they will have to face
about.

275. At the command march, the captain of the
eighth company will halt his company and align it by
the left; the file closers will close one pace upon the
rear rank.

276. The captains of the other companies, at the
same command, will place themselves on the flank of

School of the Battalion — Part III. 177

the column ; the subdivisions will face about, and as
each arrives at platoon distance from the company im-
mediately preceding it, its chief will face it to the front
and halt it as prescribed, No. 270. The instant each
company halts, the guide on the directing flank, re-
maining faced to the rear, will quickly place himself
on the direction of the guides already established.
After which, the captain will align the company by
the left, and the file closers will close one pace upon
the rear rank.

277. The lieutenant colonel will follow the move-
ment abreast of the first company. The major will
place himself a few paces in rear of the guide of the
eighth company, and will assure successively the posi-
tion of the other guides.

AtTPCLE Sixth.

To march in column at half distance, or closed in

mass.

281. A column at half distance or in mass, being at
a halt, the colonel will put it in march by the com-
mands prescribed for a column at full distance.

Article Seyenth.
To change direction in column at half distance.
287. A column at half distance, being in march,

•111 !•• 'O '

Will change direction by the same commands and ac-
cording to the same principles as a column at full dis-
tance; but as the distance between the subdivisions is
less, the pivot man in each subdivision will take steps
of fourteen inches instead of nine, and of seventeen
inches instead of eleven, according to the gait, in order
to clear, in time, the wheeling point, and the march-

178 School of the Battalion—T^diXi III.

ing flank will describe the arc of a larger circle, the
better to facilitate the movement.

Article Eighth.

To change direction in column closed in mass.

Ist. To change direction in marching.

288. A column by division, closed in mass, being
in march, will change direction by the front of subdi-
visions.

289. Whether the change be made to the reverse,
or to the pivot flank, it will always be executed on the
principle of wheeling in marching ; to this end, the
colonel will first cause the battalion to take the guide
on the flank opposite to the intended change of direc-
tion, if it be not already on that flank.

290. A column by division, closed in mass, right in
front, having to change direction to the right, the
colonel, after having caused a marker to be placed at
the point where the change ought to commence, will
command :

1. Battalion^ right wheel. 2. March.

291. At the command inarch, the leading division
will wheel as if it were part of a column at half dis-
tance.

292. The instant that this division commences the
wheel, all the others will, at once, conform themselves
to its movement; to this end the left guide of each,
advancing slightly the left shoulder, and lengthening
a little the step, will incline to tlie left, and will ob-
serve, at the same time, to gain so much ground to the
front that there may constantly be an interval of four
paces between his division and that which precedes
it : and as soon as he shall cover the preceding guide,

School of tlie Battalion— VsiTt III. 179

he will cease to incline and then march exactly in his
trace.

293. Each division will conform itself to the move-
ment of its guide ; the men will feel lightly the elbow
towards him and advance a little the left shoulder the
instant the movement commences; each file, in inclin-
ing, will gain so much the less ground to the front, as
the file shall be nearer to the pivot, and the right
guide will gain only so much as may be necessary to
maintain between his own and the preceding division
the same distance which separates their marching
flanks.

298. The colonel, seeing the wheel nearly ended,
will command :

1. Forward. 2. March.

299. At the second command, which will be given
at the instant the leading division completes its wheel,
it will resume the direct march ; the other divisions
will conform themselves to this movement; and if any
guide find himself not covering his immediate leader,
he will, by slight degrees, bring himself on the trace
of that guide, by advancing the right shoulder.

2d. To change the direction from a halt.

306, A column by company, or by division, closed
in mass, being at a halt, when the colonel shall wish
to give it a new direction, and in which it is to re-
main, he will cause it to execute this movement by the
flanks of subdivisions, in the following manner:

307. The battalion having the right in front, when
the colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction
by the right flank, he will indicate to the lieutenant
colonel the point of direction to the right ; this oflicer
will immediately establish, on the new direction, two
markers, distant from each other a little less than the
front of the first subdivision, the first marker in front

180 School of the Battah'on^Vari III.

of the right file of the subdivision ; ■which being exe-
cuted, he will command:

1. Chanfj". direction by the rirjht flnnk. 2. Battalion^
right — Fack. 3. March [or double quick— "^Iwicii)

308. At the second command, tlie column will face
to the rifjht, and each chief of subdivision will place
himself by the side of his right guide.

300. At the command march, all the subdivisions
will stop off together ; the right guide of the leading
one will direct himself from the first step, parallelly
to the markers placed in advance on the new direc-
tion ; the chief of the subdivision will not follow the
movement, but see it file past, and as soon as the left
guide shall have passed, he will command:

1. First company [ax first division.) 2. Halt. 3. Front.
4. Lefi — Dress.

310. At the fourth command, the subdivision will
place itself against the two markers, and be promptly
aligned by its chief.

311. The right guide of each of the following sub-
divisions will conform himself to the direction of the
the right guide of the subdivision preceding his own
in the column, so as to enter on the new direction par-
allelly to that subdivision, and at the distance of four
paces from its rear rank.

312. Each chief of subdivision will halt in his ow^n
person, on arriving opposite to the left guides already
placed on the new direction, see his subdivision file
past, and conform himself, in halting and aligning it,
to what is prescribed, No. 309.

Sclwol of the Battalion ^Tart III. 181

Article Ninth.

Being in column at half distance, or closed in mass,
to take distances.

1st. To take distances by the head of the column.

323. The column beinp; by company at half distance
and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it
to take full distances by the head, he will command:

By the head of column, take wheeling distance.

324. At this command, the captain of the leading
company will put it in march ; to this end he will
command :

1. First company, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March
(or double quick — March.)

325. When the second shall have nearly its wheel-
ing distance, the captain will command :

1. Second company, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March
(or double quick — March.)

326. At the command march, which will be pro-
nounced at the instant that this company shall have
its wheeling distance, it will step off smartly, taking
the step from the preceding company. Each of the
other companies will successively execute what has
just been prescribed for the second.

327. The colonel will see that each company puts
itself in march at the instant it has its distance.

328. The lieutenant colonel will hold himself at the
head of the column, and direct the march of the lead-
ing guide.

329. The major will hold himself abreast with the
rearmost guide.

330. If the column, instead of being at a halt, be

182 School of the Battalion— ?zx\, III.

in march, the colonel will p;ive the same commands,
and add :

March (or double quick — March.)

?)3l. If the column be marchinp; in quick time, at
the command march, the captain of the leading com-
pany will cause double quick time to be taken, which
will also be dcme by the other captains as the compa-
nies successively attain their proper wheeling distance.

332. If the column be marcliing in double quick
time, the leading company will continue io march at
the same gait. The captains of the other companies
will cause quick time to be taken, and as each company
gains its proper distance, its captain will cause it to
retake the double quick step.

2d. To take distances on the rear of the column.

333. If the colonel wish to take distances on the
rearmost company, he will establish two markers on
the direction he shall wish to give to the line of battle,
the first opposite to the rearmost company, the second
marker towards the head of the column, at company
distance from the first, and both facing to the rear ; at
the same time, the right general guide, on an intima-
tion from the lieutenant colonel, will move rapidly a
little beyond the point to which the head of the column
will extend, and place himself correctly on the pro-
longation of the two markers. These dispositions
being made, the colonel will command:

1. On the eighth company/, take wheeling distance. 2, Col-
umn forivard. 3. Guide left. 4. March (or double
quick — March).

334. At the third command, the captains will place
themselves two paces outside of the directing flank ;
the captain of the eighth company will caution it to
Btand fast.

School of the BaitaUo7i—Tsiit III. 183

335. At the command march, repeated by all the
captains, except the captain of the eighth company,
this latter company will stand fast ; its chief will align
it by the left on the first marker, who is opposite to
this company, and place himself before its centre, after
commanding: Front. At this command, the marker
will retire, and the left guide will take his place.

336. All the other companies will put themselves in
march, the guide of the leading one directing himself
a little within the right general guide; when the
seventh company has arrived opposite the second
marker, its captain will halt, and align it on thia
marker, in the manner prescribed for the eighth com-
pany.

337. AVhen the captain of the sixth company shall
see that there is, between his company and the seventh,
the necessary space for wheeling into line, he will halt
his company ; the guide facing to the rear will place
himself promptly on the direction, and the moment he
shall be assured in his position, the captain will align
the company by the left, and then place himself two
paces before its centre ; the other companies will suc-
cessively conform themselves to what has just been
prescribed for the sixth company.

338. The colonel will follow the movement and see
that each company halts at the prescribed distance ;
he will promptly remedy any fault that may be com-
mitted, and, as soon as all the companies shall be
aligned, he will cause the guides, who are faced to the
rear, to face about.

339. The lieutenant-colonel will successively assure
the left guides on the direction, placing himself in
their rear, as they arrive.

340. The major will hold himself at the head of the
column, and will direct the march of the leading
guide.

3c?. To take distances on the head of the cohimn.

184 School of the Battah'on—Vart III.

341. Tlio colonel, wishing; to take distances on the
leadin*; ctmipany, will establish two markers in the
manner just prcserilied, one abreast with this company
and the other at company distance in rear of the first,
but bdth facinf]:; to the front: the left ;i;eneral j^uide, on
an intimation from the lieutenant colonel, will move
rapidly to the rear and place himself correctly on the
prtdongation of the two markers, a little beyond the
point to which the rear of the column will extend :
these dispositions being made, the colonel will com-
mand :

1. On the jirst company ^ take wheeling distance. 2. Bat-
talion, about — Face. 3. Column, forward. 4. Guide
right. 5. Mauch (or double quick — Maucii).

342. At the second command, all the companies,
except the one designated, will face about, the guides
remaining in the front rank, now become the rear.

343. At the fourth command, the captains will place
themselves outside of their guides.

344. At the command march, the captain of the
designated company will align it, as prescribed, No.
335, on the marker placed by its side.

345. The remaining companies will put themselves
in march, the guide of the rearmost one will direct
himself a little within the left general guide ; whea
the second company shall have arrived opposite the
second marker, its captain will face it about, conform-
ing to what is prescribed. No. 270, and align it, as has
just been prescribed for the first company.

340, The instant that the third company shall have
its wheeling distance, its captain will halt it facing it
about, as prescribed. No, 270, and align it by the left ;
the captains of the remaining companies will each in
succession conform himself to what has just been pre-
scribed for the captain of the third.

347. The colonel will follow the movement, as indi-

Scliool of tie Battalion— V^xi III. 185

cated No. 338 ; the lieutenant-colonel and major -^ill
conform themselves to what is prescribed, Nos. 339
and 340.

Article Tenth.
Countermarch of a column at full or half distance,

351. In a column at full or half distance, the coun-
termarch will be executed by the means indicated,
school of the company; to this end, the colonel wnll
command :

1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion right (or left) — Face. 3.
By file left (or right). 4. March (or double quick —
March).

To countermarch a column closed in mass.

352. If the column be closed in mass, the counter-
march will be executed by the commands and means
subjoined.

353. The column being supposed formed by division,
right in front, the colonel will command :

1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion, right a?id left — Face. 3.
By file left and right. 4. March (or double quick —
March).

354. At the first command the chiefs of the odd
numbered divisions will caution them to face to the
right, and the chiefs of the others to face to the left.

355. At the second command, the odd divisions will
face to the right, and the even to the left ; the right
and left guides of all the divisions will face about ;
the chiefs of odd divisions will hasten to their right
and cause two files to break to the rear, and each chief
place himself on the left of the leading front rankmaa

180 School of the Ba(taUon—VciYt III.

of liis division; tlic cliiefs of even divisions will hasten
to their IvSt, and cause two files to break to the rear,
and each chief place himself on the right of his lead-
ing front rank man.

350. At the command march, all the divisions, each
conducted hy its chief, "will step otf smartly, the guides
standin}; fast; each odd division will wiiecl by tile to
the left around its rip;ht guide ; each even division
■will wheel by file to the ri<5ht around its left guide,
each division so directing its marcdi as to arrive behind
its opposite guide, and when its hea<l shall bo up with
this guide, the chief will halt the division, and cause
it to face to the front.

357. Each division, on facing to the front, will bo
aligned by its chief by the right; to this end, the
chiefs of the even divisions will move rapidly to the
right of their respective divisions.

358. The divisions being aligned, each chief will
command. Front ; at this, the guides will shift to their
proper flanks.

359. In a column with the left in front, the counter-
march will be executed by the same commands and
moans ; but all tho divisions will be aligned by the
left: to this end, the chiefs of the odd divisions will
hasten to the left (jf their respective divisions as soon
as tho latter shall have been faced to the front.

3G2. In a column by company, closed in mass, the
countermarch will be executed by tho same means and
commands, applying to companies what is prescribed
for divisions.

3()3. The countermarch will always tako place from
a halt, whether the column be closed in mass, or at
full, or half distance.

School of tie Battalion— Pait III. 187

Article Eleventh.

Being in column hy company^ closed in mass, to
form divisions.

3C)4. The column beinpj closed in mass, right in front
and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form
divisions, he will command :

1. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, left — Face.
3. March (or double quick — March).

365. At the first command, the captains of the left
companies will caution them to face to the left.

3GG. At the second command, the left companies will
face to the left, and their captains will place them-
selves by the side of their respective left guides.

367. The right companies, and their captains will
stand fast; but the right and left guides of each of
these companies will place themselves respectively
before the right and left files of the company, both guides
facing to the right, and each resting his right arm
gently against the breast of the front rank man of
the file, in order to mark the direction.

368. At the command march, the left companies
only will put themselves in march, their captains
standing fast ; as each shall see that his company,
filing past, has nearly cleared the column, he will
command :

1. Such company. 2. Halt. 3. Front.

369. The first command will be given when the
company shall yet have four paces to march; the
second at the instant it shall have cleared its right
company ; and the third immediately after the second.

370. The company having faced to the front, the
files, if there be intervals between them, will promptly

188 School of the J3atfah'o7i—Vavt III.

incline to the ri-^lit, the captain will place himself on
the left of the right company of the division, and
align himself correctly on the front rank of that com-
pany.

.".71. The left guide will place himself at the same
time hcfore one of the three left files of his company,
face to the right, and cover correctly the guides of the
right company; the moment his capiain sees him
established on the direction, he will command:

Jiir/ht — Drkss.

372. At this, the left company will dress forward
on the alignment of the right company ; the front
rank man, who may find himself opposite to the left
guide, will, without preceding his rank, rest lightly
his 1)reast against the right arm of this guide; the
captain of the left company will direct its alignment
on this man, and the alignment being assured, he will
command, Froxt ; but not quit his position.

o7.'>. The colonel seeing the divisions formed, will
command :

Guides — Posts.

374. At this, the guides who have marked the fronts
of divisions will return to their places in column, the
left guide of each right company passing through the
interval in the centre of the division, and tiie captains
will place themselves as proscribed.

37G. If the column be in march, instead of at a halt,
when the colonel shall wish to form divisions, he will
command :

1. Form divisions. 2. Lr/t companies, hy the left flank.
3. March (or double quick — March).

377. At the first command, the captains of the right
companies will command, Mark time, the captains of
the left companies will caution their companies to
face hy iJw hft Jlanl-.

ScTiool of' the Battalion— Vd^xt III. 189

378. At the third command, the ri^ht companies
■will mark time, the left companies will face to the
left; the captains of the left companies will each see
his company file past him, and when it has cleared the
column, will command :

Such company by the right flank — March.

As soon as the divisions are formed, the colonel
will command :

4. Forward. 5. March.

379. At the fifth command, the column will resume
the gait at which it was marching previous to the
commencement of the movement. The guides of each
division will remain on the right and left of their re-
spective companies ; the left guide of the right com-
pany will pass into the line of file-closers, before the
two companies are united ; the right guide of the left
company will step into the rear rank. The captains
will place themselves as prescribed No. 75.

Being in column at full or half distance to form
divisions.

380. If the column be at a halt, and, instead of
being closed in mass, is at full or half distance, divi-
sions will be formed in the same manner; but the
captains of the left companies, if the movement be
made in quick time, after commanding Front, will
each place himself before the centre of his company,
and command, 1. Such company/ forioard. 2. Guide
right. 3. March. If the movement be made in dou-
ble quick time, each will command as soon as his
company has cleared the column :

1. Such company by the right flank. 2. March.

382. If the left be in front, the movement will be
executed by inverse means.

100 School of the Battalion— Vaxi IV.

PART FOURTH.

Different modes of passing from the order in col-
umn to the order in battle.

Article First.

Manner of determining the line of battle.

380. Tho line of battle may be marked or deter-
mined in three different manners : 1*^ by placing two
markers eighty or a hundred paces apart, on the di-
rection it is wished to give to the line ; 2(1, by placing
a marker at the point at which it may be intended to
rest a flank, and then choosing a second point towards,
or beyond the opposite flank, and there posting a se-
cond marker distant from each other a little less than
the leading subdivision ; 3t7, by choosing at tirst the
points of direction for the flanks, and then deter-
mining by intermediate points, the straight line be-
tween those selected points, both of which may some-
times be beyond reach.

Article Second.

Different modes of passing from column at fall
distance into line of battle.

Ist. Column at full distance, ri<)ht in front, to the left into
line of battle.

390. A column, right in front, being at a halt, when
the colonel shall wish to form it to the left into line,
he will assure the positions of the guides by the means
previously indicated, and then command :

1. Left into line, toheel. 2. Marcu (or double quick —
March).

School of the Battalion— Part TV. •• 191

391. At the first command, the right guide of the
leading company will hasten to place himself on the
direction of the left guides of the column, face to them,
and phice himself so as to be opposite to one of the
three right files of his company, when they shall be in
line ; he will be assured in this position by the lieuten-
ant colonel.

392. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains, the left front rank man of each company
will face to the left, and rest his breast lightly against
the right arm of his guide ; the companies will wheel
to the left, on the principle of wheeling from a halt,
conforming themselves to what is prescribed, school of
the company. No. 239 ; each captain will turn to his
company, to observe the execution of the movement,
and, when the right of the company shall arrive at
three paces from the line of battle, he will command:

1. Such company. 2. Halt.

303. The compuny being halter^ the captain will
place himself on the line by the side of the left front
rank man of the company nest on the right, align
himself correctly, and command :

3. Right — Dress.

394. At this command, the company will dress up
between the captain and the front rank man on its
left, the captain directing the alignment on that man ;
the front rank man on the right of the righ t company,
who finds himself opposite to its right guide, will lightly
rest his breast against the left arm of this guide.

395. Each captain, having aligned his company, will
command Front, and the colonel will add:

Guides — Posts.

396. At this command, the guides will return to
their places in line of battle, each passing through the

192 • School of the Battalion— Vart IV.

nearest captuin's interval ; to permit him to pa^s, the
captain -vvill momentarily step before the first file of
hi8 company, ami the covering sergeant behind the
same file. T/n'.s rule is general for all the formations
into line nf battle.

IVJl. "When companion form line of battle, file closers
will always place themselves exactly two paces from
the rear rank, which will sufficiently assure their align-
ment.

308. The battalion being correctly aligned, the colo-
nel, lieutenant colonel and major, as well as the adju-
tant and sergeant major, will return to their respective
places in line of battle. This rule is general for all the
formations info line of baffle.

oU9. A column, with the left in front, will form
itself to the riyht into line of battle, according to the
same principles.

400. At the command r/tn'des posts, the captains will
take their places in line of battle, as well as the guides.
This rule is general for all Jormations into line of battle
in which the companies are aliyned by the left.

401. A column by division may form itself into line
of battle by the same commands and means, but ob-
serving what follows ; if the right be in front, at the
command half, given by the chiefs of division, the left
guide of each right company Avill place himself on the
alignment opposite to one of the three files on the left
of his company; the left guide of the first company
■vvill be assured on the direction by the lieutenant
colonel ; the left guides of the other right companies
will align themselves correctly on the division guides;
to this end, the division guides (on the alignment)
wnll invert, and hold their pieces up perpendicularly
before the centre of their bodies, at the command left
into line, wheel. If the column by division be with the
left in front, the right guides of left companies will
conform themselves to what has just been prescribed
or the left guides of right companies, and place them-

School of the Battalion — Part IV. 193

selves on the line opposite to one' of the three right
files of their respective companies.

402. A column in march will be formed into line,
without halting, by the same commands and means.
At the command march, the guides will halt in their
places, and the lieutenant colonel will promptly rectify
their positions.

403. If, in forming the column into line, the colonel
should wish to move forward, without halting, he will
command :

1. By companies left wheel. 2. Mabch (or double quick —
March.)

404. At the command inarch, briskly repeated by
the captains, each company will wheel to the left on
a fixed pivot, as prescribed in the school of the com-
pany, the left guides will step back into the rank of
file closers before the wheel is completed, and when
the right of the companies shall arrive near the line,
the colonel will command :

3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide centre.

405. At the fourth command, given at the instant
the wheel is completed, the companies will march
directly to the front. At the fifth command, the color
and the general guides will move rapidly six paces to
the front. The colonel will assure the direction of
the color; the captains of companies and the men will,
at once, conform themselves to the principles of the
march in line of battle, to be indicated, No. 587.

406. The same principles are applicable to a column
left in front.

By inversion to the right (or left^ into line of

battle.

407. AVhen a column, right in front, shall be under
the necessity of forming itself into line faced to the

194 School of the Battalion— V^xi IV.

reverse flank, and the colonel shall wish to execute
this formation by the shortest movement, he will com-
mand :

1. By inversion, right into line, wheel. 2. Battalion, guide

right.

408. At the first command, the lieutenant colonel
will place himself in front, and facing to the right
guide of the leading subdivision ; at the second com-
mand, he will rectify, as promptly as possible, the
direction of the right guides of the column ; the cap-
tain of the odd company, if there ])e one, and the
column be by division, will promptly bring the right
of his company on the direction, and at company dis-
tance from the division next in front ; the left guide
of the leading subdivision will place himself on the
direction of the right guides, and will be assured in
his position by the lieutenant colonel ; which being
executed, the colonel will command :

3. March (or double quick — March).

409. At this, the right front rank man of each sub-
division will face to the right, rest his breast lightly
against the left arm of his guide, and the battalion
will form itself to the right into line of battle, accord-
ing to the principles prescribed.

Successive Formations.

412. Under the denomination of successive forma-
tions are included all those formations where the
several subdivisions of a column arrive one after an-
other on the line of battle; such are formations on
the right or left, forward and faced to the rear into
line of battle, as well as deployments of columns in
mass.

413. The successive formations which may be or-

School of the Battalion— V^xt IV. 195

dered when the column is marching, and is to con-
tinue marching, will be executed by a combination of
the two gaits, qriick and double quick time.

2d. Column at full distance, on the right (or on the left),
into line of battle.

414. A column by company, at full distance and
right in front, having to form itself on the right into
line of battle, the colonel will indicate to the lieuten-
ant colonel a little in advance, the point of appui, or
rest, for the right, as well as the point of direction to
the left; the lieutenant colonel will hasten with two
markers, and establish them in the following manner
on the direction indicated.

415. The first marker will be placed at the point of
appui for the right front rank man of the leading com-
pany ; the second will indicate the point where one of
the three left files of the same company will rest when
in line; they will be placed so as to present the right
shoulder to the battalion when formed.

416. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command:

1. On the right, into line. 2. Battalion, guide right.

417. At the second command, the right will become
the directing flank, and the touch of the elbow will be
to that side ; the right guide of the leading company
will march straight forward until up with the turning
point, and each following guide will march in the
trace of the one immediately preceding.

418. The leading company being nearly up with
the first marker, its captain will command: 1. Right
turn, and when the company is precisely up with this
marker, he will add: 2. March.

419. At the command march, the company will turn
to the right; the right guide will so direct himself as
to bring the man next to him opposite to the right

196 School of the Battalion— Vztt IV.

marker, and Tvlicn at three paces from him, the cap-
tain will command :

]. First company. 2. Halt.

42{). At tlie second command, the companv will
lialt, tho files, not yet in line, M'ill form promptly, the
left guide ^vill retire as a file-closer, and the captaia
■will then command :

3. Right — Dress.

421. At this command, the company will align itself;
the two men who find themselves opposite to tlie two
markers will each lightly rest his breast against the
right arm of his marker ; the captain, passing to the
right of the front rank, will direct the alignment on
these two men. These rules are general for all succes-
sive formations.

422. The second company will continue to march
straight forward ; when arrived opposite to the left
flank of the preceding company, it will turn to the
right, and be formed on the line of battle, as has just
been prescribed ; the right guide will direct himself
so as to come upon that line by the side of the man
on the left of the first comp.any.

423. At the distance of three paces from the line
of battle, the company will be halted by its captain,
who will place himself briskly by the side of the man
on the left of the preceding company, and align him-
self correctly on its front rank.

424. The left guide will at the same time place him-
self bef<»re one of the three left files of his company,
and, facing to the right, he will place himself accu-
rately on the direction of the two markers of the
preceding company.

425. The captain will then command :

Right — Dress.

Scliool of the Battalion — Part IV. 197

426. At this command, the second company •will
dress forward on the line ; the captain will direct its
alignment on the front rank man who has rested his
breast ao;ain.st the left guide of the company.

427. The followinj^ companies will thus come suc-
cessively to form themselves on the line of battle,
each conforming itself to what has just been pre-
scribed for the one next to the right; and when they
shall all be established, the colonel will command :

Guides — Posts.

428. At this command, the guides will take their
places in line of battle, and the markers placed before
the right company will retire.

420. If the column be marching in quick time, and
the colonel should wish to cause the movement to be
executed in double quick time, he will add the com-
mand : Double quick — March. At the command
march, all the companies will take the double quick
step, and the movement will be executed as prescribed,
No. 417, and following.

430. The colonel will follow up the formation, pass-
ing along the front, and being always opposite to the
company about to turn ; it is thus that he will be the
better able to see and to correct the error that would
result Irom a command given too soon or too late to
the preceding company.

431. The lieutenant colonel will, with the greatest
care, assure the direction of the guides ; to this end,
the instant that the markers are established for the
leading company, he will move a little beyond the
point at which the left of the next company will rest,
establish himself correctly on the prolongation of the
two markers, and assure the guide of the second com-
pany on this direction : this guide being assured, the
lieutenant colonel will place himself farther to the
rear, in order to assure, in like manner, the guide of

17*

198 School of the Battalion— Vart IV.

the third company, and so on, successively, to the left
of the battalion. In assuring the guides in their posi-
tions on the line of battle, he will take care to let them
first place themselves, and confine himself to rectify-
ing their positiims if they do not cover accurately,
and at the proper distance, the preceding guides or
markers. This rule is yeneral for all successive for-
mat ions.

41)2. A column, left in front, will form itself on
the left into line of battle according to the same prin-
ciples.

435. When the direction of the line of battle forms
a sensible angle with that of the march of the column,
the cohmel, before beginning the movement, will give
the head of the column a new direction parallel to that
line.

437. Each captain will cause his company to sup-
port arms, the instant that the captain, who follows
him, shall have commanded front. This rule is gen-
eral J'or all successive formations.

438. When, in the execution of this movement, the
colonel shall wish to commence tiring, he will give the
order to that effect to the captain whose company is
the first in line of battle ; this captain will immedi-
ately place himself behind the centre of his company,
and as soon as the next captain shall have commanded
front, he will commence the fire by file, by the com-
mands proscribed, school of the company. At the
command //re hi/ file, the marker at the outer tile of
this first company will retire, and the other will place
himself against the nearest man of the next company.
The captain of the latter will commence firing as soon
as the captain of the third company, in line, shall
have commanded //"o/J^ ; the marker before the nearest
file of the second company, in line, will now retire,
and the guide before the opposite flank will place him-
self before the nearest file of the third company, in
line, and so on, in continuation, to the last company

School of the Battalion— F^rt IV. 199

on the left or right of the battalion, according as the
formation may have commenced with the right or left
in front.

3c?. Column at full distance, forward into line of battle.

440. A column being by company, at fuTl distance,
right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall
wish to form it forward into line, he A\ill conform to
what is prescribed, Nos. 414 and 415, and then com-
mand :

1. Forward info line. 2. Bi/ company, left half wheel.
3. March (or double quick — March).

441. At the first command, the captain of the lead-
ing company will add — guide right, put the company
in march, halt it three paces from the markers, and
align it against the latter by the right.

442. At the command march, all the other compa-
nies will wheel to the left on fixed pivots ; and, at the
instant the colonel shall judge, according to the direc-
tion of the line of battle, that the companies have
sufficiently wheeled, he will command :

4. Forward, 5. March. 6. Guide right.

443. At the fifth command, the companies, ceasing
to wheel, will march straight forward ; and at the
sixth, the men will touch elbows towards the right.
The right guide of the second company, who is near-
est to the line of battle, will march straight forward ;
each succeeding right guide will follow the file imme-
diately before him at the cessation of the wheel.

444. The second company having arrived opposite
to the left file of the first, its captain will cause it to
turn to the right, in order to approach the line of bat-

200 School of the Battalion— V&xi lY.

tie ; and wlien its right guide shall be at three paces
from that line, the captain will command :

1. Second company. 2. Halt.

445. At the second command, the company will
halt ; the jSles not yet in line with the guide will come
into it promptly, the left guid^ will place himself on
the line of battle, so as to be opposite to one of the
three files on the left of the company ; and as soon as
he is assured on the direction by the lieutenant colo-
nel, the captain, having placed himself accurately on
the line of battle, will command :

8. Right — Dkess.

446. At the instant that the guide of the second
company begins to turn to the right, the guide of the
third, ceasing to follow the file immediately before
him, will march straight forward ; and when he shall
arrive opposite to the left of the second, his captain
will cause the company to turn to the right, in order
to approach the line of battle, halt it at three paces
from that line, and align it by the right, as prescribed
for the second company.

447. Each following company will execute what has
just been prescribed for the third, as the preceding
company shall turn to the right, in order to approach
the line of battle.

448. The formation ended, the colonel will command :

Guides — Posts.

449. The colonel and lieutenant colonel will observe
in this formation, what is prescribed for them on the
right into line.

450. A column left in front, will form itself forward
into line of battle according to the same principles
and by inverse means.

School of the Battalion— Vaxi IV.. 201

451. "When a column by company at full distance,
right in front, and in march, shall arrive at company
distance from the two markers established on the line,
the colonel will command :

1. Forward into line. 2. By company, left half wheel.
3. March (or double quick — March).

453. At the first command, the captain of the first
company will command, Guide right, and caution it
to march directly to the front, the captains of the
other companies will caution them to wheel to the left.

454. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains, the movement will be executed as in the
last case.

450. If the colonel should wish to form the column
forward into line, and to continue to march in this
order, he will not cause markers to be established;
the movement will be executed m double quick time, by
the same commands and means, but with the follow-
ing modifications.

457. At the first command, the captain of the first
company will add qtiick time, after the command guide
right. At the second command, the first company
will continue to march in quick time, and will take
the touch of elbows to the right; its chief will imme-
diately place himself on its right, and to assure the
march, will take points of direction to the front.
The captain of the second company will cause his
company to take the same gait as soon as it shall arrive
on a line with the first, and will also move to the right
of his company ; the captains of the third and fourth
companies will execute successively what has just been
prescribed for the second. The companies will pre-
serve the touch of elbows to the right, until the com-
mand, guide centre.

458. When the color company shall have entered
the line, the colonel will command, guide centre. At

202 School of the Battalion— Vd^ri IV.

this command, the color-bearer and the right general
guide will move rapidly six paces in advance of the
line. The colonel will assure the direction of the
color-bearer. The lieutenant colonel and the right
companies will immediately conform themselves to the
principles of the march in line of battle. The left
companies and the left general guide, as they arrive
on the line, will also conform to the same principles.
If the column be marching in double quick time, when
the last company shall have arrived on the line, the
colonel will cause the double quick to be resumed.

Ath. Column at full distance, faced to the rear, into line of

battle.

466. A column being by company, at full distance,
right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall
■wish to form it into line faced to the rear, he and the
lieutenant colonel will conform themselves to what is
prescribed Nos 414 and 415, and the colonel will then
command :

1. Into line, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, right — Face.
8. Mabcii (or double quick — March).

467. At the first command, the captain of the lead-
ing company will cause it to face to the right, and put
it in march, causing it to wheel by file to the left, and
direct its march towards the line of battle which it
■will pass in rear of the left marker ; the first file having
passed three paces beyond the line, the company will
•wheel again by file to the left, in order to place itself
in rear of the two markers ; being in this position, its
captain will halt it, face it to the front, and align it by
the right against the markers.

468. At the second command, all the other com-
panies will face to the right, each captain placing
himself by the side of his right guide.

School of the Battalion— PsLYt TV. 203

469. At the command march, the companies -will
put themselves in movement; the left guide of the
second, who is nearest to the line of battle, w^ill hasten
in advance to mark that line; he will place himself on
it as prescribed above for successive formations, and
thus indicate to his captain the point at which he
ought to pass tiic line of battle, by three paces, in
order to wheel by file to the left, and then to direct his
company parallelly to that line.

470. As soon as the first file of this company shall
have arrived near the left file of the preceding one
already on the line of battle, its captain will com-
mand :

1. Second company. 2. Halt. 3. Front.
4. Right — Dress.

471. The first command will be given when the
company shall yet have four paces to take to reach the
halting point.

472. At the second command, the company will
halt.

473. At the third, the company will face to the
front, and if there be openings between the files, the
latter will promptly close to the right; the captain
will immediately place himself by the side of the man
on the left of the preceding company, and align him-
self on its front rank.

474. The fourth command will be executed as pre-
scribed, No. 420.

475. The following companies will be conducted and
established on the line of battle as just prescribed for
the second, each regulating itself by the one that pre-
cedes it; the left guides will detach themselves in
time to precede their respective companies on the line
by twelve or fifteen paces, and each place himself so as
to be opposite to one of the three left tiles of his com-
pany, when in line. If the movement be executed in
double quick time, the moment it is commenced, all

204 School of the Battalion— V art lY.

the left guides will detach themselves at the same time
from the column, and will move at a run, to establish
themselves on the line of battle.

470. The formation ended, the colonel will com-
mand :

Guides — Post.

477. The colonel and lieutenant colonel, in this for-
mation, will each observe what is prescribed for him
in that of o/t the right, into line ofhattle.

478. A column, left in front, will form itself faced
to the rear into line of battle according to the same
principles and by inverse means.

479. If the column be in march, and nearly at com-
pany distance from the two markers established on the
line, the colonel will command:

1. Into line, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, hj the right
flank. 3. March (or double quick March).

481. At the first command, the captains will caution
their companies to face by the right flank.

482. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captains of companies, all the companies will face
to the right. The remaining part of the movement
will be executed as heretofore explained.

Article Third.
Formation in line of battle by two movements.

485. If a column by company, right in front, and at
a halt, find itself in part on the line of battle, and the
colonel should think proper to form line of battle
before all the companies enter the new direction, the
formation will be executed in the following manner:

48G. It will be supposed that the column has arrived

School of ilie Battalion— Vart IV, 205

behind the Hue of battle, and that five companies have
entered the new direction. The colonel having as-
sured the guides of the first five companies on the
direction, will command:

1. Left into line, wheel. 2. Three rear companies, forward
into line.

487. At the second command, the chief of each of
the rear companies will command: By company, left
half wheel; and the colonel will add:

3. March (or double quick — March).

488. At this command, briskly repeated, the first
five companies will form themselves to the left, into
line of battle, and the three last forward, into line of
battle, by the means prescribed for these respective
formations; each captain of the three rear companies
will, when his company shall have sufficiently wheeled,
command:

1. Forxoard. 2. March. 3. Guide right.

489. If the column be in march, the colonel will
command:

1. To the left, and forward into line. 2. March [oy double
quick — March).

491. If the colonel should wish, in forming the bat-
talion into line, to march it immediately forward, he
will command:

1. By company to the left, and forward into line.
2. March.

492. And when the right of these companies shall
arrive on the line, the colonel will command:

3. Forward. 4. March. 6. Guide centre. *

20G ScJwol of the BaUalw7i—Vart IV.

404. If the battalion be marchino; in double quick
time, the oolonel will cause quick time to be tuken
before ccmmencinj]; the movement.

40'). If, instead of arriving behind, the column
should arrive before the line of battle, the colonel will
command :

1. Lr/l into line, wheel. 2. Three rear coinjjanies, into line^
faced to the rear.

400. At the second command, the captain of each of
the three rear companies will command: 1. Such com-
jjany ; 2. Itiglit — Face. The colonel will then add:

3. March (or double quick — March).

407. At this command, briskly repeated, the first
five companies will form themselves to the left, into
line of battle, and the three last faced to the rear, into
line of battle.

408. If the column be in march, the colonel will
command:

1. To the left, and into line faced to the rear. 2. March
(or duuhle quick — Maucii.)

Article Fourth.

Different modes of passing from column at half
distance^ into line of battle.

lit. Column at half distance, to the left (or right) into line
of battle.

501. A column at half distance having to form itself
to the left (or right) into line of battle, the colonel will
cause it to take distances by one of the means pre-
scribed. Article IX., Part Third, of this school ; which
being executed, he will form the column into lino of
battle, as has been indicated, No. 300, and following :

Scliool of the Battalion— Tart IV. 207

502. If a column by company, at half distance, be
in march, and it be necessary to form rapidly into line
of battle, the colonel will command :

1. By the rear of co'lumn left (or right) into line, wheel.
2. Mauch (or double quick — March).

503. At the first command, the ri|2;ht general guide
will move rapidly to the front, and place himself a
little beyond the point where the head of the column
will rest, and on the prolongation of the guides. The
captain of the eighth company will command : Left
into line, wheel ; the other captains will caution their
companies to continue to march to the front.

504. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the captain of the eighth company, the guide of this
company will halt short, and the company will wheel
to the left, conforming to the principles prescribed for
wheeling from a halt; when its right shall arrive near
the line, the captain will halt the company, and align
it by the left. The other captains will place them-
selves briskly on the flank of the column ; when the
captain of the seventh sees there is sufficient distance
between his company and the eighth to form the latter
into line, he M'ill command: Left into line, wheel —
March ; the left guide will halt short, and facing to
the rear, will place himself on the line ; the company
will wheel to the left, the man on the left of the front
rank will face to the left, and place his breast against
the left arm of the guide ; the captain will halt the
company when its right shall arrive near the line, and
will align it by the left. The other companies will
conform successively to what has just been prescribed
for the seventh.

505. Each captain will direct the alignment of his
company on the left man in the front rank of the com-
pany ne.Kt on his right.

500. The lieutenant-colonel will be watchful that

208 Sdwol of the Battalion— Vaxi lY.

the leading guide marches accurately on the prolonga-
tion of the line of battle, and direct himself on the right
general guide. The major, placed in rear of the left
guide of the eighth company, will, as soon as the guide
of the seventh company is established on the direction,
hasten in rear of the guides of the other companies, so
as to assure each of them in succession on the line.

2d. Column at half distance, on the right (or left) into line-
of battle.

507. A column at half distance "will form itself on
the right (or left) into line of battle, as prescribed for
a column at full distance.

Zd. Column at half distance, forward, into line of battle.

508. If it be wished to form a column at half dis-
tance, forward into line of battle, the colonel will first
cause it to close in mass and then deploy it on the
leading company.

4M. Column at half distance, faced to the rear, into line of

battle.

509. A column at half distance will be formed into
line of battle, faced to the rear, as prescribed for a
column at full distance.

Article Fifth.

Deployment of columns closed in mass.

511. When a column in mass, by division, arrives
behind the line on which it is intended to deploy it,
the colonel will indicate, in advance, to the lieutenant-
colonel, the direction of the line of battle, as well aa
the point on which he may wish to direct the column.
The lieutenant-colonel will immediately detach him-

ScJiool of tlie Battalion— VslH IY. 209

self with two markers, and establish them on that
line, the first at the point indicated, the second a little
less than the front of a division from the first.

512. Deployments will always be made upon lines
parallel, and lines perpendicular to the line of battle ;
consequently, if the head of the column be near the
line of battle, the colonel will commence by establish-
ing the direction of the column perpendicularly to
that line, if it be not already so. If the column be in
march, he will so direct it that it may arrive exactly
behind the markers, perpendicularly to the line of
battle, and halt it at three paces from that line.

513. The column, right in front, being halted, it is
supposed that the colonel wishes to deploy it on the
first division ; he will order the left general guide to
go to a point on the line of battle a little beyond that
at which the left of the battalion will rest when de-
ployed, and place himself correctly on the prolongation
of the markers established before the first divison.

514. These dispositions being made, the colonol will
command :

1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion^
left — Face.

515. At the first command, the chief of the first
division will caution it to stand fast ; the chiefs of the
three other divisions will remind them that they will
have to face to the left.

51G. At the second command, the three lastdivisions
will face to the left; the chief of each division will
place himself ]>y the side of its left guide, and the
junior captain by the side of the covering sergeant of
the left company, who will have stepped into the front
rank.

517. At the same command, the lieutenant-colonel

will place a third marker on the alignment of the two

first, opposite to one of the three left files of the right

company,«first division-, and then place himself on the

18*

210 School of the Battalion— Vd^xi III.

line of battle a few paces beyond the point at which
the left of the second division -will rest.
518. The colonel "will then command:

3. March (or double quick — March).

510. At this command, the chief of the first division
will go to its right, and command :

Right — Dress.

520. At this, the division vrill dress up against the
markers ; the chief of the division, and its junior cap-
tain, will each align the company on his left, and then
command :

Front.

521. The three divisions, faced to the left, will put
themselves in march ; the left guide of the second
will direct himself parallelly to tlie line of battle ; the
left guides of the third and fourth divisions will march
abreast with the guide of the second ; the guides of
the third and fourth, each preserving the prescribed
distance between himself and the guide of the division
which preceded his own in the column.

522. The chief of the second division will not follow
its movement; he will see it file by him, and when
its right guide shall be abreast with him, he will
command :

1. Second division. 2. Halt. 3. Front.

523. The first command will be given when the di-
vision shall yet have seven or eight paces to march ;
the second, when the right guide shall be abreast with
the chief of the division, and the third immediately
after the second.

524. At the second command, the division will halt;
at the third, it will face to the front, and if there be

School of the Battalion — Part IV. 211

openings between the files, the chief of the division
will cause them to be promptly closed to the right ;
the left guides of both companies will step upon the
line of battle, face to the right, and place themselves
on the direction of the markers established before the
first division, each guide opposite to one of the three
left files of his company.

525. The division having faced to the front, its chief
will place himself accurately on the line of battle, on
the left of the first division ; and when he shall see
the guides assured on the direction, he will command,
Right — Dress. At this, the division will be aligned
by the right, in the manner indicated for the first.

526. The third and fourth divisions will continue to
march; at the command halt, given to the second, the
chief of the third will halt in his own person, place
himself exactly opposite to the guide of the second,
after this division shall have faced to the front and
closed its files ; he will see his division file past, and
when his right guide shall be abreast with him, he
will command:

1. Third division. 2. Halt. 3. Front.

527. As soon as the division faces to the front, its
chief will place himself two paces before its centre,
and command :

1. Third division, forward. 2. Guide right, 3. March.

528. At the third command, the division will march
towards the line of battle ; the right guide will so
direct himself as to arrive by the side of the man on
the left of the second division, and when the division
is at three paces from the line of battle, its chief will
halt it and align it by the right.

529. The chief of the fourth division will conform
himgelf (and the chief of the fifth, if there be a fifth)
to what has just been prescribed for the third.

212 Scliool of the Battalion— Tart lY.

530. The deployment ended, the colonel will com-
mand:

Guides — Posts.

531. At this command, the guides will resume their
places in line of battle, and the markers will retire.

532. If the column be in march, and the colonel
shall wish to deploy it on the first division without
halting the column, he will make the dispositions in-
dicated, Nos. 512 and 513, and when the first division
shall have arrived at three paces from the line, he will
command :

1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion hy the
left flank. 3. March (or double quick — March).

533. At the first command, the chief of the first
division will caution it to halt, and will command,
First division; the other chiefs will caution their divi-
sions to face by the left flank.

534. At the command march, briskly repeated by
the chiefs of the rear divisions, the chief of the first
division will command. Halt, and will align his divi-
sion by the right against the markers ; the other divi-
sions will face to the left, their chiefs hastening to the
left of their divisions. The second division will con-
form its movements to what is prescribed, Nos. 522
and following. The third and fourth divisions will
execute what is prescribed, Nos. 526 and following ;
but the chief of each division will halt in his own per-
son at the command march given by the chief of the
division which precedes him, and when the right of
his division arrives abreast of him, he will command :

Such division, hy the right flank — March.

536. If the colonel shall wish to deploy the column
without halting it, and to continue the march, the
markers will not be posted ; the movement will be

School of the Battalion— ?diXt lY. 213

executed by the same commands and the same means
as the foregoing, but with the following modifica-
tions :

537. At the first comm»nd,*the chief of the first
division ■will commsuad ; \. Guide right. 2. Quick
time. At the command, Double quick — March, given
by the colonel, the first division will march in quick
time and will take the touch of elbows to the right;
the captains will place themselves on the right of their
respective companies ; the captain on the right of the
battalion will take points on the ground to assure the
direction of the march. The chief of the second divi-
sion will allow his division to file past him, and when
he sees its right abreast of him, he will command :
1. Second division by the right flank. 2. March. 3.
Guide right; and when this division shall arrive on the
alignment of the first, he will cause it to march in
quick time. The third and fourth divisions will de-
ploy according to the same principles as the second.

538. The colonel, lieutenant colonel, major and
color-bearer will conform themselves to what is pre-
scribed, No. 458.

540. The column being at a halt, if, instead of de-
ploying it on the first, the colonel shall wish to deploy
it on the rearmost division, he will cause the disposi-
tions to be made indicated No. 511 and following; but
it will be the right general guide whom he will send
to place himself beyond the point at which the right
of the battalion will rest when deployed.

541. The colonel will then command :

1. On the fourth (or such) division, deploy column.
2. Battalion, right — Face.

542. At the first command, the chief of the fourth
division will caution it to stand fast ; the chiefs of the
other divisions will caution them that they will have
to face to the right.

214 School of the Battalion— Voxi IV.

543. At the second command, the first three divi-
sions -will face to the rip;ht; and the chief of each -will
place hiinsclf by tlio side of its right guide.

544. At the same cq|nmand, the lieutenant colonel
"will place a third marker between the first two, so
that this marker may be opposite to one of the three
right files of the left company of the division ; the
lieutenant colonel will Iben place himself on the line
of battle a few paces beyond the point at which the
right of the third division will rest when deployed.

545. The colonel w^ill then command :

3. March (or double quick — March).

546. At this command, the three right divisions will
put themselves in march, the guide of the first so di-
recting himself as to pass three paces within the line
marked by the right general guide. The chief of the
third division will not follow its movement ; he will
see it file past, halt it when its left guide shall be
abreast with him, and cause it to face to the front;
and, if there be openings between the files, he will
cause them to be promptly closed to the left.

547. The chief of the fourth division, when he sees
it nearly unmasked by the three others, will com-
mand:

1. Fourth division, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March.

548. At the command march, which will be given
the instant the fourth is unmasked, this division will
approach the line of battle, and when at three paces
from the markers on that line, its chief will halt it,
and command :

Left — Dress.

549. At this command, the division will dress for-
ward against the markers ; the chief of the division

School of the Battalion — Part lY. 215

and the junior captain will each align the company on
his right, and then command :

Front.

550. The instant that tho third division is un-
masked, its chief will cause it to approach the line
of battle, and halt it in the manner just prescribed for
the fourth.

551. The moment the division halts, its right guide
and the covering sergeant of its left company will step
on the line of battle, placing themselves on the pro-
longation of the markers established in front of the
fourth divisi.in ; as soon as they shall be assured in
their positions, the division will be aligned as has just
been proscribed for the fourth.

552. The second and first divsiona which will have
continued to march, will, in succession, be halted and
aligned by the left, in the same manner as the third ;
the chiefs of these divisions will conform themselves
to what is prescribed. No. 526, The second being
near the line of battle, the command will not be given
for it to move on this line but it will be dressed up
to it.

553. The deployment ended, the colonel will com-
mand :

Guides — Posts.

55G. If the column be in march, and the colonel
shall wish to deploy it on the fourth division, he will
make the dispositions indicated, No. 511 and following ;
and when the head of the column shall arrive within
three paces of the line, he will command:

1. On the. fourth division, deploy coluvin. 2. Battalion, by
the right flank. 3. Marcu (or double quick — March).

5G3. To deploy the column on an interior division,
the colonel will cause the line to be traced by the means

21 C School of the Battalion— Vart V.

above indicated, and the general guides -will move
l>riskh' on the line, as prescribed, Nos. 513 and 540.
This being executed, the colonel will command:

1. On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, outwards
— Face. 3. March (or double quick — March).

5G4. Whether the column be with the right or left
in front, the divisions which, in the order in battle,
])elong to the right of the directing one, will face to
the right; the others, except the directing division,
will face to the left.

505. The directing division, the instant it finds itself
unmasked, will approach the line of battle, taking the
guide left or right, according as the right or left of
the column may be in front. The chief of this divi-
sion will align it by the directing flank, and then step
back into the rear, in order momentarily to give
place to the chief of the next for aligning the next
division.

507. If the column be in march, the colonel will
command :

1. On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, by the
right and left flanks. 3. March (or double quick —
March).

PART FIFTH. ^

Article First.

To advance in line of battle.

587. The battalion being correctly aligned, and sup-
posed to be the directing one, when the colonel shall
wish to march in line of battle, he will give the lieu-
tenant colonel an intimation of his purpose, place
himself about forty paces in rear of the color-tile, and
face to the front.

Scliool of the Battalion— VdiYi V. 217

588. The lieutenant colonel will place himself alike
distance in front of the same file, and face to the colo-
nel, who will establish him as correctly as possible, by
signal of the sword, perpendicularly to the line of
battle opposite to the color-bearer. The colonel will
next, above the heads of the lieutenant colonel and
color-bearer, take a point of direction in the field be-
yond, if a distinct one present itself, exactly in the
prolongation of those first two points.

589. The colonel will then move twenty paces far-
ther to the rear, and establish two markers on the
prolongation of the straight line passing through the
color-bearer and the lieutenant colonel ; these markers
will face to the rear, the first placed about twenty-five
paces behind the rear rank of the battalion, and the
second at the same distance from the first.

590. The color-bearer will be instructed to take, the
moment the lieutenant colonel shall be established on
the perpendicular, two points on the ground in the
straight line which, drawn from himself, would pass
between the heels of that ofiicer ; the first of these
points will be taken at fifteen or twenty paces from
the color-bearer.

591. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command :

1. Battalion, forward.

592. At this, the front rank of the color-guard will
advance six paces to the front ; the corporals in the
rear rank will place themselves in the front rank, and
these will be replaced by those in the rank of file-
closers : at the same time the two general guides will
move in advance, abreast with the color-bearer, the
one on the right, opposite to the captain of the right
company, the other opposite to the sergeant who closes
the left of the battalion.

593. The captains of the left wing will shift, passing
before the front rank, to the left of their respective

218 School of the Battalion— V&rt V.

companies ; the serceant on the left of the battalion
■will stop back into the rear rank. The covering ser-
geant of the company next on the left of the color-
company, Avill step into the front rank.

594, The lieutenant colonel having assured the
color-bearer on the line between himself and the cor-
poral of the color-tile, now in the front rank, will
go to the position which will be indicated, No. G02.

505, The major will place himself six or eight paces
on either flank of the color-rank.

596. The colonel will then command :

2. March (or double quick — March).

597. At this command, the battalion will step off
with life ; the color-bearer, charged with the step and
direction, will scrupulously observe the length and
cadence of the pace, marching on the prolongation of
the two points previously taken, and successively
taking others in advance by the means indicated in
the school of the company ; the corporal on his right,
and the one on his left, will march in the same
B*:ep, taking care not to turn the head or shoulders,
the color-bearer supporting the color-lance against
the hip.

598. The two general guides will march in the
same step with the color-rank, each maintaining him-
self abreast, or nearly so, with that rank, and neither
occupying himself wMth the movement of the other.

599. The three corporals of the color-guard, now
in the front rank of the battalion, will march well
aligned, elbow to elbow, heads direct to the front,
and without deranging the line of their shoulders;
the centre one will follow exactly in the trace of
the color-bearer, and maintain the same step, without
lengthening or shortening it, except on an intimation
from the colonel or lieutenant col'.nel, although he
should find himself more or less than six paces from
the color-rank.

School of the Battalion— VdiVi V. 219

600. The covering sergeant in the front rank be-
tween the color-company and the next on the left, will
march elbow to elbow, and on the same line, with the
three corporals in the centre, his head well to the
front.

GOl. The captains of the color-company, and the
company next to the left, will constitute, with the
three corporals in the centre of the front rank, the
basis of alignment for both wings of the battalion ;
they will march in the same step with the color-
bearer, and exert themselves to maintain their shoul-
ders exactly in the square with the direction. To this
end, they will keep their heads direct to the front,
only occasionally casting an eye on the three centre
corporals, with the slightest possible turn of the
neck, and if they perceive themselves in advance, or
in rear of these corporals, the captain, or two cap-
tains, will almost insensibly shorten or lengthen the
step, so as, a^ the end of several paces, to regain the
true alignment, without giving sudden checks or im-
pulsions to the wings beyond them respectively.

602. The lieutenant colonel, placed twelve or fifteen
paces on the right of the captain of the color-com-
pany, will maintain this captain and the next one
beyond, abreast with the three centre corporals ; to this
end, he will caution either to lengthen or to shorten
the step as may be necessary, which the captain, or
two captains, will execute as has just been explained.

603. All the other captains will maintain them-
selves on the prolongation of this basis ; and, to this
end, they will cast their eyes towards the centre,
taking care to turn the neek but slightly, and not to
derange the direction of their shoulders.

604. The captains will observe the march of their
companies, and prevent the men from getting in ad-
vance of the line of captains ; they will not lengthen
or shorten step except when evidently necessary;
because to correct, with too scrupulous attention, small

220 School of the Battalion— Vari V.

faults, is apt to cause the production of greater — loss
of calmness, silence and equality of step, each of
which it is go important to maintain.

G05. The men will constantly keep their heads well
directed to the front, feel lightly the elbow towards
the centre, resist pressure coming from the flank, give
the greatest attention to the squareness of the shoul-
ders, and hold themselves always very slightly behind
the line of the captains, in order never to shutout
from the view of the latter the basis of alignment ;
they will, from time to time, cast an eye on the color-
rank, or on the general guide of the wing, in order to
march constantly in the same step with those advanced
persons.

606. Pending the march, the line determined by the
two markers [h and d) will be prolonged by placing,
in proportion as the battalion advances, a third marker
(/) in the rear of the first (/(). then the marker [d)
will quit his place and go a like distance in rear of
{i) ; the marker [h) will, in his turn, do the like in
respect to [d), and so on, in succession, as long as the
battalion continues to advance ; each marker, on shift-
ing position, taking care to face to the rear, and to
cover accurately the twp markers already established
on the direction. A staff officer, or the quartermaster
sergeant, designated for the purpose, and who will
hold himself constantly fifteen or twenty paces facing
the marker farthest from the battalion, will caution
each marker when to shift place, and assure him on
the direction behind the other two.

Article Third.

To halt the hattalion, marching in line of battle,
and to. align it.

635. The battalion, marching In the line of battle,

School of tlie Battalion— TaH V. 221

when the colonel shall wish to halt it, he will com-
mand :

1. Battalion. 2. Halt.

636. At the second command, the battalion will
halt ; the color-rank and the general guides will re-
main in front ; but if the colonel should not wish im-
mediately to resume the advance in line, nor to give
a general alignment, he will command :

Color and general guides — Posts.

637. At this command, the color-rank and general
guides will retake their places in line of battle, the
captains in the left wing will shift to the right of their
companies. ^

638. If the colonel should then judge it necessary
to rectify the alignment, he will command :

Captains, rectify the alignment.

639. The captains will immediately cast an eye to-
wards the centre, align themselves accurately on the
basis of the alignment, which the lieutenant colonel
will see well directed, and then promptly dress their
respective companies. The lieutenant colonel will
admonish such captains as may not be accurately on
the alignment by the command: Captain q/' (such)
company, or captains of (such) companies^ move up or
fall back.

640. But when the colonel shall wish to give the
battalion a general alignment, either parallel or
oblique, instead of rectifying it as above, he will
move some paces outside of one of the general guides
(the right will here be supposed) and caution the right
general guide and the color-bearer to face him, and
then establish them, by signal of the sword, on the
direction which he may wish to give to the batta-

19*

222 School of the Battalion— Part V.

lion. As soon as they shall be correctly established,
the left f^eneral guide will place himself on their direc-
tion, and be assured in his position by the major. The
color-bearer will carry the color-lance perpendicularly
between his eyes, and the two corporals of his rank
will return to their places in the front rank the mo-
ment he shall face to the colonel.

G41. This disposition being made, the colonel will
command :

1. Guides — On the line.

642. At this command, the right guide of each com-
pany in the right wing, and the left guide of each
company in the left, will each place himself on -the
direction of the color-bearer and the two general
guides, face to the color-bearer, place himself in rear
of the guide who is next before him at a distance equal
to the front of his company, and align himself upon
the color-bearer and the general guide beyond.

643. The captains in the right wing will shift to the
left of their companies, except the captain of the
color company, who will remain on its right, but step
into the rear rank ; the captains in the left wing will
shift to the right of their companies.

644. The lieutenant colonel will promptly rectify, if
necessary, the positions of the guides of the right
wing, and the major those of the other; which being
executed, the colonel will command:

2. On the centre — Deess.

645. At this command, the companies will move up
in quick time against the guides, where, having ar-
rived, each captain will align his company according
to prescribed principles, the lieutenant colonel align-
ing the color company.

646. If the alignment be oblique, the captains will

School of the Battalion—FsiTt V. 223

take care to conform their companies to it in conduct-
ing them towards the line.

647. The battalion being aligned, the colonel will
command:

3. Color and guides — Posts.

648. At this command, the color-bearer, the general
and company guides, and the captains in the right
wing, will take their places in the line of battle, and
the color-bearer will replace the heel of the color-lance
against the right hip.

Article Fifth.
To march in retreat^ in line of battle.

664. The battalion being halted, if it be the wish of
the colonel to cause it to march in retreat, he will
command:

1. Face to the rear. 2. Battalion^ about — Face.

665. At the second command, the battalion will face
about; the color-rank, and the general guides, if in
advance, will take their places in line ; the color-bearer
will pass into the rear rank, now leading; the corporal
of his file will step behind the corporal next on his
own right, to let the color-bearer pass, and then step
into the front rank, now rear, to re-form the color-file;
the colonel will place himself behind the front rank,
become the rear; the lieutenant colonel and major will
place themselves before the rear rank, now leading.

666. The colonel will take post forty paces behind
the color-file, in order to assure the lieutenant colonel
on the perpendicular, who will place himself at a like

224 School of the Battalion— V&xi Y.

distance in front, as prescribed for the advance in line
of battle.

6G7. If the battalion be the one charged with the
direction, the colonel will establish markers in the
manner indicated, No. 589, except that they will face
to the battalion, and that the first will be placed
twenty-five paces from the lieutenant colonel. If the
markers be already established, the officer charged
with replacing them in succession will cause them to
face about, the moment that the battalion executes
this movement, and then the marker nearest to the
battalion will hasten to the rear of the two others.

6C8. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command:

3. Battalion, forward.

669. At this command, the color-bearer will advance
six paces beyond the rank of file closers, accompanied
by the two corporals of his guard of that rank, the
centre corporal stepping back to let the color-bearer
pass; the two file closers nearest this centre corporal
will unite on him behind the color-guard to serve as a
basis of alignment for the line of file closers; the two
general guides will place themselves abreast with the
color rank, the covering sergeants will place them-
selves in the line of file closers, and the captains in
the rear rank, now leading; the captains in the left
wing, now right, will, if not already there, shift to the
left of their companies, now become the right.

670. The colonel will then command:

4. March (or double quick — March).

671. The battalion will march in retreat on the
same principles which govern the advance in line; the
centre corporal behind the color-bearer will march
exactly in his trace.

Sclwol of the Battalion— VsiTt V. 225

Article Sixth.

To halt the battalion marching in retreat^ and to
face it to the front.

676. The colonel havin<5 halted the battaHon, and
"wishing to face it to the front, will command:

1. Face to the front. 2. Battalion, about — Face.

677. At the second command, the color-rank, gene-
ral guides, captains, and covering sergeants, will all
retake their habitual places in line of battle, and the
color-bearer will repass into the front rank.

678. The battalion marching in line of battle by the
front rank, when the colonel shall wish to march it in
retreat, he will command:

1. Battalion, right about. 2. March. «

679. At the command march, the battalion will face
to the rear and move off at the same gait by the rear
rank. The principles prescribed Nos. 669 and follow-
ing will be carefully observed.

680. If the colonel should wish the battalion to
march again by the front, he will give the same
commands.

Article Eighth.

Passage of ohstacles, advancing and retreating,

682. The battalion advancing in line will be sup-
posed to encounter an obstacle w^hich covers one or
more companies; the colonel will cause them to ploy
into column at full distance, in rear of the next com-
pany towards the color, which will be executed in the

226 School of the Battalion— Vari Y.

following manner. It will be supposed that the ob-
stacle only covers the third company, the colonel will
command:

Third company, obstacle.

683. At this command, the captain of the third com-
pany will place himself in its front, turn to it, and
command: 1. Third company, by the left flank, to the
rear into column. 2. Double quick. 3. March. He
will then hasten to the left of his company.

G84. At the command march, the company will face
to the left in marching; the two left files will promptly
disengage to the rear in double quick time; the left
guide, placing himself at the head of the front rank,
will conduct it behind the fourth company, directing
himself parallelly wnth this company; the captain of
the third will himself halt opposite to the captain of
the fourth, and see his company file past; when its
right file shall be nearly up with him, he will com-
mand: 1. Third company. 2. By the right Jiank. 3.
March. 4. Guide right, and place himself before the
centre of his company.

685. At the command march, the company will face
to the right, preserving the same gait, but the moment
it shall be at the prescribed distance, its captain will
command:

1. Quick time. 2. March.

086. This company will thus follow in column that
behind which it finds itself, and at wheeling distance,
its right guide marching exactly in the trace of the
captain of that company.

687. As soon as the third company shall have faced
to the left, the left guide of the second will place him-
self on the left of the front rank of his company, and
maintain between himself and the right of the fourth
the space necessary for the return into line of the
third.

School of the Battalion— Vfxri Y. 227

688. The obstacle being passed, the colonel will
command :

Third company, forward^ into line.

689. At this command, the captain turning to his
company, will add :

1. By company, right half wheel. 2. Double quick.
3. March.

690. At the command march, the company will take
the double quick step, and execute a half wheel; its
captain will then command, 1. Forward. 2. March.
3. Guide left. The second command will be given
when the company shall have sufficiently wheeled.

691. At the command march, the company will
direct itself straight forwards towards the line of battle,
and retake its position in it according to the princi-
ples prescribed for the formation forward into line of
battle.

692. It will be supposed that the obstacle covers
several contiguous companies (the three companies on
the right for example), the colonel will command:

1. Three right companies, obstacle. 2. By the left flank^ to
the rear, into column. 3. Double quick — March.

693. At the first command, the captains of the de-
signated companies will each place himself before the
centre of his company, and caution it as to the move-
ment about to be executed.

694. At the command w.arch, the designated com-
panies will face to the left in marching, and immedi-
ately take the double quick step ; each captain will
cause the head of his company to disengage itself to
the rear, and the left guide will place himself at the
head of the front rank; the captain of the third com-
pany will conform himself to what is prescribed. No.
684 and following ; the captains of the other compa^

228 ScJiool of the Battalion— Vart V.

nies will conduct them by the flank in rear of the third,
inclinin;; towards the head of the column ; and, aa
the head of each company arrives opposite to the right
of the one next before it in column, its captain will
liimself halt, see his company file past, and conform
himself for facing it to the front, in marching, to what
is prescribed No. G84 and following.

095. When the last company in column shall have
passed the obstacle, the colonel will command :

1. Three right companies, forward, into line.

C96. At this command, the captain of each of these
three companies will command : Bi/ company, right
half wheel. The colonel will then add :

1. Double quick. 2. March.

697. At this, briskly repeated by the captains of the
three companies, each company will conform itself to
what is prescribed No. 690 and following.

098. It is supposed, in the foregoing examples, that
the companies belonged to the right wing ; if they
make part of the other, they will execute the passage
of an obstacle according to the same principles and
by inverse means.

699. When flank companies are broken off to pass
an obstacle, the general guide on that flank will place
himself six paces in front of the outer file of the nearest
company to him remaining in line.

700. In the preceding movements, it has been sup-
posed that the battalion was marching in quick time,
but if it be marching in double quick time, and the
colonel shall wish to cause several contiguous compa-
nies to break to the rear, he will first order the bat-
talion to march in quick time ; the companies will
break as indicated No. 692.

706. When the color-company shall be obliged to
execute the movement of passing an obstacle, the

School of the Battalion— Tart V. 229

color-rank will return into line at the moment the com-
pany shall face to the left or right ; the major will
place himself six paces before the extremity of the
company behind which the color-company marches in
column, in order to give the step and the direction;
he, himself, first taking the step from the battalion.

Article Ninth.

To pass a dejihy in retreat, hy the right or left
flank.

709. When a battalion, retiring in line, shall en-
counter a defile which it must pass, the colonel will
halt the battalion, and face it to the front.

710. It will be supposed that the defile is in rear of
the left flank, and that its width is sufficient to give
passage to a column by platoon ; the colonel will place
a marker fifteen or twenty paces in rear of the file
closers .at the point around which the subdivisions will
have to change direction in order to enter the defile ;
he will then command:

To the rear, by the right flank, pass the defile.

711. The captain of the first company will immedi*
ately command :

1. First company, right — Face. 2. March (or double-
quick — March.)

712. At the command march, the first company will!
commence the movement ; the first file will wheel to the
right, march to the rear till it shall have passed four
paces beyond the file closers, when it will wheel again i
to the right, and then direct itself straight forward'
towards the left flank. All the other files of this cora-

230 Scliool of the Battalion— Vart V.

pany will come to wheel in succession at the same place
where the first had wheeled.

713. The second company will execute, in its turn,
the same movement, by the commands of its captain,
who M'ill f;ive the command March, so that the first
file of his company may immediately folh^w the last
of the first, without constraint, however, as to taking
the step of the first ; the first file of the second com-
pany will wheel to the right, on its ground ; all the
other files of this company will come in succession to
wheel at the same place. The following companies
will execute, each in its turn, what has just been pre-
scribed for the second.

714. When the whole of the second company shall
be on the same direction with the first, the captain of
the first will cause it to form, by platoon, into line, and
the moment that it is in column, the guide of the first
platoon will direct himself on the marker around whom
he has to change direction in order to enter the defile.

715. The second company will continue to march by
the flank, directing itself parallelly with the line of
battle ; and it, in its turn, will form by platoon into
line, when the third company shall be wholly on the
earae direction with itself.

71C. The following companies will successively exe-
cute what has just been prescribed for the second.

717. The first platoon of the leading company having
arrived opposite to the marker placed at the entrance
of the defile, will turn to the left, and the following
platoons will all execute this movement at the same
point. As the last companies will not be able to form
platoons before reaching the defile, they will so direct
themselves, in entering it, as to leave room to the left
for this movement.

718. The battalion will thus pass the defile by pla-
toon ; and, as the two platoons of each company shall
clear it, companies will be successively formed.

719. The head of the column having cleared the

Scfiool of the Battalion— Vavt V. 231

defile, and having reached the distance at which the
colonel wishes to re-form line faced to the defile, ho
may cause the leading company to turn to the left, to
prolong the column in that direction, and then form it
to the left into line of battle ; or he may halt the
column, and form it into line of battle faced to the
rear.

720. If the defile be in the rear of the right flank,
it will be passed by the left ; the movement will be
executed according to the same principles, and by
inverse means.

721. If the defile be too narrow to receive the front
of a platoon, it will be passed by the flank.

Article Tenth,
To march hy the JianJc.

722. The colonel, wishing the battalion to march by
the flank, will command :

1. Battalion. 2. Right (or left) — Face. 8, Forward.
4. March (or double quick — March).

723. At the second command, the captains and cov-
ering sergeants will place themselves as prescribed,
No8. 136 and 141, school of the company.

724. The sergeant on the left of the battalion will
place himself to the left and by the side of the last file
of his company, covering the captains in file.

725. The battalion having to face by the left flank,
the captains, at the second command, will shift rapidly
to the left of their companies, and each place himself
by the side of the covering sergeant of the company
preceding his own, except the captain of the left com-
pany, who will place himself by the side of the ser-

232 ScJiool of the Battalioji —VuTt V.

geant on th* left of the battalion. The coverinp;
sergeant (»f the right company will place himself by
the right siile of the front rank man of the rearmost file
of hia company, covering the captains in file.

720. At the command march, the battalion will step
off with life; the sergeant, placed before the leading
file (right or left in front), wmU be careful to preserve
exactlv the length and cadence of the step, and to di-
rect himself straight forward ; to this end, he will take
points on the ground.

727. "Whether the battalion march by the right or
left flank, the lieutenant colonel will place himself
abreast with the leading file, and the major abreast
with the color-file, both on the side of the front rank,
and about six paces from it.

728. The adjutant, placed between the lieutenant
colonel and the front rank, will march in the same
step with the head of the battalion, and the sergeant
major, placed between the major and the color-bearer,
will march in the same step with the adjutant.

729. The captains and file closers will carefully see
that the files neither open out, nor close too much,
and that they regain insensibly their distances, if
lost.

730. The colonel, wishing the battalion to wheel
by file, will command:

1. B>/ file right (or left). . 2. March.

731. The files will wheel in succession, and all at
the place where the first had wheeled, in conforming to
the principles prescribed in the school of the com-
pany.

732. The battalion marching by the flank, when
the colonel shall wish it to halt, he will command :

1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 3. Front.

733. These commands will be executed as prescribed
in the school of the company, No. 140.

School of the Battalion— Fart V. 233

734. If the battalion be marching by the flanlc, and
the colonel should wish to cause it to march in line,
either to the front or to the rear, the movements will
be executed by the commands and means prescribed
in the school of the company.

Article Eleventh.

To fortn the hattalion on the right or left^ hy jile^
into line of battle.

735. The battalion marching by the right flank,
when the colonel shall wish to form it on the right by
file, he will determine the line of battle, and the
lieutenant colonel will place two markers on that line,
in conformity with what is prescribed. No. 415.

736. The head of the battalion being nearly up with
the first marker, the colonel will command:

1. On the right y by file, into line. 2. March (or double
quick — March.)

737. At the command march, the leading company
will form itself on the right, by file, into line of battle,
as indicated in the school of the company, No. 149 :
the front rank man of the first file will rest his breast
lightly against the right arm of the first marker ; the
other companies will follow the movement of the lead-
ing company; each captain will place himself on the
line at the same time with the front rank man of his
first file, and on the right of this man.

738. The left guide of each company, except the
leading one, will place himself on the direction of the
markers, and opposite to the left file of his company,
at the instant that the front rank man of this file
arrives on the line.

234 JSchool of the Battalion— Part V.

739. The formation being ended, the colonel 'will
command :

Guides — Posts.

740. The colonel will superintend the successive
formation of the battalion, moving along the front of
the line of battle.

741. The lieutenant colonel vs'ill, in succession, as-
sure the direction of the guides, and see that the men
of the front rank, in placing themselves on the line,
do not pass it.

Article T^velfth.

Changes of front.

Change of front perpendicularly forward.

743. The battalion being in line of battle, it is sup-
posed to be the wish of the colonel to cause a change
of front forward on the right company, and that the
angle formed by the old and new positions be a right
angle, or a few degrees more or less than one ; he will
cause two markers to be placed on the new direc-
tion, before the position to be occupied by that com-
pany, and order its captain to establish it against the
markers.

744. The captain of the right company will imme-
diately direct it upon the markers by a wheel to the
right on the fixed pivot ; and after having halted it,
he will align it by the right.

745. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command :

1. Change front forward on first company. 2. By com-
pany, right half wheel. 3. March (or double quick —
MARcnj.

School of the Battalion— Psiri V. 235

74G. At the second command, each captain will
place himself before the centre of his company.

747. At the third, each company will wheel to the
right on the fixed pivot; the left guide of each will
place himself on its left as soon as he shall be able to
pass; and when the colonel shall judge that the com-
panies have sufi&ciently wheeled, he will command :

4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right.

748. At the fifth command, the companies ceasing
to wheel will march straight furward ; at the sixth,
the men will touch elbows towards the right.

749. The right guide of the second company will
march straight forward until this company shall drrive
at the point where it should turn to the right ; each
succeeding right guide will follow the file immediately
before him at the cessation of the wheel, and will
march in the trace of this file until this company shall
turn to the right to move upon the line ; this guide
will then march straight forward.

750. The second company having arrived opposite
to the left file of the first, its captain will cause it to
turn to the right ; the right guide will direct himself
so as to arrive squarely upon the line of battle, and
when he shall be at three paces from that line, the
captain will command :

1. Second company. 2. Halt.

751. At the second command, the company will
halt; the files not yet in line with the guide will come
into it promptly, the left guide will place himself on
the line of battle, and as soon as he is assured in the
direction by the lieutenant colonel, the captain will
align the company by the right.

752. Each following company will conform to what
has just been prescribed for the second.

236 School of the Battalion— VsiTi Y,

753. The formation ended, the colonel "will com-
mand:

Guides — Posts.

754. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel
shall wish to change front forward on the first com-
pany, and that the angle formed by the old and new
positions be a right angle, he will cause two markers
to be placed on the new direction, before the position
to be occupied by that company, and will command:

1. Change front forward on first company. 2. By com-
pany, right half wheel. 3. March (or double quick —
March).

755. At the first command, the captains will move
rapidly before the centre of their respective compa-
nies: the captain of the first company will command:
1. Right iurn ; 2. Quick time; the captains of the
other companies will caution them to wheel to the
right.

756. At the command march, the first company will
turn to the right, according to the principles prescribed
in the school of the soldier, No. 402 ; its captain will
halt it at three paces from the markers, and the files
in rear will promptly come into line. The captain
will align the company by the right.

757. Each of the other companies will wheel to the
right on a fixed pivot; the left guides will place them-
selves on the left of their respective companies, and
when the colonel shall judge they have wheeled suffi-
ciently, he will command :

4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right.

759. The colonel will cause the battalion to change
front forward on the eighth company, according to the
same principles and by inverse means.

School of the Battalion— Poit V. 237

Change of front perpendicularly to the rear.

760. The colonel, wishing to change front to the
rear on the right company, will impart his purpose to
the captain of this company. The latter will imme-
diately face his company about, wheel it to the left on
the fixed pivot, and halt it when it shall be in the di-
rection indicated to him by the colonel ; the captain
will then face his company to the front, and align it
by the right against the two markers, whom the colonel
will cause to be established before the right and left
files.

761. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command:

1. Change front to the rear, on first company. 2. Batta-
lion, about — Face. 3. By company, left half wheel.
4. March (or double quick — March).

762. At the second command, all the companies,
except the right, will face about.

763. At the third, the captains, whose companies
have faced about, will each place himself behind the
centre of his company, two paces from the front rank,
now the rear.

764. At the fourth, these companies will wheel to
the left on the fixed pivot by the rear rank ; the left
guide of each will, as soon as he is able to pass, place
himself on the left of the rear rank qf his company,
now become the right ; and when the colonel shall
judge that the companies have sufficiently wheeled, he
will command:

5. Forward. 6. March. 7. Guide left.

765. At the sixth command, the companies will
cease to wheel, march straight forward towards the
n«w line of battle, and, at the seventh, take the touch
of the elbow towards the left.

767. The second company, from the right, having

238 Scliool of the Battalion— ?d.vi Y.

arrived opposite to the left of the first, will turn to the
left ; the o;uide will so direot himself as to arrive par-
allelly with the line of battle, cross that line, and
"when the front rank, now in the rear, shall be three
paces beyond it, the captain will command : 1. Second
company; 2. Halt.

768. At the second command, the company will halt ;
the files which may not yet be in line with the guide,
will promptly come into it ; the captain will cause the
company to face about, and then alio;n it by the right.

769. AH the other companies will execute what has
just been prescribed for the second, each as it succes-
sively arrives opposite to the left of the company that
precedes it on the new line of battle.

770. The formation being ended, the colonel will
command :

Guides — Posts.

771. The colonel will cause a change of front on the
left company of the battalion to the rear, according to
the same principles and by inverse means.

Article Thirteenth.

To ploy the battalion into column doubled on the

centre.

776. This movement consists in ploying the corre-
sponding companies of the right and left wings into
column at company distance, or closed in mass, in rear
of the two centre companies, according to the princi-
ples prescribed, Article Third, Part Second, of this
School.

777. The colonel, wishing to form the donble ccdumn
at company distance, (the battalion being in line of
battle,) will command:

1. Douhle column, at half distance. 2. Battalion, inwards —
Face. 3. March (or double quick — March).

Sclwol of the Battalion— Vart V. 239

778. At the first command, the captains will place
themselves two paces in front of their respective com-
panies ; the captains of the two centre companies will
caution them to stand fast, and the other captains will
caution their companies to face to the left and right,
respectively. The covering sergeants will step into
the front rank.

779. At the second command, the fourth and fifth
companies will stand fast ; the others of the right wing
will face to the left, and the others of the left wing
will face to the right ; each captain whose company-
has fiiced, will hasten to break to the rear the two files
at the head of his company; the left guide of each
right company, and the right guide of each left com-
pany, will each place himself at the head of its front
rank, and the captain by the side of his guide.

780. At the command march, the fourth and fifth
companies, which are to form the first division, will
stand fast; the senior captain of the two will place
himself before thecentre of the division, and command:
Guide rig/it; the junior captain will place himself in
the interval between the two companies, and the left
guide of the left company will place himself in the
front rank on the left of the division, as soon as he
shall be al)le to pass.

781. All the other companies, conducted by their
captains, will step off with life to arrange themselves
in column at company distance, each company behind
the preceding one in the column of the same wing, so
that, in the right wing, the third may be next behind
the fourth, the second next to the third, and so on to
the right company; and in the left wing, the sixth
may be next behind the fifth, the seventh next to the
sixth, and so on to the left company of the battalion.

782. The corresponding companies of the two wings
will unite into divisions in arranging themselves in
column ; an instant before the union, at the centre of
the column, the left guides of right companies will

240 School of the Battalion— ?tixt V.

pass into the line of file closers, and each captain will
command: 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 3. Front.

783. At the .second command, which will be given
at the instant of union, each company will halt; at
the third, it will face to the front. The senior captain
in each division will place himself on its right, and
command, lii'jht — Dress, and the junior captain will
place himself in the interval between the two compa-
nies. The division being aligned, its chief will com-
mand Front, and take his position two paces before
its centre.

784. The column being thus formed, the divisions
will take the respective denominations of Jirst, .second,
third, (&c., according to position in the column, begin-
ing at the front.

785. The lieutenant-colonel, who, at the second com-
mand given by the colonel, will have placed himself
at a little more than comppany distance in rear of the
right guide of the first division, will assure the right
guides on the direction as they successively arrive, by
placing himself in their rear.

786. The music will pass to the rear of the column.

787. The battalion being in march, to form the
double column at company distance without halting
the battalion, the colonel will command :

1. Double column at half distance. 2. Battalion by the
right and left flanks. 3. March {or double quick —
March).

788. At the first command, each captain will move
briskly in front of the centre of his company ; the
captains of the fourth and fifth will caution their com-
panies to march straight forward ; the other captains
will caution their companies to face to the right and
left.

789. At the command marchy the fourth and fifth
companies will continue to march straight forward ;

School of the Battalion — Part Y. 241

the senior captain -will place himself before the centre
of his division and command: Guideright; the junior
captain will place himself in the interval between the
two companies. The left guide of the fifth company
will place himself on the left of the front rank of the
division. The men will take the touch of elbows to
the ri^ht. The color and general guides will retake
their places. The three right companies Avill face to
the left, and the three left companies will 'face to the
right. Each captain will break to the rear two files at
the head of his company^ the left guides of the right
companies, and the right guides of the left companies,
will each place himself at the head ofthe front rank of
his company, and the captain by the side of his guide.

790. The third and sixth companies will enter the
column and direct themselves parallelly to the first
division. Each of the other companies will, in like
manner, place itself behind the company of the wing to
which it belongs, and will be careful to gain as much
ground as possible towards the head of the colnmn.

791. The corresponding companies of each wing
will unite into divisions on taking their positions in
column, and each captain, the instant the head of his
company arrives at the centre of the column, will com-
mand: 1. Such compamj, hij the right {ov left) flank.
2. March. The senior captain of the two companies
will place himself in front of the centre of his division,
and command: Guide right; the junior captain will
place himself in the interval between the two compa-
nies. The two companies thus formed into a division
will take the touch of elbows to the right, and when
each division has gained its proper distance, its chief
will cause it to march in quick time.

793. The double column, closed in mass, will be
formed according to the same principles and by "the
same commands, substituting the indication, closed in
mass, for that of at half distance.
21

242 School of the Battalion— Vd^ri Y.

Deployment of the double column^ faced to the
front.

796. The colonel, -wishing to deploy the double
column, will place a marker respectively before the
right and left files of the first division, and a third
before the left file of the right company, same division ;
■which being done he will cause the two general guides
t« spring out on the alignment of the markers a little
beyond the points at which the respective flanks of
the battalion ought to rest ; he will then command :

\. Deploy column. 1. Battalion outwards — Face. S.March
(or double quick — March). *

797. The column will deploy itself on the two com-
panies at its head, according to the principles pre-
scribed for the deployment of columns in mass. The
captains of these companies will each, at the command
march, place himself on the right of his own company,
and align it by the right ; the captain of the fourth
will then place himself in the rear rank, and the cov-
ering sergeant in the rank of file closers, at the
moment the captain of the third shall come to its left
to align it.

798. The deployment being ended, the colonel will
command :

Guides — Posts.

800. The battalion being in double column and in
march, if the colonel shall wish to deploy it without
halting the column, he will cause three markers to be
posted on the line of battle, and when the head of
the column shall arrive near the markers, he will
command:

1. Deploy column. 2. Battalion, by the right and left
flanks. 3. March (or double quick — March).

School of the Battalion— Vari Y. 243

801. The column will deploy on the two leading
companies, according to the principles prescribed for
the deployment of a close column, No. 533 and fol-
lowing; at the command march, the chief of the first
divisions will halt it, and the captains of the fourth
and fifth companies will align their companies by the
right.

802. If the column be in march, and it be the wish
of the colonel to deploy the column and to c(;ntinue to
march in the order of battle, he will not cause markers
to be established at the head of the column. At the
first command, the chief of the first division will com-
mand, Quick time. At the command march, the first
division will continue to march in quick time ; the
colonel will command, Guide centre. The captains of
the fourth and fifth companies, the color, and the men,
will immediately conform to the principles of the
march in line of battle. The companies will takd the
quick step by the command of their captains, as they
successively arrive in line. The movement completed,
the colonel may cause the battalion to march in double
quick time.

To form the double column into line of hattle, faced
to the right or left.

803. The double column, being at company distance
and at a halt, may be formed into line of battle faced
to the right or left; when the colonel shall wish to
form it faced to the right, he will command:

1. Right info line ivheel, left companies on the right into line.
2. Battalion, guide right. 3. March (or double quick —
March).

804. At the first command, each captain will place
himself before the centre of his company; the right
companies will be cautioned that they will have to

244 School of the Battalion— Vart V.

•wheel to the ri;;ht into line, the left companies that
thev will have to march straight forward.

805. At the second command, the left guide of the
fourth company will place himself briskly on the
direction of the right guides of the column, face to
them, and opposite to one of the three last files of his
company wiien in line of battle ; the lieutenant colonel
■will assure him in that position.

806. At the command march, briskly repeated by all
the captains, the right companies will form to the right
into line of battle, the left companies will put them-
selves in march in order to form on the right into line
of battle: the lieutenant colonel will assure the guides
of the left wing on the line of battle as they succes-
sively come upon it.

Article Fourteenth.

Dispositions against Cavalry.

817. A battalion being in column by company, at
full distance, right in front, and at a halt, when the
colonel shall wish to form it into square, he will first
cause divisions to be formed; which being done, he
will command:

1. To form square. 2. To half distance, close column.
3. March (or double quick — March).

818. At the command march, the column will close
to company distance, the second division taking its
distance from the rear rank of the first division.

819. At the moment of halting the fourth division,
the file closers of each company of which it is com-
posed, passing by the outer flank of their companies,
will place themselves two paces before the front rank
opposite to their respective places in line of battle, and
face towards the head of the column.

School of the Battalion— TsltI Y. 245

820. At the commencement of the movement, the
major will place himself on the right of the columa
abreast with the first division; the buglers formed in
two ranks will place themselves at platoon distance,
behind the inner platoons of the second division.

821. These dispositions being made, the colonel
may, according to circumstances, put the column in
march, or cause it to form square; if he wish to do the
latter, he will command:

1. Form square. 2. Ei^ht and left into line, wheel.

822. At the first command, the lieutenant colonel,
facing to the left guides, and the major, facing to those
of the right, will align them, from the front, on the re-
spective guides of the fourth division, who will stand
fast, holding up their pieces, inverted, perpendicu-
larly; the right guides, in placing themselves on the
direction, will take their exact distances.

823. At the second command, the chief of the first
division will caution it to stand fast; all the captains
of the second and third divisions will place themselves
before the centres of their respective companies, and
caution them that they will have to wheel, the right
companies to the right, and the left companies to the
left into line of battle.

824. The color-bearer will step back into the line of
file closers, opposite to his place in line of battle, and
will be replaced by the corporal of his file, who is in
the rear rank ; the corporal of the same file who is in
the rank of file closers will step into the rear rank.

825. The chief of the fourth division will command:
1. Fowi.h dimsion, forioard; 2. Guide left, and place
himself at the same time two paces outside of its left
flank.

826. These dispositions ended, the colonel will
command:

March (or double quick — Maech).

246 School of (he Battalion^VsiTt V.

827. At this command, briskly repeated, the first
division will stand fast; but its right file will face to
the right, and its left file to the left.

828. The companies of the second and third di-
visions will wheel to the right and left into line, and
the buglers will advance a space equal to the fropt of
a company.

829. The fourth division will close up to form the
square, and when it shall have closed, its chief will
halt it, face it about, and align it by the rear rank
upon the guides of the division, who will, for this pur-
pose, remain faced to the front. The junior captain
will pass into the rear rank, now become the front, and
the covering sergeant of the left company will place
himself behind him in the front rank, become rear.
The file closers will, at the same time, close up a pace
on the front rank, and the outer file on each flank of
the division will face outwards.

830. The square being formed, the colonel will
command :

Guides — Posts.

831. At this command, the chiefs of the first and
fourth divisions, as well as the guides, will enter the
square.

832. The captains whose companies have formed to
the right into line, will remain on the left of their
companies; the left guide of each of those companies
will, in the rear rank, cover his captain, and the cov-
ering sergeant of each will place himself as a file closer
behind the right file of his company.

833. The field and stafi" will enter the square, the
lieutenant colonel placing himself behind the left, and
the major behind the right of the first division.

834. If the battalion present ten, instead of eight
companies, the fourth division will make the same
movements prescribed above for the second and third

School of the Battalion— ?Qxi V. 247

divisions, and the fifth, the movements prescribed for
the fourth division.

835. A battalion ought never to present, near the
enemy's cavalry, an odd company. The odd company,
under that circumstance, ought, when the battalion is
under arms, to be consolidated, for the time, with the
other companies.

836. The fronts of the square will be designated as
follows: The first division will always be the jirst

front; the last division, the fourth front; the right
companies of the other divisions will form the second
front; and the left companies of the same divisions
the third front.

843. If the battalion, before the square is formed,
be in double column, the two leading companies will
form the first front, the two rear companies the fourth ;
the other companies of the right half battalion will
form the second, and those of the left half battalion
the third front.

844. The first and fourth fronts will be commanded
by the chiefs of the first and fourth divisions ; each of
the other two bj^ its senior captain.

845. The commander of each front will place him-
self four paces behind its present rear rank, and will
be replaced momentarily in the command of his com-
pany by the next in rank therein.

847. If the column by division, whether double or
simple, be in mass, and the colonel shall wish to form
it into square, he will first cause it to take company
distance; to this efiect, he will command:

1. To form square. 2. By the head of column, take half

distance.

849. The colonel will halt the column the moment
the third division shall have its distance. As soon
as the column is halted, the dispositions indicated,
No. 819, will be executed, and when these are com-
pleted, the colonel may proceed to form square.

248 Schcol of the Battalion— Vd^xi Y.

854. The battalion being formed into square, when
the colonel shall wish to cause it to advance a distance
less than thirty paces, he will command :

1. By (such) fronts forward. 2. March.

855. If it be supposed that the advance be made by
the first front, the chief of this front will command:

1. First division, forward. 2. Guide centre.

856. The chief of the second front will face his front
to the left. The captains of the companies composing
this front will place themselves outside, and on the
right of their left guides, who will replace them in the
front rank ; the chief of the third front will face his
front to the right, and the captains in this front will
place themselves outside, and on the left of their cover-
ing sergeants ; the chief of the fourth front will face
his front about, and command: 1. Fourth division,
forward; 2. Guide centre. The captain, who is in
the centre of the first front, will be charged with the
direction of the march.

857. At the command march, the square will put
itself in motion ; the companies marching by the flank
will be careful not to lose their distances. The chief
of the fourth division will cause his division to keep
constantly closed on the flanks of the second and third
fronts.

857. This movement will only be executed in quick
time.

858. The lieutenant colonel will place himself in
rear of the file of direction, in order to regulate his
march.

860. If the colonel should wish to halt the square,,
lie will command :

1. Battalion. 2. Halt.

Sclwol of the Battalion— Tart V. 249

861. At the second command, the 8qnare will halt;
the fourth front will face about iramediotely, and with-
out further command : the second and third fronts will
face outwards ; the captains of companies will resume
their places as in square.

8G2, In moving the square forward by the second,
third or f )urth fronts, the same rules will be observed.

863. The battalion being formed into square, when
the colonel shall wish to cause it to advance a greater
distance than thirty paces, he will command :

1. Form column.

864. The chief of the first front will command:
1. First division, forward. 2. Guide left.

865. The commander of the fourth front will caution
it to stand fast; the commander of the second front
will cause it to face to the left, and then command,
Bi/ company, by Jile left. The commander of the third
front will cause it to face to the right, and then com-
mand, By company, by fie right. At the moment the
second and third fronts face to the left and right, each
captain will cause it to break to the rear the two lead-
ing files of his company.

866. These dispositions being made, the colonel will
command ;

3. March — (or double quick — March).

867. At this command, the first front will march
forward ; its chief will halt it when it shall have ad-
vanced a space equal to half its front, and align it by
the left.

868. The corresponding companies of the second
and third fronts will wheel by file to the left and
right, and march to meet each other behind the centre
of ihe first division, and the moment they unite, the
captain of each company will halt his company and

250 School of the Battalion — Part Y.

face it to the front. The division being re-formed, its
chief will ali^n it by the left.

869. The commander of the fourth front will cause
it to ftice about; its file-closers will remain before the
front rank.

870. The column being thus re-formed, the colonel
may put it in march ; the right guides will preserve
company di.><tance exactly as the directing guides.

871. When the colonel shall wish to re-form square,
he will give the necessary commands.

872. To cause the square to march in retreat, the
colonel will first cause column to be formed ; and
when formed, he will cause it to face by the rear
rank ; to this end, he will command :

1. To march in retreat. 2. Face bi/ the rear rank. 3. Bat-
talion about — Face.

873. At the second command, the file closers of the
interior divisions will place themselves, passing by the
outer flanks of their respective companies, behind the
front rank opposite to their places in line of battle;
the file closers of the other divisions will stand fast.

874. At the third command, the battalion will face
about; each chief of division will place himself before
its rear rank, become front, passing through the in-
terval between its two companies; the guides will step
into the rear rank, now front.

875. The column being thus disposed, the colonel
may put it in march, or cause it to form square, as if
it were faced by the front rank. The square being
formed, its fronts will preserve the same designations
they had when faced by the front rank.

876. The battalion being in square by the rear rank,
when the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat or
in advance, a distance less than thirty paces, he will
conform to what is prescribed. No. 854 and following;
otherwise, he will re-form the column according to the

School of tilt Battalion — Part Y. 251

principles prescribed, No. 863, by marching forward
the fourth front.

877. If the square is to be marched to the front a
distance greater than thirty paces, the colonel will
face the column by the front rank ; to this end, he
will command :

1. To march in advance. 2. Face hy the front rank.
3. Battalion about — Facb.

879. If the column be marchinp; in advance, and
the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat, he will
command:

1. To march in retreat. 2. Battalion right about.
3. March (or double quick — March).

880. At the second command, the file closers of the
second and third divisions will place them>:elve.s rapidly
before the front rank of their respective divisions. At
the command mavfJi, the column will face about and
move oif to the rear.

881. If the column be marching in retreat, and the
colonel shall wish to march it in advance, he will
command :

1. To march in advance. 2. Battalion right about.
3. March (or double quick — March).

882. At the second command, the file closers of the
second and third divisions will place themselves before
the rear rank of their respective divisions ; at the third,
the column will face by the front rank.

To reduce the square.

883. The colonel, wishing to break the square, will
command :

1. Reduce square. 2. March (or double quick — March).

252 Sclwol of the Battalion — Part V.

884. Thi'5 movement will be executed in the manner
indicated, No. 8G3 and following ; but the file-closers
of the fourth front will place themselves behind the
rear rank the moment it faces about; the field and
stafi", the color-bearer and buglers, will, at the same
time, return to their places in column.

To form square from line of battle.

888. To ploy the battalion into column upon one of
the flank divisions, the colonel will command :

1. To form square. 2. Column at half distance hy division.

3. On the first (or fotirth) division. 4. Battalion, right
{px left) — Face. 6. March (or c?ou6Z5 ge^/cA; —March).

889. This movement will be executed according to
the priciples prescribed.

890. If the battalion be marching in line of battle,
and the colonel shall wish to form square, in a di-
rection perpendicular to the line of battle, he will
command :

1. To form square. 2. On the first (or fourth) division,
form column. 3. Battalion, by the right (or left) flank.

4. March (or double quick — March).

892. To ploy the battalion into double column, the
colonel will command :

1. To form square. 2. Double column at half distance.
3. Battalion, inwards— Face. 4. March (or double
quick — March),

894. The battalion being in march, to ploy it
into double column to form square, the colonel will
command : •

1. To form square. 2. Form double column. 3. Battalion^
by the right and left flanks. 4. March (or double
quick — March).

School of the Battalion— Vari V. 253

895. The chief of the leading division will halt hia
division at the command march.

Squares in four ranks.

910. If the square formed in two ranks, according to
the preceding rules, should not be deemed sufficiently
strong, the colonel may cause the square to be formed
in four ranks.

911. The battalion being in column by company at
full distance, right in front, and at a halt, when the
colonel shall wish to form square in four ranks, he will
first cause divisions to be formed, which being exe-
cuted, he will command:

1. To form square in fdur ranks. 2. To half distance, clos^
column. 3. March (or double quick — March).

912. At the first command, the chief of the first
division will caution the right company to face to the
left, and the left company to face to the right. The
chiefs of the other divisions will caution their divisions
to move forward.

913. At the command march, the right company of
the first division will form into four ranks on its left
file, and the left company into four ranks on its right
file. The formation ended, the chief of this division
will align it by the left.

914. The otlier divisions will move forward and
double their files marching; the right company of
each division will double on its left file, and the left
company on its right file. The formation completed,
each chief of division will command. Guide left. Each
chief will halt his division when it shall have the dis-
tance of a company front in four ranks from the pre-
ceding one, counting from its rear rank, and will align
his division by the left. At the instant the fourth di-
vision is halted, the file-closers will move rapidly
before its front rank.

22 \

254 School of the Battalion — Part V.

915. The colonel will form square, re-forra column,
and reduce square in four ranks, by the same com-
mands and means as prescribed for a battalion in two
ranks.

91G. If the square formed in four ranks be reduced
and at a halt, and the colonel shall wish to form the
battalion into two ranks, he will command :

1. In two ranks undouhle files. 2. Battalion^ outwards —
Face. 3. March.

917. At the first command, the captains will step
before the centres of their respective companies, and
those on the right will caution them to face to the
rig;ht, and those on the left to face to the left.

918. At the second command, the battalion will face
to the right and left.

919. At the command march, each company will
undouble its files and re-form into two ranks as indi-
cated in the school of the company. Each captain will
halt his company and face it to the front. The forma-
tion completed, each chief of division will align his
division by the left.

920. If the column be in march, with divisions
formed in four ranks, and the colonel shall wish to re-
form them into two ranks, he will command :

1. Guide centre. 2. In two ranks, undouble files.
3. March.

921. The captain, placed in the centre of each divi-
sion, will continue to march straight to the front, as
will also the left file of the right company, and the
right file of the left company. Each company will
then be re-formed into two ranks, as prescribed in the
school of the company.

922. Tlie battalion being formed into two ranks, the
colonel will command, Guide left (or riyht).

School of the Battalion — Part V. 255

923. To form square in four ranks on one of the
flank divisions, the colonel will command :

1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Column at half dis-
tance, hy division 3. On the first (or fourth) division.
4. Battalion, right (or left) — Fack. 5. March (or
double quick — March).

924. At the second command, each chief of division
will place himself before the centre of his division,
and caution it to face to the right.

925. At the fourth command, the right guide of the
first division will remain faced to the front, the batta-
lion will face to the light.

92G. At the command march, the first file of four
men of the first division will face to the front, re-
maining doubled. All the other files of four men
will step ofi" together, and each in succession will
close up to its proper distance on the file preceding
it, and face to the front, remaining doubled. When
the last file shall have closed, the chief of division will
command, Left — Dress. *

927. The other divisions will ploy into column in
the same manner as with a battalion in two ranks,
observing what follows: the chiefs of divisions, in-
stead of allowing their divisions to file past them on
entering the column, will continue to lead them, and
as each division shall arrive on a line with the right
guide of the first division, its chief will halt the right
guide, who will immediately face to the front ; the
first file of four men will also halt at the same time
and face to the front, remaining doubled. The se-
cond tile will close on the first, and when closed,
halt, and face to the front, remaining doubled. All
the other files will execute successively what has
just been prescribed for the second. When the last file
shall have closed, the chief of division will command,
Left — Dress.

256 School of the Battalion— Tart V.

931. If the colonel should wish to form a perpen-
dicular pquare in four ranks, by double column, he
will command :

1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Double column, at
h'tlf distance. 3. Bnttnlion inwards — Face. 4. March
(or douule quick — March).

*932. At the second command, the captains of com-
panies will place themselves before the centres of their
respective companies, and caution those on the right
to face to the left, and those on the left to face to the
right. The captain of the fifth company will caution
his covering sergeant to stand fas^t.

933. At the third command, the battalion will face
to the left and right ; at the command march, the left
file of the fourth, and the right file of the fifth com-
pany, will Aice to the front, remaining doubled. The
fourth company will close successively by tile of fours
on the left file, and the fifth company, in like manner,
on the right file; the files will face to the front, re-
maining doubled. The formation completed, the chief
of division will command: Right dress. The junior
captain will place himself in the interval between the
two companies.

934. The other companies will close as prescribed
for the double column in two ranks, observing what
follows : each captain will halt the leading guide of
his company the moment the head of his company
arrives on a line with the centre of the column. In
the right companies, the left guide will step into the
line of file closers, and the left file of four men will
face immediately to the front, remaining doubled, and
by the side of the right guide of the left company.
The companies will each form into four ranks, as pre-
scribed. No. 926, the right companies on the left file,
and the left companies on the right file. The forma-
tion completed, the junior captain will place himself

School of the Battalion — Part V. 257

between the two companies, and the senior will com-
mand : Right — dress.

Column against cavalry,

965. When a column closed in mass has to form
square, it will begin by taking company distance ; but
if so suddenly threatened by cavalry as not to allow
time for this disposition, it will be formed in the fol-
lowing manner :

906. The colonel will command:

1. Column against cavalry. 2. March.

967. At the first command, the chief of the leading
division will caution it to stand fast *and pass behind
the rear rank ; in the interior divisions each captain
will promptly designate the number of tiles necessary
to close the interval between his company and the one
in front of it. The captains of the divisions next to
the one in rear, in addition to closing the interval in
front, will also close up the interval which separates
this division from the last ; the chief of the fourth
division will caution it to face about, and its file closers
will pass briskly before the front rank.

908. At the command march, the guides of each
division will place themselves rapidly in the line of tile
closers. The tirst division will stand fast, the fourth
will face about, the outer file of each of these divisions
will then face outwards ; in the other divisions the
files designated for closing the intervals will form to
the right and left into line, but in the division next to
the rearmost one, the first files that come into line will
close to the right or left until they join the rear divi-
sion. The files of each company which remain in
column will close on their outer files, formed into line,
in order to create a vacant space in the middle of the
column.

258 School of the BattaUon—V^ri V.

9G0. If the column be in march, the column against
caiHtliy will ho formed hy the sftme communilH and
mcuuH. At the ctminjind tnurch, tho first and fourth
divisidHM will halt and the latter divisinn will face
nhout ; the interior divisions will coniorm to what has
been prescribed above.

OTC The Ijattalion boinpj no longer threatened by
cavalry, the colonel will conunand :

1. Form column. 2. March.

971. At the command march, the files in column
will close to the left and ri;'ht to make room for those
in line who will retake tneir places in C(»lumn by
stepping backwards, except thoee closing the interval
between the two rear divisions, who will take their
places in cidumn by a flank movement. The fourth
division will face about, the guides will resume their
places.

972. If the colonel should be so pressed as not to
have time to order bayonets to be fixed, the men will
fix them, without command or signal, at the cautionary
command, column wjain-st cavuln/.

973. As this manoeuvre is often used in war, and
with decided advantage, the coK)nel will frecjuently
cause it to be executed in order to render it familiar.

Article Fifteenth.

The rally,

974. The battalion being in line of battle, the colonel
will sometimes cause the disperse to be sounded, at
which signal, the battali(jn will break and disperse.

975. When the colonel shall wish to rally the bat-
talion, he will cause to the color to be sounde<l, and at
the same time place two markers and the color-bearer
in the direction ho may wish to give the battalion.

School of the Battalion— FslH V. 259

976. Each captain will rally his company about six
paces in rear of the place it is to occupy in line of
battle.

977. The colonel will cause the color-company to be
promptly established against the markers, and each
company by the command of its captain will be aligned
on the color-company according to the principles here-
tofore prescribed.

978. When the colonel shall wish to rally the bat-
talion in column, he will cause the assemhhj to be
sounded, and place two markers before the position to

♦ be occupied by the first company ; the captain of this
company will rally his company in rear of tlie two
markers, and each of the other captains will rally his
company at platoon distance, behind the one which
should precede it in the order in column.

END OF SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION.

INSTRUCTION FOR SKIRMISHERS.

General principles and division of the instruction.

1. The movements of skirmishers should be subjected
to such rules as will give to the commander the means
of movinpr them in any direction with the greatest
promptitude.

2. It is not expected that these movements should
be executed with the same precision as in closed ranks,
nor is it desirable, as such exactness would materially
interfere with their prompt execution.

3. When skirmishers are thrown out to clear the
way for, and to protect the advance of, the main corps,
their movements should be so regulated by this corps,
as to keep it constantly covered.

4. Every body of skirmishers should have a reserve,
the strength and composition of which will vary ac-
cording to circumstances.

5. If the body thrown out be within sustaining dis-
tance of the main corps, a very small reserve will be
sufficient for each company, whose duty it shall be to
fill vacant places, furnish the line with cartridges,
relieve the fatigued, and serve as a rallying point for
the skirmishers,

C. If the main corps be at a considerable distance,
besides the company reserves, another reserve will be
required, composed of entire companies, which will be
employed to sustain and reinforce such parts of the
line as may be warmly attacked ; this reserve should
strong enough to relieve at least half the companies
deployed as skirmishers.

7. The r3serves should be placed behind the centre

Instruction for Skirmishers. 261

of the line of skirmivshers, the company reserves at
one hundred and fifty, and the principal reserve at
four hundred paces. This rule, however, is not inva-
riable. The reserves, while holdinj:^ themselves within
sustainina:; distance of the line, should be, as much as
possible, in a position to afford each other mutual pro-
tection, and must carefully profit by any accidents of
the ground to conceal themselves from the view of the
enemy, and to shelter themselves from his fire.

8. The movements of skirmishers will bo executed
in quick, or double quick time. The run will be
resorted to only in cases of urgent necessity.

9. Skirmishers will be permitted to carry their pieces
in the manner most convenient to them.

10. The movements will be habitually indicated by
the sounds of the bugle.

11. The officers, and, if necessary, the non-commis-
sioned officers, will repeat, and cause the commands to
be executed, as soon as they are given ; but to avoid
mistakes, when the signals are employed, they will
wait until the last bugle note is sounded before com-
mencing the movement.

12. When skirmishers are ordered to move rapidly,
the oflficers and non-commissioned officers will see that
the men economise their strength, keep cool and profit
by all the advantages which the ground may offer for
cover. It is only by this continual watchfulness on
the part of all grades, that a line of skirmishers can
attain success.

18. This instruction will be divided into five articles.

14. In the first four articles, it is supposed that the
movements are executed by a company deployed as
skirmishers, on a front equal to that of the battalion
in order of battle. In the fifth article, it is supposed
that each company of the battalion, being deployed as
skirmishers, occupies a front of one hundred paces.
From these two examples, rules may be deduced for
all cases, whatever may be the numerical strength of

Instruction for Skirmishers.

the skirmishers, and the extent of ground they ought
to occupy.

Article First.

Deployments.

15. A company may be deployed as skirmishers in
two ways : forward, and by the finnk.

IG. The deployment forward will be adopted when
the company is behind the line on which it is to be
established as skirmishers: it will be deployed by the
flank, when it finds itself already on that line.

17. Whenever a company is to be deployed as skir-
mishers, it will be divided into two platoons, and each
platoon will be subdivided into two sections; the com-
rades in battle, forming groups of four men, will bo
careful to know and to sustain each other. The cap-
tain will assure himself that the files in the centre of
each platoon and section are designated.

18. A company may be deployed as skirmishers on
its right, left, or centre file, or on any other named
file whatsoever. In this manner, skirmishers may bo
thrown forward with the greatest possible rapidity on
any ground they may be required to occupy.

19. A chain of skirmishers ought generally to pre-
serve their alignment, but no advantages which the
ground may present should be sacrificed to attain this
regularity.

20. The interval between skirmishers depends on
the extent of ground to be covered ; but in general, it
is not proper that groups of four men should be re-
moved more than forty paces from each other. The
habitual distance between men of the same group in
open grounds will be five paces ; in no case will they
lose sight of each other.

21. The front to be occupied to cover a battalion
comprehends its front and the half of each interval

Instruction for Skirmishers. 263

which separates it from the battalion on its right and
left. If a line, whose wings are not supported,
should be covered by skirmishers, it will be necessary
either to protect the flanks with skirmishers, or to ex-
tend them in front of the line so far beyond the wings
as effectually to oppose any attempt which might be
made by the enemy's skirmishers to disturb the flanks.

To deploy forward.

22. A company being at a halt or in march, when
the captain shall wish to deploy it forward on the left
file of the first platoon, holding the second platoon in
reserve, he will command :

1. First platoon — as skirmishers.

2. On the left file — take intervals.

3. March (or double quick — March).

23. At the first command, the second and third lieu-
tenants will place themselves rapidly two paces behind
the centres of the right and left sections of the first
platoon ; the fifth sergeant will move one pace in front
of the centre of the first platoon, and will place himself
between the two sections in the front rank as soon as
the movement begins; the fourth sergeant will place
himself on the the left of the front rank of the same
platoon, as soon as he can pass. The captain will indi-
cate to this sergeant the point on which he wishes him
to direct his march. The first lieutenant, placing liimself
before the centre of the second platoon, will command :

Second platoon backward — March.

24. At this command, the second platoon will step
three paces to the rear, so as to unmask the flank of
the first platoon. It will then be halted by its chief,
and the second sergeant will place himself on the left,

264 Instruction for S/cirmi^hers.

and tho third sergeant on tlie right flank of this
platoon.

25. At the command march, the left group of four
men, conducted by the fourth sergeant, will direct
iiself on the point indicated ; all tiie other groups of
fours throwing furward bri.>kly the left shoulder, will
move diagonally to the front in double quick time, so
as to gain to the right the space of twenty paces,
"which shall be the distance between each group and
that immediately on its left. "When the second group
from the left shall arrive on a line with, and twenty
paces from the first, it will march straight to the front,
conforming to the gait and direction of the first, keep-
ing constantly on the same alignment and at twenty
paces from it. The third group, and all the others,
conform to what has just been prescribed for the
second ; they will arrive successively on the line. The
right guide will arrive with the last group.

2G. The left guide having reached the point where
the left of the line should rest, the captain will com-
mand the skirmishers to halt ; the men composing
each group of fours will then immediately deploy at
five paces from each other, and to the right and left of
the front rank man of the even tile in each group, the
rear rank men placing themselves on the left of their
file leaders. If any groups be not in line at the com-
mand half, they will move up rapidly, conforming to
what has just been prescribed.

27. If, during the deployment, the line should be
fired ftpon by the enemy, the captain may cause the
groups of fours to deploy, as they gain their proper
distances.

28. The line being formed, the non-commissioned
oflBcors on the right, left and centre of the platoon
will place themselves ten paces in rear of the line, and
opposite the positions they respectively occupied. The
chiefs of sections will promptly rectify any irregular-
ities, and then place themselves twenty-tive or thirty

Instruction for Shirmisliers. 265

paces in rear of the centre of their sections, each
having with him four men taken from the reserve,
and also a bugler, -who will repeat, if necessary, the
signals sounded by the captain.

29. Skirmishers should be particularly instructed to
take advantage of any cover which the ground may
offer, and should lie flat on the ground whenever such
a movement is necessary to protect them from the fire
of the enemy. Kegularity in the alignment should
yield to this important advantage.

30. When the movement begins, the first lieutenant
will face the second platoon about, and march it
promptly, and by the shortest line, to about one hun-
dred and fifty paces in rear of the centre of the line.
He will hold it always at this distance, unless ordered
to the contisiry.

31. The reserve will conform itself to all the move-
ments of the line. Tins rule is general.

32. Light troops will carry their bayonets habitually
in the soal»bard, and this rule applies equally to the
skirmisliers and the reserve ; whenever bayonets are
required to be fixed, a particular signal will be given.
The captain will give a general superintendence to the
whole deployment, and then promptly place himself
about eijzhty |>aces in rear of the centre of the line.
He Avill have with him a bugler and four men taken
from the reserve.

33. The deployment may be made on the right or
the centre of the platoon, by the same commands,
substituting the indication right or centre for that of left
file.

34. The deployment on the right or the centre will
be made according to the principles prescribed above;
in this latter ca-^e. the centre of the platoon will be
marked by the right group of fours in the second eeo*
tion ; the filth sergeant will place himself on the right
of this group, and serve as the guide of the platoon,
during the «h'pl()ymenfc.

266 Instruction for Skirmishers.

35. In whatever manner the deployment be made,
on the ri^ht, left, or centre, the men in each group of
foars will always deploy at five paces from each other,
and upon the front rank man of the even numbered
file. The deployments will habitually be made at
twenty paces interval; but if a greater interval be re-
quired, it will be indicated in the command,

36. If a company be thrown out as skirmishers, so
near the main body as to render a reserve unnecessary,
the entire company will be extended in the same man-
ner, and according to the same principles, as for the
deployment of a platoon. In this case, the third lieu-
tenant will command the fourth section, and a non-
commissioned officer designated for that purpose, the
eecond section ; the fifth sergeant will act as centre
guide; the file closers will place themselves ten paces
m rear of the line, and opposite their places in line of
battle. The first and second lieutenant will each have
a bugler near him.

To deploy hy the Jiank.

37. The company being at a halt, when the captain
ehall wish to deploy it by the flank, holding the first
platoon in reserve, he will command:

1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. By the right flank —
take intervals. 3. M\Rca [or double quick — March).

38. At the first command, the first and third lieu-
tenants will place themselves, respectively, two paces
behind the centres of the first and second sections of
the second platoon ; the fifth sergeant will place him-
eelf one pac^ in front of the centre of the second pla-
toon ; the third sergeant, as soon as he can pass, will
place himself on the right of the front rank of the
same platoon. The captain will indicate to him the
point on which he wishes hira to direct his march.
The chief of the first platoon will execute what has

Instruction for Skirmishers. 267

been prescribed for the chief of the second platoon,
Nos. 23 and 24. The fourth sergeant will place him-
Belf on the left flank of the reserve, the first sergeant
•will remain on the right flank.

39. At the second command, the first and third lieu-
tenants will place themselves two paces behind the
left group of their respective sections.

40. At the command march, the second platoon will
face to the right, and commence the movement; the
left group of fours will stand fast, but will deploy as
soon as there is room on its right, conforming to what
has been prescribed, No. 26 ; the third sergeant will
place himself on the left of the right group, to con-
duct it; the second group will halt at twenty paces
from the one on its left, the third group at twenty paces
from the second, and so on to the right. As the groups
halt, they will face to the enemy, and deploy as has
been explained for the left group.

41. The chiefs of sections will pay particular atten-
tion to the successive deployments of the groups,
keeping near the group about to halt, so as to rectify
any errors which may be committed. When the de-
ployment is completed, they will place themselves
thirty paces in rear of the centre of their sections, as
has been heretofore prescribed. The non-commis-
sioned officers will also place themselves as previously
indicated.

42. As soon as the movement commences, the chief
of the first platoon, causing it to face about, will move
it as indicated No. 30.

43. The deployment may be made by the left flank
according to the same principles, substituting leftjlank
for right Jiank.

44. If the captain should wish to deploy the com-
pany upon the centre of one of the platoons, ho will
command :

1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. By the right and left
flanks — take intervals. 3. March (or double quick —
March).

268 Instruction for SJcirmuhers.

45. At the first command, the officers and non-com-
missioned officens will conform to what has been pre-
scribed, No. 3S.

46. At tlu' soonnd command, the first lientonant will
place himself behind the left group of the right section
of the second platoon, the third lieutenant behind the
right group of the left section of the same platoon.

47. At the command march, the right section will
face to the right, the left section will face to the left,
the group on the right of this latter section will stand
fast. The two sections will move off in opposite direc-
tions : the third sergeant will place himself on the left
of the right file to conduct it, the second sergeant on
the right of the left tile. The two groups nearest that
which stands fast, will each halt at twenty paces from
this group, and each of the other groups will halt at
twenty paces from the group which is in rear of it.
Each group will deploy as heretofore prescribed. No. 40.

48. The first and third lieutenants will direct the
movement, holding themselves always abreast of the
group which is about to halt.

49. Tiie captain can cause the deployment to be
made on any named group whatsoever; in this case,
the fifth sergeant will place himself before the group
indicated, and the deployment will bo made according
to the principles heretofore prescribed.

50. The entire company may be also deployed, ac-
cording to the same principles.

To extend intervals.

51. This movement, which is employed to extend a
line of skirmishers, will be executed according to the
principles prescribed for deployments.

52. If it be supposed that the line of skirmishers is
at a halt, and that the captain wishes to extend it to
the left, he will command:

1. By the If I Jl'ink (so many paces) extend intervals. 2.
Mauch (or double quick — March).

Instruction for Skirmishers. 269

53. At the command march, the group on the right
will stand fast, all the other groups will face to the
left, and each group will extend its interval to the pre-
scribed distance hy the means indicated No. 40.

54. The men of the same group will continue to
preserve between each other the distance of five pacee,
unless the nature of the ground should render it ne-
cessary that they should close nearer, in order to keep
in sight of each other. The intervals refer to the
spaces between the groups, and not to the distances
between the men in each group. The intervals will
be taken from the right or left man of the neighboring
group.

55. If the line of skirmishers be marching to the
front, and the captain should wish to extend it to the
right, he will command :

1. On the left group (so many paces) extend intervals. 2.
March (or double quick — March).

5G. The left group, conducted by the guide, will
continue to march on the point of direction ; the other
groups throwing forward the left shoulder, and taking
the double quick step, will open their intervals to the
prescribed distance, by the means indicated No. 25,
conforming also to what is prescribed No. 54.

57. Intervals may be extended on the centre of the
line, according to the same principles.

58. If in extending intervals, it be intended that
one company or platoon should occupy a line which
had been previously occupied by two, the men of the
company or platoon which is to retire, will fall succee-
sively to the rear as they are relieved by the extension
of the intervals.

To close intervals.

59. This movement, like that of opening intervals,
will be executed according to the principles prescribed
for the deployments.

270 Instruction for Skirmishers.

60. If tlic line of skirmishers be halted, and the cap-
tain Rhould wish to close intervals to the left, he will
command:

1. By the left flank (so many pacts) close intervals. 2.
March (or double quick— "SI \ViC\i).

01. At the command march, the left ^roup -will
stand fast, the other groups will face to the left and
close to the prescribed distance, each group facing to
the enemy as it attains its proper distance.

62. If the line be marching to the front, the captain
will command :

1. On the left group [so many paces) close intervals. 2.
March (or double quick — March).

63. The left group, conducted by the guide, will
continue to move on in the direction previously indi-
cated ; the other groups, advancing the right shoulder,
will close to the left, until the intervals are reduced to
the prescribed distance.

64. Intervals may be closed on the right, or on the
centre, according to the same principles.

65. When intervals are to be closed up, in order to
reinforce a line of skirmishers, so as to cause two
companies to cover the ground which had been previ-
ously occupied by one, the new company will deploy
80 as to finish its movement at twenty paces in rear of
the line it is to occupy, and the men will successively
move upon that line, as they shall be unmasked by
the men of the old company. The reserves of the
two companies will unite behind the centre of the
line.

To relieve a company deployed as sicirmishei's.

66. When a company of skirmishers is to be re-
lieved, the captain will be advised of the intention.

Instruction for Skirmishers. 271

which he will immediately communicate to his first
and second lieutenants.

67. The new company will execute its deployment
forward, so as to finish the movement at about twenty
paces in rear of the line.

68. Arrived at this distance, the men of the new
company, by command of their captain, will advance
rapidly a few paces beyond the old line and halt; the
new line being established, the old company will as-
semble on its reserve, taking care not to get into groups
of fours until they are beyond the fire of the enemy.

69. If the skirmishers to be relieved are marching
in retreat, the company thrown out to relieve them
will deploy by the flank, as prescribed No. 38 and fol-
lowing. The old skirmishers will continue to retire
with order, and having passed the new line, they will
form upon the reserve.

Article Second.

To advance.

To advance in line, and to retreat in line.

70. "When a platoon or a company deployed as skir-
mishers is marching by the front, the guide will be
habitually in the centre. No particular indication to
this effect need be given in the commands, but if on
the contrary it be intended that the directing guide
should be on the right or left, the command guide
right, or guide left, will be given immediately after
that of forward.

71. The captain, wishing the line of skirmishers to
advance, will command :

1. Forward. 2. March (or double g-uic^— March.)

72. This command will be repeated with the great-

272 Instruction for Skirmishers.

est rapidity by the chiefs of sections, and in case of
need, l)y the serpjoants. This rule is p;eneral. Avliether
the skirini.-hers march l)y the front or by the flank.

73. At the lirst command, three seri^eants will
move briskly on the line, the first on the right, the
second on the left, and the third in the centre.

74. At the command march, the line will move to
the front, the guide charged with the direction will
move on the point indicated to him, the skirmishers
will hold themselves aligned on this guide, and pre-
serve their intervals towards him.

75. The chiefs of sections will march immediately
behind their sections, so as to direct their movements.

70. The captain will give a general superintendence
to the movement.

77. "When he shall wish to halt the skirmishers, he
will command :

Halt.

78. At this command, briskly repeated, the line will
halt. The chiefs of sections will promptly rectify any
irregularity in the alignment and intervals, and after
taking every possible advantage which the ground
may offer for protecting the men, the}', with the three
sergeants in the line, will retire to their proper places
in rear.

79. The captain, wishing to march the skirmishers
in retreat, will command :

1. In retreat. 2. Marcu (or double quick — March).

80. At the first command, the three sergeants will
move on the line as prescribed No. 73.

81. At the command march, the skirmishers will
face about individually, and march to the rear, con-
furniing to tlie principles prescribed No. 74.

82. The officers and sergeants will use every exer-
tion to preserve order.

Instruction for Shirmiahers. 273

83. To halt the skirmishers, marching in retreat,
the captain will command :

Halt.

84. At this command the skirmishers will halt, and
immediately face to the front.

85. The chiefs of sections and the three guides will
each conform himself to what is prescribed No. 78.

To change direction.

86. If the commander of a line of skirmishers shall
wish to cause it to change direction to the right, he
will command :

1. Right wheel. 2. March (or double quick — March).

87. At the command march, the right guide will
mark time in his place ; the left guide will move in a
circle to tlie right, and that he may properly regulate
his movements, will occasionally cast his eyes to the
right, so as to observe the direction of the line, and
the nature of the ground to be passed over. The cen-
tre guide will also march in a circle to the right, and
in order to conform his movements to the general di-
rection, will take care that his steps are only half the
length of the steps of the guide on the left.

88. The skirmishers will regulate the length of
their steps by their distance from the marching flank,
being less as they approach the pivot, and greater as
they are removed from it ; they will often look to the
marching flank, so as to preserve the direction and
their intervals.

89. "When the commander of the line shall wish to
resume the direct march, he will command:

1. Forward. 2. March.

90. At the command march, the line will cease to

274 Instruction for Skirmishers.

"wheel, and the skirmishors will move direct to the
front; the centre guide will march on the point which
will be indicated to him.

91. If the captain should wish to halt the line, in
place of moving it to the front, he will command :

Halt.

92. At this command, the line will halt.

93. A change of direction to the left will be made
according to the same principles, and by inverse
means.

94. A line of skirmishers marching in retreat, will
change direction by the same means, and by the same
commands, as a line marching in advance; for exam-
ple, if the captain should wish to refuse his left, now
become the right, he will command: 1. Lejt wheel.
2. March. At the command halt^ the skirmishers will
face to the enemy.

95. But if, instead of halting the line, the captain
should wish to continue to march it in retreat, he will,
when he judges the line has wheeled sufficiently, com-
mand :

1. In retreat. 2. Makch.

To march hy the Jlank.

96. The captain, wishing the skirmishers to march
by the right flank, will command :

1. By the right flank.
2. March (or double quick — March).

97. At the first command, the three sergeants will
place themslves on the line.

98. At the command march, the skirmishers will
face to the right and move off; the right guide will
place himself by the side of the leading man on the

Instruction for Skirmishers. 275

right to conduct him, and will march on the point in-
dicated ; each skirmisher will take care to follow ex-
actly in the direction of the one immediately preceding
him, and to preserve his distance.

99. The skirmishers may be marched by the left
flank, according to the same principles, and by the
same commands, substituting left for right; the left
guide will place himself by the side of the leading
man to conduct him.

100. If the skirmishers be marching by the flank,
and the captain should wish to halt them, he will
command:

Halt.

101. At this command, the skirmishers will halt
and face to the enemy. The officers and sergeants
will conform to what has been prescribed, No. 78.

102. The reserve should execute all the movements
of the line, and be held always about one hundred
and fifty paces from it, so as to be in the position to
second its operations.

103. When the chief of the reserve shall wish to
march it in advance, he will command : 1. Platoon

forioard ; 2. Guide left; 3. March. If he should
wish to march it in retreat, he will command.: 1. /n
retreat; 2, March; 3. Guide right. At the command
halt, it will re-fiice to the enemy.

104. The men should be made to understand that
the signals or commands, such a^ foricard, mean that
the skirmishers shall march on the enemy ; in retreat^
that they shall retire, and to the right or left fank,
that the men must face to the right or left, whatever
may be their position.

105. If the skirmishers be marching by the flank,
and the captain should wish to change direction to the
right (or left), he will command : 1. By file right (or
left); 2. March. These movements will also be exe-
cuted by the signals, Nos. 14 and 15.

276 Instruction for Skirmishers.

Article Third.
The firings.

106. Skirmishers will fire either at a halt or march-
ing.

To fire at a halt.

107. To cause this fire to be executed, the captain
"will command :

Commence — Firing.

108. At this command, briskly repeated, the men of
the front rank will commence firinn; ; they will reload
rapidly and hold themselves in readiness to fire again.
During this time the men of the rear rank will come
to a ready, and as soon as their respective file-leaders
have loaded, they will also fire and reh)ad. The men
of each file will thus continue the firing, conforming
to this principle, that the one or the other shall always
have his piece loaded.

109. Light troops should be always calm, so as to
aim with accuracy ; they should, moreover, endeavor
to estimate correctly the distances between themselves
and the enemy to be hit, and thus be enabled to de-
liver their fire with the greater certainty of success.

110. Skirmishers will not remain in the same place
whilst reloading, unless protected by accidents in the
ground.

To fire marching.

111. This fire will be executed by the same com-
mands as the fire at a halt.

112. At the command commence firing, if the line
be advancing, the front rank man of every file will
halt, fire, and reload before throwing himself forward.

Instruction for Shii-mishers. 277

The rear rank man of the same file will continue to
march, an;! after passinj^ ten or twelve paces beyond
his front rank man, will halt, come to a ready, select
his object, and tire when his front rank man has
loaded ; the fire will thus continue to be executed by
each tile ; the skirmishers will keep united, and en-
deavor, as much as possible, to preserve the general
direction of the alij^nment.

113. If the line be marching in retreat, at the com-
mand commence firing, the front rank man of every
file will halt, fjice to the enemy, fire, and then re-load
whilst moving to the rear; the rear lank man of the
eamc file will continue to march, and halt ten or
twelve paces beyond his front rank man, face about,
come to a ready, and fire, when his front rank man
has passed him in retreat and loaded ; after which, he
will move to the rear and reload ; the front rank man
in his turn, after marching briskly to the rear, will
halt at ten or twelve paces from the rear rank, face to
the enemy, load his piece and fire, conforming to what
has just been prescribed ; the firing will thus be con-
tinued.

114. If the company be marching by the right flank,
at the command, commence firing, the front rank man
of every file will face <o the enemy, step one pace for-
ward, halt, and fire ; the rear rank man will continue
to move forward. As soon as the front rank man has
fired, he will place himself briskly behind his rear
rank man and reload whilst marching. When he has
loaded, the rear rank man v>\\\, in his turn, step one
pace forward, halt, and fire, and returning to the ranks,
will place himself behind his front rank man ; the
latter, in his turn, will act in the same manner, observ-
ing the same principles. At the command, cease firing,
the men of the rear rank will retake their original
positions, if not already there.

115. If the company be marching by the left flank,
the fire will be executed according to the same princi-

278 Instruction for Skirmiahers.

plea, hut in this case, it will be the rear rank men who
will fire Hist.

116. The following rules will be observed in the
cases to which they apply.

117. If the line be firing at a halt, or whilst march-
ing Ity the flank, at the command, Forioard — March,
it will be the men whose pieces are loaded, without
regard to the particular rank to which they belong,
who will move to the front. Those men whose pieces
have V)Pen discharged, will remain in their ])lace8 to
load them before moving forward, and the firing will
be continued agreeably to the principles prescribed,
No. 112.

118. If the line be firing either at a halt, advancing,
or whilst marching by the flank, at the command, In
retreat — March, the men whose pieces are loaded will
remain iaced to the enemy, and will tire in this posi-
tion ; the men whose pieces are discharged will retreat
loading them, and the fire will be continued agreeably
to the principles prescribed No. 113.

119. If the line of skirmishers be firing either at a
halt, advancing, or in retreat, at the command, Bi/ the
ri(jht (or left) flank — Marcu, the men whose pieces
are Inaded will step one pace out of the general align-
ment, face to the enemy, and fire in this position ; the
men whose pieces are unloaded will face to the right
(or left) and march in the direction indicated. The
men who stepped out of the ranks will place them-
selves, immediately after firin};, upon the general
direction, and in rear of their front or rear rank men,
as the ca^e may be. The fire will be continued accord-
ing to the principles prescribed N<t. 114.

120. Skirmishers will be hnbituated to load their
pieces whilst marching; but they will be enjoined to
halt always an instant, when in the act of charging
cartridge, and priming.

121. They should be practised to fire and load kneel-
ing, lying down, and sitting, and much liberty should

Instruction for Skirmishers. 279

be allowed in these exercises, in order that they may
be executed in the manner found to be most convenient.
Skirmishers should be cautioned not to forget that, in
whatever position they may load, it is important that
the piece should be placed upright before ramming, in
order that the entire charge of powder may reach the
bottom of the bore.

122. In commencing the fire, the men of the same
rank should not all fire at once, and the men of the
same file should be particular that one or the other of
them be always loaded.

123. In retreating, the officer commanding the skir-
mishers should seize on every advantage which the
ground may present, for arresting the enemy as long
as possible.

124. At the signal to cease Jiring, the captain will
Bee that the order is promptly obeyed ; but the men
who may not be loaded, will load. If the line be
marching, it will continue the movement; but the man
of each file who happens to he in front, will wait until
the man in rear shall be abreast with him.

125. If a line of skirmishers be firing advancing, at
the comirand halt, the line will re-form upon the skir-
mishers who are in front ; when the line is retreating,
upon the skirmishers who are in rear.

126. Officers should watch with the greatest possible
vigilance over a line of skirmishers ; in battle, they
should neither carry a rifle or fowling piece. In all
the firings, they, as well as the sergeants, should see
that order and silence are preserved, and that the
skirmishers do not wander imprudently ; they should
especially caution them to be calm and collected ; not
to fire until they distinctly perceive the objects at
which they aim, and are sure that those objects are
within proper range. Skirmishers should take advan-
tage promptly, and with intelligence, of all shelter, and
of all accidents of the ground, to conceal thenjselves
from the view of the enemy, and to protect themselvea

280 Instruction for JS/iU'mishcrs.

from his firo. It may often happen, tliat intervals are
momentarily lost when several men near each other
find a cimimon shelter; but when they quit this posi-
tion, they sIkkiIcI immediately resume their intervals
and their places in line, so that they may not, by
crowd inf!;, needlessly expose themselves to the fire of
the enemy.

Article Fourth. *

tue rally.
To form column.

127. A company deployed as skirmishers, is rallied
in order to oppose the enemy with better success ; the
rallies are made at a run, and with bayonets fixed ;
when ordered to rally, the skirmishers fix bayonets
without command.

12.S. There are several ways of rallyinor. which the
chief of the line will adopt according to circumstances.

129. If the line, marching or at a halt, be merely
disturbed V)y scattered horsemen, it will not be neces-
sary to fall back on the reserve, but the captain will
cause bayonets to be fixed. If the horsemen should,
however, advance to charge the skirmishers, the cap-
tain will command, ralli/ by Jours. The line will halt
if marching, and the four men of each group will
execute thi^ rally in the following manner: the front
rank man of the even numbered file will take the posi-
tion of guard against cavalry ; the rear rank man of
the odd numbered file will also take the position of
guard against cavalry, turning his back to him, his
right fo(jt thirteen inches from the right foot of the
former, and parallel to it; the front rank man of the
odd file, and the rear rank man of the even file, will
also place themselves back to back, taking a like posi-

Instruction for Shirmisliers. 281

tion, and between the two men already established,
facing ti) the right and left ; the right feet of the four
men will be brought together, forming a square, and
serving for mutual support. The fuur men in each
group will come to a ready, fire as occasion may offer,
and load without moving their feet.

130. The captain and chiefs of sections will each
cause the four men who constitute his guard to form
square, the men separating so as to enable him and
the bugler to place themselves in the centre. The
three sergeants will each promptly phice himself in
the group nearest him in the line of skirmishers.

131. Whenever the captain shall judge these squares
too weak, but should wish to hold his position by
strengthening his line, he will command :

Rally by sections.

132. At this command, the chiefs of sections will
move rapidly on the centre group of their respective
sections, or on any other interior group whose position
might offer a shelter, or other particular advantage ;
the skirmishers will collect rapidly at a run on this
group, and without distinction of numbers. The men
composing the group on which the formation is made,
will immediately form square, as heretofore explained,
and elevate their pieces, the bayonets uppermost, in
order to indicate the point on which the rally is to be
made. The other skirmishers, as they arrive, will oc-
cupy and fill the open angular spaces between these four
men, and successively rally around this first nucleus,
and in such manner as to form rapidly a compact circle.
The skirmishers will take as they arrive, the position
of charge bayonet, the point of the bayoriet more ele-
vated, and will cock their pieces in this position. The
movement concluded, the two exterior ranks will fire
as occasion may offer, and load without moving their
feet.

282 ' Instruction for Skirmishers.

133. The captain will move rapidly with his guard
wherever he may judge his presence most necessary.

134. The officers and sergeants will be particular to
observe that the rally is made in silence, and with
promptitude and order; that some pieces in each of
their subdivisions be at all times loaded, and that the
fire is directed on those points only where it will be
most effective.

135. If the reserve should be threatened, it will
form into a circle around its chief.

136. If the captain, cr commander of a line of skir-
mishers formed of many platoons should judge that
the rally by sections does not offer sufficient resistance,
he will cause the rally by platoons to be executed, and
for this purpose, will command :

Rally by platoons.

137. This movement will be executed according to
the same principles, and by the same means as the
rally by sections. The chiefs of platoon will conform
to what has been prescribed for the chiefs of section.

138. The captain wishing to rally the skirmishers
on the reserve, will command :

Rally on the reserve.

139. At tliis command, the captain will move briskly
on the reserve ; the officer who commands it will take
immediate steps to form square ; for this purpose, he
will cause the half sections on the flanks to be thrown
perpendicularly to the rear; he will order the men to
come to a ready.

140. The skirmishers of each section, taking the
run, will form rapidly into groups, and upon that
man of each group who is nearest the centre of the
section. These groups will direct themselves diago-
nally towards each other, and in such manner as to

Instruction for Skirmishers. 283

form into sections with the greatest possible rapidity
while moving to the rear; the oflScers and sergeants,
will see that this formation is made in proper order,
and the chiefs will direct their sections upon the re-
serve, taking care to unmask it to the right and left.
As the skirmishers arrive, they will continue and com-
plete the formation of the square begun by the re-
serve, closing in rapidly upon the latter, without
regard to their places in line ; they will come to a
ready without command, and fire upon the enemy;
which will also be done by the reserve as soon as it is
unmasked by the skirmishers.

141. If a section should be closely pressed by cav-
alry while retreating, its chief will command halt;
at this command, the men will form rapidly into a
compact circle around the officer, who will re-form his
section and resume the march, the moment he can do
so with safety.

142. The formation of the square in a prompt and
efficient manner requires coolness and activity on the
part of both officers and sergeants.

143. The captain will also profit by every moment
of respite which the enemy's cavalry may leave him ;
as soon as he can, he will endeavor to place himself
beyond the reach of their charges, either by gaining a
position where he may defend himself with advan-
tage, or by returning to the corps to which he belongs.
For this purpose, being in square, he will cause the
company to break into column by platoons at half
distance ; to this effect, he will command ;

1. Form column. 2. March.

144. At the command march, each platoon will
dress on its centre, and the platoon which was facing
to the rear will face about without command. The
guides will place themselves on the right and left of
their respective platoons ; those of the second platoon

284 Instruction /or S/Lirmishers.

will place themselves at half distance from those of
the first, countin;^ from the rear rank. These dispo-
eitiiins bein;]; made, the CHptain can move the column
in whatever direction he may judge proper.

145. If he wishes to march it in retreat, he will
command:

1. In retreat. 2. March (ot double quick — March.)

146. At the command march, the column will im-
mediately face by the rear rank, and move off in the
opposite direction. As soon as the columa is in mo-
tion, the captain will command :

3. Guide right (or left.)

147. lie will indicate the direction to the leading
guide; the guides will march at their proper dis-
tances, and the men will keep aligned.

148. If again threatened by cavalry, the captain
will command :

1. Form square. 2. March.

140. At the command march, the column will halt;
the first platoon will face about briskly, and the outer
half sections of each platoon will bo thrown perpen-
dicularly to the rear, so as to form the second and
third fronts of the square. The officers and sergeants
will promptly rectify any irregularties which may be
committed.

150. If he should wish to march the column in ad-
vance, the captain will command:

1. Form column. 2. March.

151. Which will be executed as prescribed. No.
144.

Instruction for Skirmishers. 285

152. The column being formed, the captain will
command :

1. Forward. 2. Mabch (or douhle quick — March).
3. Guide left (or right).

153. At the second command, the column will move
forward, and at the third command, the men will take
the touch of elbows to the side of the guide.

154. If the captain should wish the column to gain
ground to the right or left, he will do so by rapid
wheels to the side opposite the guide, and for this pur-
pose, will change the guide whenever it may be neces-
sary.

155. If a company be in column by platoon, at half
distance, right in front, the captain can deploy the
first platoon as skirmishers by the means already
explained ; but if it should be his wish to deploy the
second platoon forward on the centre file, leaving the
first platoon in reserve, he will command :

1. Second platoon — as skirmishers. 2. On the centre file —
take intervals. 3. March (or double quick — March).

156. At the first command, the chief of the first
plato(m will caution his platoon to stand fast ; the
chiefs of sections of the second platoon will place
themselves before the centre of their sections ; the
fifth sergeant will place himself one pace in front of
the centre of the second platoon.

157. At the second command, the chief of the right
section, second platoon, will command : Section right
face; the chief of the left section: Section left face.

158. At the command march, these sections will
move off briskly in opposite directions, and having
unmasked the first platoon, the chiefs of sections will
respectively command: By the left fank — March,
and By the right jlank — March ; and as soon as these
sections arrive on the alignment of the first platoon,

286 Instruction for Skirmishers.

they will command, As skirmishers — MARcn. The
groups will then deploy acoDrdinj^ to prescribod prin-
ciples, (in the rij^ht p;roup uf the left section, which will
1)0 diroctod by the filth sergeant on the point indicated.

ir)0. If the captain should wish the deploynient
made by the Hank, the second platoon will be moved
to the front by the means above Htated, and halted
after passing some steps beyond the alignment of the
first platoon ; the deployment will then be made by
the flank, according to the principles prescribed.

IGO. When one or more platoons are deployed as
skirmishers, and the captain should wish to rally them
on the battalion, he will command :

Rally on the battalion.

161. At this command, the skirmishers and the re-
serve, no matter what position the company to which
they belong may occupy in order of battle, will ra-
pidly unmask the front of the battalion, directing
themselves in a run towards its nearest flank, and
then form in its rear.

1G2, As soon as the skirmishers have passed beyond
the line of file-closers, the men will take the quick
step, and the chief of each platoon or section will re-
form his subdivision, and place it in column behind
the wing on which it is rallied, and at ten paces from
the rank of file-closers. These subdivisions will not be
moved except l)y order of the commander of the bat-
talion, who may, if he thinks proper, throw them into
line of battle at the extremities of the line, or in the
intervals between the battalions.

163. If many platoons should be united behind the
same wing of a battalion, or behind any shelter what-
Boever, they should bo formed always into close
column, or into column at half distance.

1G4. When Ihe battalion, covered by a company of
ekirmishers, shall be formed into square, the platoons

Instruction for Skirmishers. 287

and pections of the covering company will be directed
by their chiefs to the rear of the square, which will
be opened at the angles to receive the skirmishers,
who will be then formed into close column by platoons
in rear of the first front of the square.

165. If circumstances should prevent the angles of
the square from being opened, the skirmishers will
throw themselves at the feet of the front rank men,
the right knee on the ground, the butt of the piece
resting on the thigh, the bayonet in a threatening po-
sition, A part may also place themselves about the
angles, where they can render good service by defend-
ing the sectors without fire.

16G If the battalion on which the skirmishers are
rallied be in column ready to form square, the skir-
mishers will be formed into close column by platoon,
in rear of the centre of the third division, and at the
command. Form square — March, they will move for-
ward and close on the buglers.

107. When skirmishers have been rallied by pla-
toon or section behind the wings of a battalion, and it
be wished to deploy them again to the front, they will
be marched by the flank towards the intervals on the
wings, and be then deployed so as to cover the front
of the battalion.

168. When platoons or sections, placed in the inte-
rior of squares or columns, are to be deployed, they
will be marched out by the flanks, and then thrown
forward, as is prescribed. No. l-VJ -, as soon as they
shall have unmasked the column or square, they will
be deployed, the one on the right, the other on the left
file.

The assembly.

169. A company deployed as skirmishers will be
assembled when there is no h)nger danger of its being
disturbed ; the assembly will be made habitually ia
quick time.

288 Instruction for Skirmishers.

170. Tho captain wishing to assemble the skirmish-
ers on the reserve, will command :

Assemble on the reserve.

171. At this command, the skirmishers will assem-
ble by groups of fours ; the front rank men will place
themselves behind their rear rank men ; and each
group of fours will direct itself on the reserve, where
each will take its proper place in the ranks. Wheo
the company is re-formed, it will rejoin the battalion
to which it belongs.

172. It may be also proper to assemble the skir-
mishers on the centre, or on the right or left of the
line, either marching or at a halt.

173. If the captain should wish to assemble them
on the centre while marching, he will command:

Assemble on the centre.

174. At this command, the centre guide will con-
tinue to march directly to the front on the point indi-
cated ; the front rank man of the directing tile will
follow the guide, and be covered by his rear rank man ;
the other two comrades of this group, and likewise
those on their left, will march diagonally, advancing
the left shoulder and accelerating the gait, so as to re-
form the groups while drawing nearer and nearer the
directing tile ; the men of the right section will unite
in the same manner into groups, and then upon the
directing tile, throwing forward the right shoulder.
As they successively unite on the centre, the men will
bring their pieces to the right shoulder.

175. To assemble on the right or left file (vill be ex-
ecuted according to the same principles.

176. The assembly of a line marching in retreat
will also be executed according to tho same principles,
the front rank men marching behind their rear rank
men.

Instruction for Skirmishers. 289

177. To assemble the line of skirmishers at a halt,
and on the line they occupy, the captain will give the
same commands ; the skirmishers will face to the right
or left, according as they should march by the right or
left flank, re-form the groups while marching, and
thus arrive on the file which served as the paint of
formation. As they successively arrive, the skirmish-
ers will support arms.

Article Fifth.

To deploy a battalion as skirmishers^ and to rally
this battalion.

To deploy the battalion as skirmishers.

178. A battalion being in line of battle, if the com-
mander should wish to deploy it on the right of the
sixth company, holding the three right companies in
reserve, he will signify his intention to the lieutenant
colonel and adjutant, and also to the major, who will
be directed to take charge of the reserve. He will
point out to the lieutenant colonel the direction he
wishes to give the line, as well as the point where he
wishes the right of the sixth company to rest, and to
the commander of the reserve the place he may wish
it established.

179. The lieutenant colonel will move rapidly ia
front of the right of the sixth company, and the adju-
tant in front of the left of the same company. The
commander of the reserve will dispose of it in the
manner to be hereinafter indicated.

180. The colonel will command :

1. First {or second) platoons — as skirmishers.

2. On the right of the sixth company — take intervals.

3. March (or double quick — Maech).

290 Instruction for Skirmishers.

181. At the second command, the captains of the
fifth and sixth companies will prepare to deploy the
first platoons of their respective companies, the sixth
on its rip;ht, the fifth on its left file.

182. The captain of the fourth company will face it
to the right, and the captains of the seventh and
eighth companies will face their respective companies
to the left.

183. At the command march, the movement will
commence. The platoons of the fifth and sixth com-
panies will deploy forward ; the right guide of the
sixth will march on the point which will be indicated
to him by the lieutenant colonel.

184. The company which has faced to the right, and
abo the companies which have faced to the left, will
march straight forward. The fourth company will
take an interval of one hundred paces counting from
the left of the fifth, and its chief will deploy its first
platoon on its left file. The seventh and eighth com-
panies will each take an interval of one hundred paces,
counting from the first file of the company, which
is immediately on its right; and the chiefs of these
companies will afterwards deploy their first platoons
on the right file.

185. The guides who conduct the files on which the
deployment is made, should be careful to direct them-
selves towards the outer man of the neighboring com-
pany, already deployed as skirmishers ; or if the
company has not finished its deployment, they will
judge carefully the distance which may still be re-
quired to place all these files in line, and will then
march on the point thus marked out. The compa-
nies, as they arrive on the line, will align themselves
on those already deployed.

186. The lieutenant colonel and adjutant will follow
the deployment, the one on the right, the other on the
left; the movement concluded, they will place ihem-
eelves near the colonel.

Instruction for Skirmishers. 291

187. The reserves of the companies will be estab-
lished in echellon in the following manner: there-
serve of the sixth company will be placed one hundred
and fifty paces in rear of the right of this company ;
the reserves of the fourth and fifth companies, united,
opposite the centre of their line of skirmishers, and
thirty paces in advance of the reserve of the sixth
company ; the reserves of the seventh and eighth
companies, also united, opposite the centre of their
line of skirmishers, and thirty paces farther to the
rear than the reserve of the sixth company.

188. The major commanding the companies com-
posing the reserve, on receiving an order from the
colonel to that efiect, will march these companies
thirty paces to the rear, and will then ploy them into
column by company, at half distance ; after which, he
will conduct the column to the point which shall have
been indicated to him.

189. The colonel will have a general superintend-
ence of the movement ; and when it is finished, will
move to a point in rear of the line, whence his view
may best embrace all the parts, in order to direct their
movements.

190. If, instead of deploying forward, it be desired
to deploy by the flank, the sixth and fifth companies
will be moved to the front ten or twelve paces, halted,
and deployed by the flank, the one on the right, the
other on the left file, by the means already indicated.
Each of the other companies will be marched by the
flank; and as soon as the last file of the company,
next towards the direction, shall have taken its inter-
val, it will be moved upon the line established by the
fifth and sixth companies, halted, and deployed.

191. In the preceding example, it has been supposed
that the battalion was in order of battle; but if in
column, it would be deployed as skirmishers by the
same commands and according to the same principles.

192. If the deployment is to be made forward^ the

292 Instruction for Skirmishers.

directing company, as soon as it is unmasked, will "be
moved ten or twelve paces in front of the head of the
column, and will be then deployed on the file indica-
ted. Each of the other companies will take its inter-
val to the right or left, and deploy as soon as it is
taken.

193. If the deployment is to be made by the flank,
the directing company will be moved in the same
manner to the front, as soon as it is unmasked, and
will then be halted and deployed by the flank on the
file indicated. Each of the other companies will be
marched by the flank, and when its interval is taken,
will be moved on the line, halted and deployed as soon
as the company next towards the direction shall have
finished its deployment.

194. It has been prescribed to place the reserves in
echellon, in order that they may, in the event of a
rally, be able to protect themselves without injuring
each other ; and the reserves of two contiguous com-
panies have been united, in order to diminish the
number of the echellons, and to increase their capacity
for resisting cavalry.

195. The echellons, in the example given, descend
from right to left, but they may, on an indication from
the colonel to that effect, be posted on the same prin-
ciple, so as to descend from left to right.

196. When the color-company is to be deployed as
skirmishers, the color, without its guard, will be de-
tached, and remain with the battalion reserve.

The rally,

197. The colonel may cause all the various move-
ments prescribed for a company, to be executed by the
battalion, and by the same commands and the same
signals. When he wishes to rally the battalion, he
will cause the rally on the battalion to be sounded,

Instruction for Skirmishers. 293

and will so dispose his reserve as to protect this move-
ment.

198. The companies deployed as skirmishers will
be rallied in squares on their respective reserves;
each reserve of two contiguous companies will form
the first front of the square, throwino; to the rear the
sections on the flanks ; the skirmishers who arrive
first will complete the lateral fronts, and the last the
fourth front. The officers and sergeants will superin-
tend the rally, and as fast as the men arrive, they will
form them into two ranks, without regard to height,
and cause them to face outwards.

199. The rally being effected, the commanders of
squares will profit by any interval of time the cavalry
may allow for putting them in safety, either by march-
ing upon the battalion reserve, or by seizing an ad-
vantageous position ; to this end, each of the squares
will be formed into column, and march in this order;
and if threatened anew, it will halt, and again form
itself into square.

200. As the companies successively arrive near the
battalion reserve, each will re-form as promptly as
possible, and without regard to designation or num-
ber, take place in the column next in rear of the com-
panies already in it.

201. The battalion-reserve will also form square, if
itself threatened by cavalry. In this case, the com-
panies marching towards it will place themselves
promptly in the sector's without fire, and thus march
on the squares.

ARTICLE XII.*

HONORS PAID BY THE TROOPS— INSPEC-
TIONS—REVIEWS. Etc.

Honors to he paid hy the troops.

730. Whenever a person entitled to compliments
from the troops, visits any tamp or military post, and
the commanding officer has official notice of his pre-
sence, the troops are paraded to salute him.

The President or Vice-President of the Confederate
States, and the Governor of the State to which the
troops belong, are to be saluted with the highest hon-
ors— all standards and colors drooping, officers and
troops saluting, drums beating and trumpets sounding.

A General commanding-in-chief is to be received—
by cavalry, with sabres presented, trumpets sounding
the march, and all the officers saluting, standards
dropping ; by infantry, with drums beating the march,
colors dropping, officers saluting and arms presented.

A Major-General is to be received — by cavalry, with
Babres presented, trumpets sounding twice the trum-
pet-flourish, and officers saluting ; by infantry, with
three ruffles, colors dropping, officers saluting, and
arms presented.

A Brigadier-General is to be received — by cavalry,
with sabres presented, trumpets sounding once the
trumpet-flourish, and officers saluting ; by infantry,
with two ruffles, colors dropping, officers saluting, and
arms presented.

♦Gilham's Manual.

Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc. 295

An Adjutant-General or Inspector General, if un-
der the rank of a general officer, is to be received at a
review or inspection of the troops under arms — by
cavalry, w^ith sabres presented, ofl&cers saluting ; by
infantry, officers saluting and arms presented. The
same honors to be paid to any JBeld officer authorized to
review and inspect the troops. When the inspecting
officer is junior to the officer commanding the parade,
no compliments will be paid: he will be received only
with swords drawn and arms shouldered.

All guards are to turn out and present arms to gen-
eral officers as often as they pass them, except the per-
sonal guards of general officers, which turn out only
to the generals whose guards they are, and to officers
of superior rank.

To commanders of regiments, garrison or camp,
their own guard turn out, and present arms once a
day ; after which they turn out with shouldered arms.

To the members of the Cabinet ; to the Chief Jus-
tice, the President of the Senate, and Speaker of the
House of Representatives of the Confederate States ;
and to Governors within their respective States and
Territories, the same honors will be paid as to a gene-
ral commanding-in-chief.

Officers of a foreign service may be complimented
with the honors due to their rank.

Confederate and foreign Envoys or Ministers will
be received with the compliments due to a major-
general.

731. The colors of a regiment passing a guard are
to be saluted, the trumpets sounding, and the drums
beating a march.

When general officers, or persons entitled to salute,
pass in the rear of a guard, the officer is only to make
his men stand shouldered, and not to face his guard
about, or beat his drum.

When general officers, or persons entitled to a sa-
lute, pass guards while in the act of relieving, both

296 Honors Paid hy the Troopsj etc.

guards are to salute, receiving the word of command
from the senior officer of the whole.

All guards are to be under arms when armed
parties approach their posts ; and to parties com-
manded by commissioned officers, they are to present
their arms, drums beating a march, and officers sa-
luting.

No compliments by guards or sentinels will be paid
"between retreat and reveille, except as prescribed for
grand rounds.

All guards and sentinels are to pay the same com-
pliments to the officers of the navy, marines and mi-
litia, in the service of the Confederate States, as are
directed to be paid to the officers of. the army, accord-
ing to their relative ranks.

It is equally the duty of non-commissioned officers
and soldiers, at all times and in all situations, to pay
the proper compliments to officers of the oavy and
marines, and to officers of other regiments, when in
uniform, as to officers of their own particular regiments
and corps.

Courtesy among military men is indispensable to
discipline. Respect to superiors will not be confined
to obedience on duty, but will be extended to all occa-
sions. It is always the duty of the inferior to accost
or to offer first the customary salutation, and of the
superior to return such complimentary notice.

Sergeants, with swords drawn, will salute by bring-
ing them to a present ; with muskets, by bringing the
left hand across the body, so as to strike the musket
near the right shoulder. Corporals out of the ranks,
and privates not sentries, will carry their muskets at a
shoulder as sergeants, and salute in like manner.

When a soldier without arms, or with side-arms
only, meets an officer, he is to raise his hand to the
right side of the visor of his cap, palm to the front,
elbow raised as high as the shoulder, looking at the
same time in a respectful and soldier-like manner at

Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc. 297

the officer, who will return the compliment thus of-
fered.

A non-commissioned officer or soldier being seated,
and without particular occupation, will rise on the
approach of an officer, and make the customary salu-
tation. If standing, he will turn toward the officer
for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the
same place or on the same ground, such compliment
need not be repeated.

Artillery Salutes,

732. The President of the Confederate States and
the Governor of the State to which the troops belong,
to receive a salute of twenty-one guns.

The Vice-President is to receive a salute of seven-
teen guns.

The Heads of the great Executive Departments of
the National Government; the General commanding
the army; the Lieutenant-Governor of the State to
which the troops belong ; the Governors of other
States and Territories, fifteen guns.

A Major-General, thirteen guns.

A Brigadier-General, eleven guns.

Foreign ships-of-war will be saluted in return for a
similar compliment, gun for gun, on notice being
officially received of such intention. If there be sev-
eral posts in sight of, or within six miles of each other,
the principal only shall reciprocate compliments with
ships passing.

Officers of the Navy will be saluted according to
relative rank.

Foreign Officers invited to visit a fort or post may
be saluted according to their relative rank.

Envoys and Ministers of the Confederate States
and foreign Powers, are to be saluted with thirteen
guns.

A general officer will be saluted but once in a year

298 Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc.

at each post, and only when notice of his intention to
visit the post has been given.

Salutes to individuals are to be fired on their arri-
val only.

Escorts of Honor.

733. Eacorts of honor may be composed of cavalry
or infantry, or both, according to circumstances. They
are guards of honor for the purpose of receiving and
escorting personages of high rank, civil or military.
The troops, for this purpose, will be selected for their
soldierly appearance and superior discipline.

The escort will be drawn up in line, the centre op-
posite to the place where the personage presents him-
self, with an interval between the wings to receive
him and his retinue. On his appearance, he will bo
received with the honors due to his rank. When he
has taken his place in the line, the whole will be
wheeled into platoons or companies, as the case may
be, and take up the march. The same ceremony will
be observed, and the same honors paid, on his leaving
the escort.

When the position of the escort is at a considerable
distance from the point where he is expected to be re-
ceived, as, for instance, where a court-yard or wharf
intervenes, a double line of sentinels will be posted
from that point to the escort, facing inward, and the
sentinels will successively salute as he passes.

An oflBcer will be appointed to attend him, to bear
such communications as he may have to make to the
commander of the escort.

Funeral Honors.

734. The funeral escort of a General conimanding-
in-chief, shall consist of a regiment of infantry, a
squadron of cavalry, and six pieces of artillery.

Honors Paid hy ihe Troopsj etc. 299

That of a Mojor-General, a regiment of infantry,
a squadron of cavalry, and four pieces of artillery.

That of a Brigadier-General, a regiment of infan-
try, one company of cavalry, and two pieces of ar-
tillt^ry.

That of a Colonel, a regiment.

That of a Lieutenant-Colonel, six companies.

That of a Major, four companies.

That of a Captain, one company.

That of a Subaltern, half a company.

The funeral escort shall alwaj's be commanded by
an oflBcer of the same rank with the deceased ; or, if
none such be present, by one of the next inferior
grade.

The funeral escort of a non-commissioned staff offi-
cer shall consist of sixteen rank and file, commanded
by a sergeant.

That of a sergeant, of fourteen rank and file, com-
manded by a sergeant.

That of a corporal, of twelve rank and file, com-
manded by a corporal; and,

That of a private, of eight rank and file, com-
manded by a corporal.

The escort will be formed in two ranks, opposite to
the quarters or tent of the deceased, with shouldered
arms and bayonets unfixed ; the artillery and cavalry
on the right of the infantry.

On the appearance of the corpse, the officer com-
manding the escort will command :

Present — Arms ;

when the honors due to the deceased will be paid by
the drums and trumpets. The music will then play
an appropriate air, and the coffin will then be taken
to the right, where it will be halted. The commander
will next order :

300 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Bj/ company (or platoon) left
wheel. 3. March. 4. Eeverse — Arms. 5. Column,
forward. 6. Guide right. 7. March.

The arms will be reversed at the order by bringing
the firelock under the left arm, butt to the front, bar-
rel downward, left hand sustaining the lock, the right
steadying the firelock behind the back ; swords are
reversed in a similar manner under the right arm.

The column will be marched in slow time to solemn
music, and, on reaching the grave, will take a direc-
tion so that the guides shall be next to the grave.
When the centre of the column is opposite the grave,
the commander will order ;

1. Column. 2. Halt. 3. Right into line, wheel.
4. March.

The cofi&n is then brought along the front, to the
opposite side of the grave, and the commander then
orders :

1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Present — Arms.

And when the coffin reaches the grave, he adds :
1. Shoulder— A-Riis. 2. Rest on — Arms.

The rest on arms is done by placing the muzzle on
the left foot, both hands on the butt, the head on the
hands or bowed, right knee bent.

After the funeral service is performed, and the
coffin is lowered into the grave, the commander will
order :

1, Attention. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 8. Load at will.
4. Load.

When three rounds of small arms will be fired bj
the escort, taking care to elevate the pieces.

Honors Paid hy the Troopsy etc, 301
This being done, the commander will order:

1. By company (or platoon), rigJU wheel. 2. March.
3. Colu7nn, forward. 4. Guide left. 5. Quick— March.

The music will not begin to play until the escort is
clear of the enclosure.

^ When the distance to the place of interment is con-
siderable, the escort may march in common time and
in column of route, after leaving the camp or garri-
son, and till it approaches the burial-ground.

The pall-bearers, six in number, will be selected
from the grade of the deceased, or from the grade or
grades next above or below it.

At the funeral of an officer, as many in commission
of the army, division, brigade, or regiment, according
to the rank of the deceased, as can conveniently be
spared from other duties, will join in procession, in
uniform, and with side-arms. The funeral of a non-
commissioned officer or private will be attended, in
like manner, by the non-commissioned officers or
privates of the regiment or company, according to the
rank of the deceased, with side-arms only.

Persons joining in the procession follow the coffin
in the inverse order of their rank.

The usual badge of military mourning is a piece of
black crape around the left arm, above the elbow, and
also upon the sword-hilt; and will be worn when in
full or in undress.

As family mourning, crape will be worn by officers
(when in uniform) only around the left arm.

The drums of a funeral escort will be covered with
black crape, or thin black serge.

Funeral honors will be paid to deceased officers
without military rank according to their assimilated
grades.

302 Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc.

Inspections of the Troops.

735. Tho inspection of troops, as a division, regi-
ment, or other body composing a garrison or command,
not less than a company, will generally be preceded
by a review.

Form of inspection for infantry.

The present example embraces a battalion of infan-
try. The inspecting oflScer and the field and staff
officers will be oa foot.

The battalion being in the order of battle, the colo-
nel will cause it to break into open column of compa-
nies, right in front. He will next order the ranks to
be opened, when the color-rank and color-guard, under
the direction of the adjutant, will take post ten paces
in front, and the band ten paces in rear of the column.

The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command :

1. Officers and sergeants, to the front of your companies.
2. March.

The officers will form themselves in one rank, eight
paces, and the non-commissioned officers in one rank,
six paces, in advance, along the whole fronts of their
respective companies, from right to left, in the order
of seniority ; the pioneers and music of each company,
in one rank, two paces behind the non-commissioned
officers.

The colonel will next command :

Field and staff, to the front — March.

The commissioned officers thus designated will form
themselves in one rank, on a line equal to the front of
the column, six paces in front of the colors, from right
to left, in the order of seniority; and the non-commis-
eioned staff, in a similar manner, two paces in rear of

Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc. 303

the preceding rank. The colonel, seeing the move-
ment executed, will take post on the right of the
lieutenant-colonel, and wait the approach of the in-
specting officer. But such of the field officers as may
be superior in rank to the inspector will not take post
in front of the battalion.

The inspector will commence in front. After in-
specting the dress and general appearance of the field
and commissioned stafi" under arms, the inspector,
accompanied by these officers, will pass down the open
column, looking at every rank in front and rear.

The colonel will now command :

1. Order — Arms. 2. Rest;

when the inspector will proceed to make a minute
inspection of the several ranks or divisions, in succes-
sion, commencing in front.

As the inspector approaches the non-commissioned
staff, color-rank, the color-guard, and the band, the
adjutant will give the necessary orders for the inspec-
tion of arms, boxes, and knapsacks. The colors will
be planted firm in the ground, to enable the color-
bearers to display the contents of their knapsacks.
The non-commissioned staff may be dismissed as soon
as inspected ; but the color-rank and color-guard will
remain until the colors are to be escorted to the place
from which they were taken.

As the inspector successively approaches the compa-
nies, the captains will command :

1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Inspection — Arms.

The inspecting officer will then go through the
whole company, and minutely inspect the arms, accou-
trements, and dress of each soldier. After this is
done, the captain will command:

Open — Boxes ;

when the ammunition and the boxes will be examined.

304 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

The captain ■will then command :

1. Shoulder — Arms. 2. Close order. 3. March. 4.
Order — Arms. 6, Slack — Arms. 6. 7b the rear, open
order. 7. March. 8. Front rank — About — Fack.
9. Unsling — Knapsacks. 10. Open — Knapsacks.

The sergeants will face inward at the second com-
mand, and close upon the centre at the third, and stack
their arms at the fifth command ; at the sixth com-
mand they face outward, and resume their positions at
the seventh. When the ranks are closed, preparatory
to take arms, the sergeants will also close upon the
centre, and at the word, take their arms and resume
their places.

The knapsacks will be placed at the feet of the men,
the flaps from them, with the great-coats on the flaps,
and the knapsacks leaning on the great-coats. In this
position the inspector will examine their contents, or
so many of them as he may think necessary, com-
mencing with the non-commissioned officers, the men
standing at attention.

When the inspector has passed through the com-
pany, the captain will command :

Repack — Knapsacks ;

when each soldier will repack and buckle up his knap-
sack, leaving it on the ground, the number upward,
turned from him, and then stand at rest.
The captain will then command :

1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Sling — Knapsacks.

At the word sling, each soldier will take his knap-
sack, holding it by the inner straps, and stand erect;
at the last word he will replace it on his back. The
captain will continue :

4. Front rank — About — Face. 5. Close order. 6. March.
7. Take — Arms. 8. Shoulder — Arms. 9. Officers and
Sergeants to your posts. 10. March.

Honors Paid hy the Troops ^ etc. 305

And will cause the company to file oflf to their tents or
quarters, except the company that is to re-escort the
colors, which will await the further orders of the
colonel.

In an extensive column, some of the rearmost com-
panies may, after the inspection of dress, and general
appearance, be permitted to stack anns until just before
the inspector approaches them, when thej will be di-
rected to take arms and resume their position.

The inspection of the troops being ended, the field
and staff will next accompany the inspector to the
hospital, magazine, arsenal, quarters, sutler's shop,
guard-house, and such other places as he may think
proper to inspect. The captains and subalterns repair
to their companies and sections to await the inspector.

The hospital being at all times an object of particular
interest, it will be critically and minutely inspected.

The men will be formed in the company quarters in
front of their respective bunks, and on the entrance of
the inspector the word attention will be given by the
senior non-commissioned officer present, when the
whole will salute with the hand without uncovering.

The inspector, attended by the company officers,
will examine the general arrangement of the interior
of the quarters, the bunks, bedding, cooking, and
table utensils, and such other objects as may present
themselves ; and afterwards the exterior.

The adjutant will exhibit to the inspector the regi-
mental books and papers, including those relating to
the transactions of the Council of Administration.
The company books and papers will also be exhibited,
the whole together, generally at the adjutant's office,
and in the presence of the officers not otherwise par-
ticularly engaged.

The inspector will examine critically the books and
accounts of the administrative and disbursing officers
of the command, and the money and property in their
keeping.

306 Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc.

FORMS OF PARADE.

737. On all parades of ceremony, such as Reviews,
Guard-mounting, at Trooj) or Retreat parades, instead
of the word rest^ which allows the men to move or
change the position of their bodies, the command will
hQ parade — rest. At the last word of this command,
the soldier will carry the right foot six inches in the
rear of the left heel, the left knee slightly bent, the
body upright upon the right leg; the musket resting
against the hollow of the right shoulder, the hands
crossed in front, the backs of them outward, and the
left hand uppermost. At the word attention, the sol-
dier will resume the correct position at ordered arms.
In the positions here indicated, the soldier will remain
silent and motionless ; and it is particularly enjoined
upon all officers to cause the commands above given,
on the part of the soldier, to be executed with great
briskness and spirit.

Officers on all duties under arms are to have their
swords drawn, without waiting for any words of com-
mand for that purpose.

* To form the regiment or battalion.

297. At the signal, called the Adjutant's call, the
companies are marched from the company parades by
their captains, the music playing. The color-company
serves as the basis of the formation, and is the first to
form ; the color-guard being at the point where the
centre of the line is to rest, one marker is placed in
front of it, his right elbow touching the right corporal
of the color-guard, and another on the line at a little
less than company distance from him, on his right, and
facing towards him ; the color-company is halted three

* From Gilham's Manual. See School of the Battalion, No. 297.

Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc. 307

paces behind this line, faced to the front and dressed
up upon the line by the captain, who aligns it to the
left.

The company on the left of the color is the next to
take its post; it is halted three paces behind the line,
its right nearly behind the left file of the color-guard,
and faced to the front ; as soon as it halts the left
guide of the company throws himself out, so as to be
opposite one of the three left files of the company,
faces to the right, and aligns himself upon the two
markers ; the captain then places himself on the left
of the color-guard, on a line with its front rank, and
aligns the company to the right. The company on
the right of the colors, forms next, upon the same
principles ; the right guide posts himself upon the
line opposite one of the three right files of the com-
pany, and faces to the left ; the captain places himself
on the right of the color-company, and aligns his com-
pany to the left.

The remaining companies take their posts on the
left and right in succession, and when the formation
is complete, the adjutant commands: Guides iiosts ;
at this command, the guides on the line retire to their
places by passing through the intervals between com-
panies, and those captains who are on the left of their
companies, shift to the right.

Dress 'parade.

738. There shall be daily one dress parade, at troop
or retreat, as the commanding officer may direct.

A signal will be beat or sounded half an hour before
troop or retreat, for the music to assemble on regimental
parade, and each company to turn out under arms on
its own parade, for roll-call and inspection by its own
oflBcers.

Ten minutes after that signal, the Adjutant's call
will be given, when the captains will march their com-

308 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

panies (the band playing) to the regimental parade,
where they take their positions in line as directed, No.
297. When the line is formed, the captain of the first
company, on notice from the adjutant, steps one pace
to the front, and gives to his company the command,
order arms; parade — rest ; which is repeated by each
captain in succession to the left. The adjutant takes
post two paces on the right of the line ; the sergeant-
major two paces on the left. The music will be formed
in two ranks on the right of the adjutant. The senior
officer present will take the command of the parade,
and will take post at a suitable distance in front, oppo-
site the centre, facing the line.

When the companies have ordered arms, the adju-
tant will order the music to beat off, when it will com-
mence on the right, beat in front of the line to the
left, and back to its place on the right.

When the music has ceased, the adjutant will step
two paces to the front, face to the left, and command :

1. Attention. 2. Battalion. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 4. Pre-
pare to open ranks. 5. To the rear open order. 6. March.

At the sixth command, the ranks will be opened
according to the system laid down in the Infantry
Tactics, the commissioned officers marching to the
front, the company officers four paces, field officers six
paces, opposite to their positions in the order of battle,
where they will halt and dress. The adjutant, seeing
the ranks aligned, will command :

Front,

and march along the front to the centre, face to the
right, and pass the line of company officers eight or
ten paces, when he will come to the right about, and
command :

Present — Arms ;

when arms will be presented, officers saluting.

Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc. 309

Seeing this executed, he will face about to the com-
manding officer, salute, and report, " Sir, the parade
•is formed.^' The adjutant will then, on intimation to
that effect, take his station three paces on the left of
the commanding officer, one pace retired, passing
round his rear.

The commanding officer, having acknowledged the
salute of the line by touching his hat, will, after the
adjutant has taken his post, draw his sword, and com-
mand :

1. Battalion. 2. Shoulder — Arms ;

and add such exercises as he may think proper, con-
cluding with :

Order — Arms ;

then return his sword, and direct the adjutant to re-
ceive the reports.

The adjutant will now pass round the right of the
commanding officer, advance upon the line, halt mid-
way between him and the line of company officers,
and command :

1. First sergeants^ to the front and centre. 2. March.

At the first command, they will shoulder arms as
sergeants, march two paces to the front, and face in-
ward. At the second command, they will march to
the centre, and halt. The adjutant will then order:

1. Front — Face. 2. Report.

" At the last word, each in succession, beginning on
the right, will salute by bringing the left hand smartly
across the breast to the right shoulder, and report the
result of the roll-call previously made on the company
parade.

The adjutant again commands :

310 Honors Paid hy the TroojjSj etc.

1. First sergeants, outward — Face. 2. To your posts —
March ;

*
■when they will resume their places, and order arms.
The adjutant will now face to the commanding officer,
salute, report absent officers, and give the result of
the first sergeant's reports. The commanding officer
will next direct the orders to be read, when the adju-
tant will face about, and announce :

Attention to Orders.

He will then read the orders.

The orders having been read, the adjutant will face
to the commanding officer, salute, and report; when,
on an intimation from the commander, he will face
again to the line, and announce :

Parade is dismissed.

All the officers will now return their swords, face
inward, and close on the adjutant, he having taken
position in their line, the field officers on the flanks.
The adjutant commands:

1. Front — Face. 2. Forward — March ;

when they will march forward, dressing on the centre,
the music playing, and when within six paces of the
commander, the adjutant will give the word:

Halt.

The officers will then salute the commanding officer by
raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he
shall have communicated to them such instructions as
he may have to give, or intimates that the ceremony is
finished. As the officers disperse, the first sergeants
will close the ranks of their respective companies, and

Honors Paid hy the Troops ^ etc. 311

march them to the company parades, where they will
be dismissed, the band continuing to play until the
companies clear the regimental parade.

All field and company officers and men will be
present at dress parades, unless especially excused, or
on some duty incompatible with such attendance.

A dress parade once a day will not be dispensed
with, except on extraordinary and urgent occasions.

Review of a battalion of infantry.

739. Preparatory to a review, the adjutant will cause
a camp color to be placed 80 or 100 paces, or more,
according to the length of the line, in front of, and
opposite to, where the centre of the battalion will rest,
where the reviewing ofl5cer is supposed to take his sta-
tion ; and, although he may choose to quit that posi-
tion, still the color is to be considered as the point to
which all the movements and formations are relative.

The adjutant will also cause points to be marked at
suitable distances, for the wheelings of the divisions ;
so that their right flanks, in marching past, shall only
be about four paces from the camp-color, where it is
supposed the reviewing officer places himself to receive
the salute.

The battalion being formed in the order of battle, at
sJiouldered arms, the colonel will command :

1. Battalion, prepare for review. 2. To the rear open order.
3. March.

At the word march, the field and stafi" officers dis-
mount; the company officers and the color-rank ad-
vance four paces in front of the front rank, and place
themselves opposite to their respective places, in the
order of battle. The color-guard replace the color-
rank. The staff officers place themselves, according
to rank, three paces on the right of the rank of com-
pany officers, and one pace from each other ; the music

312 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

takes post as at a parade. The non-commissioned staff
take post one pace from each other, and three paces on
the right of the front rank of the battalion.

AVhen the ranks are aligned, the colonel will com-
mand :

Feont ;

and place himself eight paces, and the lieutenant-
colonel and major will place themselves two paces, in
front of the rank of company officers, and opposite to
their respective places in the order of battle, all facing
to the front.

When the reviewing officer presents himgfelf before
the centre, and is fifty or sixty paces distant, the col-
onel will face about, and command :

Present — Arms ;

and resume his front. The men present arms, and the
officers salute, so as to drop their swords with the last
motion of the firelock. The non-commissioned staff
salute by bringing the sword to a poise, the hilt rest-
ing on the breast, the blade in front of the face, inclin-
ing a little outward. The music will play, and all the
drums beat, according to the rank of the reviewing
officer. The colors only salute such persons as, from
their rank, and by regulation (see No. 730), are enti-
tled to that honor. If the reviewing officer be junior
in rank to the commandant of the parade, no compli-
ment will be paid to him, but he will be received with
arms carried, and the officers will not salute as the
column passes in review.

The reviewing officer having halted, and acknow-
ledged the salute of the line by touching or raising
his cap or hat, the colonel will face about and com-
mand :

Shoulder — Aems ;

when the men shoulder their pieces ; the officers and

Honors Paid hi/ the Troops, etc. 313

non-commissioned staff recover their swords with the
last motion, and the colonel Aices to the front.

The reviewing officer will then go towards the right,
the whole remaining perfectly steady, without paying
any further compliment, while he passes along the
front of the battalion, and proceeds round the left
flank, and along the rear of the file-closers to the right.
While the reviewing officer is going round the battalion,
the band will play, and will cease when he has returned
to the right flank of the troops.

When the reviewing officer turns off, to place him-
self by the camp-color in front, the colonel will face
to the line and command :

1. Close order. 2. March.

At the first command, the field and company officers
will face to the right about, and at the second com-
mand, all persons, except the colonel, will resume
their 'places in the order of battle ; the field and staff
officers mount.

The reviewing officer having taken his position near
the camp-color, the colonel will command :

1. Bt/ company, right toheel. 2. Quicl< — Mapcht. 3. Pass
in review. 4. Column, forward. 5. Guide right. 6.
March.

The battalion, in column of companies, right in
front, will then, in common time, and at shouldered
arms, be put in motion ; the colonel four paces in
front of the captain of the leading company ; the
lieutenant-colonel on a line with the leading company ;
the major on a line with the rear company ; the adju-
tant on a line with the second company ; the sergeant-
major on a line with the company next preceding the
rear; each six paces from the flank (left) opposite to
the reviewing officer ; the staff officers in one rank,
according to the order of precedency, from the right,
four paces in rear of the column ; the music, preceded
by the principal musician, six paces before the colo-
27

314 Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc.

nel ; the pioneers, preceded by a corporal, four paces
before the principal musician ; and the quartermaster-
sergeant two paces from the side opposite to the guides,
and in line with the pioneers.

All other officers and non-commissioned officers will
march past in the places prescribed for them in the
march of an open column. The guides and soldiers
will keep their heads steady to the front in passing in
review.

The color-bearer will remain in the ranks while
passing and saluting.

The music will begin to play at the command to
march, and after passing the reviewing officer, wheel
to the left out of the column, and take a position op-
posite and facing him, and will continue to play until
the rear of th€ column shall have passed him, when
it will cease, and follow in the rear of the battalion,
unless the battalion is to pass in qiiick time also, in
which case it will keep its position.

The officers will salute the reviewing officer when
they arrive within six paces of him, and recover their
swords when six paces past him. All officers, in sa-
luting, will cast their eyes towards the reviewing
officer.

The colonel, when he has saluted at the head of the
battalion, will place himself near the reviewing officer,
and will remain there until the rear has passed, when
he will rejoin the battalion.

The colors will salute the reviewing officer, if enti-
tled to it, when within six paces of him, and be raised
when they have passed by him an equal distance.
The drums will beat a march, or ruffle, according to
the rank of the reviewing officer, at the same time
that the colors salute.

When the column has passed the reviewing officer,
the colonel will direct it to the ground it marched
from, and command :

Guide left ;

Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc. 315

in time for the guides to cover. The column having
arrived on its ground, the colonel will command :

1. Column. 2, Halt ;

form it in order of battle, and cause the ranks to be
opened. The review will terminate by the whole sa-
luting as at the beginning.

If, however, instructions have been previously given
to march the troops past in quick time also, the colonel
will, instead of changing the guides, halting the
column, and wheeling it into line, as above directed,
give the command :

1. Quick time. 2. March.

In passing the reviewing officer again, no salute will
be offered by either officers or men. The music will
have kept its position opposite the reviewing officer,
and at the last command will commence playing, and,
as the column approaches, will place itself in front of,
and march off with the column, and continue to play
until the battalion is halted on its original ground of
formation. The review will terminate in the same
manner as prescribed above.*

The colonel will afterwards cause the troops to per-
form such exercises and manoeuvres as the reviewing
officer may direct.

When two or more battalions are to be reviewed,
they will be formed in parade order, with the proper
intervals, and will also perforin the same movements
that are laid down for a single battalion, observing the
additional directions that are given for such move-
ments when applied to the line. The brigadier gene-
ral and his staff, on foot, will place themselves opposite

* Or the battalion may pass a third time at double quick, and
then re-form.

316 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

the centre of the brin;ade ; the brigadier-t];eneral two
paces in front of the rank of colonels ; his aid two
paces on his rij^jht, and one retired ; and the other
brigade staff officers, those having the rank of field
officers, in the rank of lieutenant colonels and majors;
and those below that rank, in the rank of company
officers.

In passing in review, a major-general will be four
paces in front of the colonel of the leading battalion
of his division ; and the brigadier-general will be on
the right of the colonels of the leading battalions of
their brigades; staff officers on the left of their gen-
erals.

When the line exceeds two battalions, the reviewing
officer may cause them to march past in quick time
only. In such cases the mounted officers only will
salute.

A number of companies leas than a battalion will
be reviewed as a battalion, and a single company as
if it were with the battalion. In the latter case, the
company may pass in column of platoons.

If the several brigades are to be reviewed together,
or in one line, this further difference will be observed :
the reviewing personage, joined by the general of the
division, on the right of his division, will proceed
down the line, parallel to its front, and when near the
brigadier-generals respectively, will be saluted by
their brigades in succession. The music of each,
after the prescribed salute, will play while the review-
ing personage is in front, or in rear of it, and only
then.

In marching in review, with several battalions in
common time, the music of each succeeding battalion
will commence to play when the music of the prece-
ding one has ceased, in order to follow its battalion.
When marching in quick time, the music will begin
to play when the rear company of the preceding bat-
talion has passed the reviewing officer.

Honors Paid ly the Troops^ etc. 317

The reviewing officer or personage will acknowledge
the salute by raising, or taking off, his hat or cap,
when the commander of the troops salutes him ; and
also when the colors pass. The remainder of the
time occupied by the passage af the troops he will be
covered.

Guard-mounting.

742. At the first call for guard-mounting, the men
warned for duty turn out on their company parades
for inspection bv the first sergeants ; and at the second
call, repair to the regimental or garrison parade, con-
ducted by the first sergeants. Each detachment, as it
arrives, will, under the direction of the adjutant, take
post on the left of the one that preceded it, in open
order, arms shouldered, and bayonets fixed ; the su-
pernumeraries five paces in the rear of the men of
their respective companies ; the first sergeants in rear
of them. The sergeant-major will dress the ranks,
count the files, verify the details, and when the guard
is formed, report to the adjutant, and take post two
paces on the left of the front rank. ,.

The adjutant then commands /rovii!, when the othcer
of the guard takes post twelve paces in front of the
centre, the sergeants in one rank, four paces in the
rear of the officers; and the corporals in onerank,
four paces in the rear of the sergeants— all facing to
the front. The adjutant then assigns their places in
the guard.

The adjutant will then command :

1. Officer and non-commissioned officers. 2. About— YhQ^.
3. Inspect your guards — March.

The non-commissioned officers then take their posts.
The commander of the guard then commands :

1. Orrfcr— Aems. 2. Inspection— k-Ryis ]

318 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

and inspects his guard. When there is no commis-
sioned officer on the guard, the adjutant will inspect
it. During inspection, the band -will play.

The inspection ended, the ofi&cer of the guard takes
post as though the guard were a company of a batta-
lion, in open order, under review ; at the same time,
also, the officers of the day will take post in front of
the centre of the guard ; the old officer of the day
three paces on the right of the new officer of the day,
one pace retired.

The adjutant will now command :

1. Parade — Rest. 2, Troop — Beat off;

when the music, beginning on the right, will beat
down the line on front of the officer of the guard to
the left, and back to its place in the right, where it
will cease to play.

The adjutant then commands :

1. Attention. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 3. Close order—'
March.

At the word close order, the officer will face about ;
at marcJi, resume his post in line.
The adjutant then commands:

Present — Arms.

At which he will face to the new officer of the day,
salute, and report, " Sir, the guard is formed.'^ The
new officer of the day, after acknowledging the salute,
will direct the adjutant to march the guard in review,
or by flank to its post. But if the adjutant be senior
to the officer of the day, he will report without sa-
luting with the sword then, or when marching the
guard in review.

In review, the guard march past the officer of the
day, according to the order of review, conducted by

Honors Paid hy the TroopSj etc. 319

the adjutant, marching on the left of the first divi-
sion ; the sergeant-major on the left of the last
division.

When the column has passed the officer of the day,
the oflficer of the guard marches it to its post, the ad-
jutant and sergeant-major retiring. The music, which
has wheeled out of the column, and taken post oppo-
site the officer of the day, will cease, and the old offi-
cer of the day salute, and give the old or standing
orders to the new officer of the day. The supernume-
raries, at the same time, will be marched by the first
sergeants to their respective company parades, and
dismissed.

In bad weather, or at night, or after fatiguing
marches, the ceremony of turning off may be dis-
pensed with, but not the inspection.

Grand guards, and other brigade guards, are organ-
ized and mounted on the brigade parade by the staff
officer of the parade, under the direction of the field
officer of the day of the brigade, according to the prin
ciples here prescribed for a police guard of a regi
ment. The detail of each regiment is assembled or
the regimental parade, verified by the adjutant, and
marched to the brigade parade by the senior officer of
the detail. After inspection and review, the officer of
the day directs the several guards to their respective
posts.

The officer of the old guard, having his guard para-
ded, on the approach of the new guard, commands :

Present — Arms.

The new guard will march, in quick time, past the
old guard, at shouldered arms, officers saluting, and
take post four paces on its right, where, being aligned
with it, its commander will order :

Present — Arms.

820 Honors Paid hy tJie Troops, etc.

The two officers "will then approach each other, and
salute. They will then return to their respective
guards, and command :

1. Shotdder — Arms. 2. Order — Arms.

The officer of the new guard will now direct the de-
tail for the advanced guard to be formed and marched
to its post, the list of the guard made and divided into
three reliefs, experienced soldiers placed over the arms
of the guard, and at the remote and responsible posts,
and the youug soldiers in posts near the guard for in-
struction in their duties, and will himself proceed to
take possession of the guardhouse, or guard-tent, and
the articles and prisoners in charge of the guard.

During the time of relievinor the sentinels, and of
calling in the small posts, the old commander will
give to the new all the information and instructions
relating to his post.

The first relief having been designated and ordered
two paces to the front, the corporal of the new guard
will take charge of it, and go to relieve the sentinels,
accompanied by the corporal of the old guard, who
vrill take command of the old sentinels, when the
wh(de are relieved.

If the sentinels are numerous, the sergeants are to
be employed, as well as the corporals, in relieving
them.

The relief, with arms at a support, in two ranks,
will march by a flank, conducted by the corporal on
the side of the leading front-rank man ; and the men
will be numbered alternately in the front and rear
rank, the man on the right of the front rank being
No. 1. Should an officer approach, the corporal will
command cm^ri/ arms, and resume the sitppoii arms
when the officer is passed.

The sentinels at the guard-house or guard-tent will
be the first relieved and left behind ; the others are re-
lieved in succession.

Honors Paid hy the TroopSy etc. 321

When a Fentlnel sees the relief approaching, he
will halt and face to it with his arms at a shoulder.
At six paces, the corporal will command :

1. Relief. 2. Halt.

When the relief will halt and carry arms. The
corporal will then add, "No. 1," or "No. 2," or "No.
3," according to the number of the post :

Arms — Port.

The two sentinels will, with arms at port, then ap-
proach each other, when the old sentinel, under the
correction of the corporal, will whisper the instruc-
tions to the new sentinel. This done, the two senti-
nels will shoulder arms, and the old sentinel will pass,
in quick time, to his place in rear of the relief. The
corporal will then command :

1. Support — Arms. 2. Forward. 3. March.

And the relief proceeds in the same manner until
the whole are relieved.

The detachments and sentinels from the old guard
having come in, it will be marched, at shouldered arms,
along the front of the new guard, in quick time, the
new guard standing at presented arms ; officers sa-
luting, and the music of both guards beating, except
at the outposts.

On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade,
the commander of the old guard will send the detach-
ments composing it, under charge of the non-commis-
sioned officers, to their respective regiments. Before
the men are dismissed, their pieces will be drawn or
discharged at a target. On rejoining their compan-
ions, the chiefs of squads will examine the arras, etc.,
of their men, and cause the whole to be put away ia
good order.

322 Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc.

"When the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the
officer of the new guard will order his men to stack
their arms, or place them in the arm-racks.

The commander of the guard will then make him-
self acquainted with all the instructions for his post,
visit the sentinels, and question them and the non-
commissioned officers relative to the instructions they
may have received from other persons of the old
guard.

Reception of one hody of troops hy another.

745. The commanding officer of the receiving corps,
having notified the commander of the other body of
his intention, brings his command into line, so that it
shall be on the inght of the route which it is intended
the other shall take. The commander of the body
receiving the compliment, should have his command
in column right in front; and when he sees the other
body in a line, or receives an intimation from its com-
manding officer, that he is ready to receive him, he
puts his column in motion ; when its head is within
six paces of the left of the line on its right, the latter
will be brought to a present, and will continue in that
position until the rear of the column has passed the
right of the line. The column passes at shouldered
arms, each officer saluting as soon as he comes within
six paces of the left of the line. When the rear of
the column has passed some twenty-five or thirty
paces beyond the right of the line, the column is
brought into line, on the same side with the first line.
As soon as this is done, the first line breaks into col-
umn right in front, and marches past the second, re-
ceiving the same compliments that it extended when
the other body passed. After marching past, it may
be formed into line again as it was at first, when both
commands may be brought to an order, the officers
advancing and being presented; or the column may

Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc. 323

halt long enough to allow the other command, now in
line, to re-form column, when both take up the march,
the leading column serving as an escort lor the other.

Masters.

747. Musters of the volunteers and militia are made
at least once a year, by the brigade inspectors. Where
troops are in actual service musters are made every
two months ; usually on the last day of every second
month. In this case they are made by an inspector-
general, if present, otherwise by an officer specially
designated by the commander of the army, division,
or brigade ; and in the absence of the inspector-gene-
ral or officer specially designated, the muster is made
by the commander of the post.

When one inspecting officer cannot inspect all the
troops himself on the day specified, the commanding
officer will designate sucli other competent officers as
may be necessary to assist him. All stated musters
of the troops should be preceded by a minute and
careful iiiHpeciion in the prescribed mode ; and if the
command be more than a company, by a review, before
inspection.

The mustering officer having inspected the compa-
nies in succession, beginning on the right, returns to
the first company to muster it. The company being
at ordered arms, with open ranks, as when inspected,
the captains will, as the mustering officer approaches,
command :

1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 4.
Support — AiiMS.

The mustering officer will then call over the names
on the roll, and each man, as his name is called, will
distinctly answer here, and bring his piece to a carry,
and to an order.

324 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

After each company is mustered, the captain -will
order it to be marched to the company parade, and
there dismissed to quarters, to await the inspector's
visit. After mustering the companies, the mustering
officer, attended by the company commanders, vrill
visit the guard and hospital, to verify the presence of
the men reported there. The muster and pay rolls
are made on printed forms in accordance with the di-
rections on them. On the muster rolls companies
are designated by the name of the captain, whether
present or absent. The pay roll is left blank to fill
up by the paymaster.

The roster, or details for service.

748. The duties performed by detail are of three
classes. The first class comprises, first, grand guards
and outposts ; second, interior guards, as of maga-
zine, hospital, etc.; third, orderlies; fourth, police
guards.

The second class comprises, first, detachments to
protect labor on military works, as field works, com-
munications, etc. ; second, working parties on such
works ; third, detachments to protect fatigues.

The third class are all fatigues, without arms, in or
out of camp. In the cavalry, stable-guards form a
separate roster, and count before fatigue.

The rosters are distinct for each class. Officers are
named on them in the order of rank. The details are
taken in succession in the order of the roster, begin-
ning at the head. Lieutenants form one roster; the
first and second lieutenants are entered on it alter-
nately. The senior first lieutenant is the first on the
roster ; the senior second lieutenant is the second, etc.
The captains form one roster, and are exempt from
fatigue, except to superintend issues. A captain com-
manding a battalion temporarily isexcrapt from de-
tail, and duty falling to him passes. Lieutenant-

Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc. 325

colonels and majors are on one roster. They may be
detailed for duties of the first and second classes,
when the importance of the guards and detachments
requires it. Their roster is kept at division and bri-
gade head-quarters. The rosters of the captains and
lieutenants are kept at regimental head-quarters, and
those of the companies by the first sergeants. In the
company, sergeants, corporals, and privates form dis-
tinct rosters.

Officers, non-commissioned officers, and soldiers,
take duties of the first class, in the order stated, viz :
the first for the detail takes the grand guards ; the
next, the interior guards ; the last, the police guard ;
and the same rule in regard to the details and duties
of the second class. In the details for the third class,
the senior officer takes the largest party. The party
first for detail takes the service out of camp.

When the officer whose tour it is is not able to take
it, or is not present at the hour of marching, the next
after him takes it. When a guard has passed the
chain of sentinels, or an interior guard has reached
its post, the officer whose tour it was cannot then take
it. He takes the tour of the officer who has taken
his. When an officer is prevented by sickness from
taking his tour, it passes. These rules apply equally
to non-commissioned officers and soldiers.

Duties of the first and second class are credited on
the roster when the guards or detachments have passed
the chain of sentinels, or an interior guard has reached
its post ; fatigue duties when the parties have passed
the chain or begun the duties in camp.

Every officer, non-commissioned officer, or soldier,
on duty of the first class, or who is of the next detail
for such duty, takes, when relieved, the duty of the
second or third class that has fallen to him during
that time, unless he has marched for detachment of
more than twenty-four hours.

Soldiers march with knapsacks for all duties of the
28

326 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

first class ; and with arms and equipments complete
on all working parties out of camp, unless otherwise
ordered. In the cavalry, horses are packed for all
mounted service ; and dismounted men, and those
whose horses are not in order, are preferred for the
detail for dismounted service. Those who are mounted
are never employed on those services, if the number
of the other class is sufficient.

Every non-commissioned officer and soldier in the
cavalry detailed for dismounted service must, before
he marches, take to the first sergeant of his troop, or
sergeant of his squad, his horse equipments and valise
ready packed. In case of alarm, the first sergeant sees
that the horses of these men are equipped and led to
the rendezvous.

In the field, artillery-men are not called upon for
any duty outside of their own batteries or camps.

These rules in regard to the roster apply also to
service in garrison.

Duties of guards.

749. Sentinels will be relieved every two hours,
unless the state of the weather, or other causes, should
make it necessary or proper that it be done at shorter
or longer intervals.

Each relief, before mounting, is inspected by the
commander of the guard, or of its post. The corporal
reports to him, and presents the old relief on its
return.

The coiuiiersign, or watchword, is given to such per-
sons as are entitled to pass during the night, and to
officers, non-commis^^ioned officers, and sentinels of the
guard. Interior guards receive the countersign only
when ordered by the commander of the troops.

The parole is imparted to such officers only as have
a right to visit the guards, and to make the grand
rounds ; and to officers commanding guards.

Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc. 327

As soon as the new guard has been marched off, the
officer of the day will repair to the office of the com-
mandino; officer and report for orders.

The officer of the day must see that the officer of
the guard is furnished with the parole and countersign
before retreat.

The officer of the day visits the guards during the
day at such times as he may deem necessary, and
makes his rounds at night at least once after 12 o'clock.

Upon being relieved, the officer of the day will make
such remarks in the report of the officer of the guard
as circumstances require, and present the same at
head-quarters.

Commanders of guards leaving their posts to visit
their sentinels, or on other duty, are to mention their
intention, and the probable time of their absence, to
the next in command.

The officers are to remain constantly at their guards,
except while visiting their sentinels, or necessarily en-
gaged elsewhere on their proper duty.

Neither officers nor soldiers are to take off their
clothing or accoutrements while they are on guard.

The officer of the guard must see that the counter-
sign is duly communicated to the sentinels a little
before twilight.

When a tire breaks out, or any alarm is raised in
a garrison, all guards are to be immediately under
arms.

Inexperienced officers are put on guard as supernu-
meraries, for the purpose of instruction.

Sentinels will not take orders or allow themselves
to be relieved, except by an officer or non-commis-
sioned officer of their guard or party, the officer of the
day, or the commanding officer ; in which case the
orders will be immediately notified to the commander
of the guard by the officer giving them.

Sentinels will report every breach of orders or reg-
ulations they are instructed to enforce.

328 Honors Paid hy the Troops j etc.

Sentinel:? must keep themselves on the alert, observ-
ing everythino; that takes place within sight and
hearing of their post. They will carry their arms ha-
bitually at support, or on either shoulder, but will
never quit them. In wet weather, if there be no sen-
try box, they will secure arms.

No sentinel shall quit his post or hold conversation
not necessary to the proper discharge of his duty.

All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are
required to observe respect towards sentinels.

In case of disorder, a sentinel must call out the
guard; and if a fire take place, he must cry — "Fire!"
adding the number of his post. If in either case the
danger be great, he must discharge his firelock before
calling out.

It is the duty of a sentinel to repeat all calls made
from posts more distant from the main body of the
guard than his own, and no sentinel will be posted so
distant as not to be heard by the guard, either directly
or through other sentinels.

Sentinels will halt, come to attention, and present
arms to general and field officers, to the officer of the
day, and to the commanding officer of the post. To
all other officers they will carry arms.

When a sentinel in his sentry-box sees an officer
approach, he will stand at attention, and as the officer
passes, will salute him by bringing the left hand
briskly to the musket, as high as the right shoulder.

The sentinel, at any post of the guard, when he sees
any bftdy of troops, or an officer entitled to compli-
ment, approach, must call : " Turn out the guards'*
and announce who approaches.

Guards do not turn out as a matter of compliment
after sunset; but sentinels will, when officers in uni-
form approach, pay them proper attention, by facing
to the proper front, and standing steady at shouldered
arms. This will be observed until the evening is so
far advanced that the sentinels begin challenging.

Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc. 329

After retreat (or the hour appointed by the com-
manding officer), until broad daylight, a sentinel chal-
lenges every person who approaches him, taking, at
the same time, the position of arms port. He will
sniFer no person to come nearer than within reach of
his bayonet, until the person has given the countersign.

A sentinel, in challenging, will call out — "Who
comes (here F" If answered — ''Friend, with the coun-
tersign," and he be instructed to pass persons with
the countersign, he will reply — '' Adimnce, friend, with
the countersign." If answered — ''Friends," he will
reply — "Halt, friends, Advance, one, with the counter-
sign." If answered — "Relief," "Patrol," or "Grand
rounds," he will reply — "Halt. Advance, sergeant (or
corporal) with the countersign," and satisfy himself
that the party is what it represents itself to be. If he
have no authority to pass persons with the counter-
sign, if the wrong countersign be given, or if the
persons have not the countersign, he will cause them
to stand, and call — "Corporal of the guard."

In the daytime, when the sentinel before the guard
sees the officer of the day approach, he*will call —
"Tarn out the guard, officer of the day." The guard
will be paraded, and salute with presented arms.

AVhen any person approaches a post of the guard at
night, the sentinel before the post, after challenging,
causes him to halt until examined by a non-commis-
sioned officer of the guard. If it be the officer of the
day, or any other officer entitled to inspect the guard
and to make the rounds, the non-commissioned officer
will call — " Turn out the guard," when the guard will
be paraded at shouldered arms, and the officer of the
guard, if he thinks necessary, may demand the coun-
tersign and parole.

The officer of the day, wishing to make the rounds,
will take an escort of a non-commissioned officer and
two men. When the rounds are challenged by a sen-
tinel, the sergeant will answer — "Grand rounds," and

330 Honors Paid hy the TroojpSy etc.

the sentinel will reply — ^^Halt, grand rounds. Ad-
vance, sergeant, with the countersign.'' Upon which
the sergeant advances and gives the countersign. The
sentinel will then cry — ''Advance, roundSy' and stand
at a shoulder till they have passed.

When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and
is answered — ''Grand rounds," he will reply — "Halt,
grand rounds. Turn out the guard ; grand rounds."
Upon which the guard will be drawn up at shouldered
arms. The officer commanding the guard will then
order a sergeant and two men to advance ; when
within ten paces, the sergeant challenges. The ser-
geant of the grand rounds answers — "Grand rounds."
The sergeant of the guard replies — "Advance, ser-
geant, with the countersign." The sergeant of the
rounds advances alone, gives the countersign, and re-
turns to his round. The sergeant of the guard calls
to his officer — " The countersign is right," on which
the officer of the guard calls — "Advance, rounds."
The officer of the rounds then advances alone, the
guard standing at shouldered arms. The officer of
the rounds 4)asses along the front of the guard to the
officer, who keeps his post on the right, and gives him
the parole. He then examines the guard, orders back
his escort, and, taking a new one, proceeds in the same
manner to other guards.

All material instructions given to a sentinel on post
by persons entitled to make grand rounds, ought to be
promptly notified to the commander of the guard.

Any general officer, or the commander of a post or
garrison, may visit the guards of his command, and
go the grand rounds, and be received in the same
manner as prescribed for the officer of the day.

Guards.

750. Guards, in time of war, are bodies of men
whose duties are to secure an army or place from be-
ing surprised by an enemy.

Honors Paid hy the Troojps, etc. 331

By a proper disposition of the guards, and by a
faithful discharge of the duties imposed upon them, a
whole army can at all times, and under all circum-
stances, be kept in readiness for action ; the larger
part of the army, even in the pursuit of an enemy,
and momentarily expecting to meet him, may with
safety seek that repose which is so necessary to keep
up the physical energies of the forces ; and as tho
guards generally constitute but a comparatively small
portion of the command, and are frequently relieved,
no soldier is likely to be called upon to endure an
amount of fatigue greater than a man in his vigor
ought to bear.

In order that the guards of an army may protect ifc
properly, they must be so posted as to cover both tho
front and flanks of the position, and at the same time
have possession of all the avenues of approach to it.
The ordinary arrangement of guards is such, that no
matter how far the outer line may lie from the main
body, it may rally from point to point, if driven in by
an advancing enemy, gaining strength each time, un-
til it finally reaches the main body. Thus even the
most advanced posts need never be cutoff, while it would
be impossible for an enem}'^ to surprise the main body.

The usual arrangement consists of two or three lines
of posts, within relief of each other, and extending
around the main body as a centre, the exterior lino
throwing out a chain of sentinels in its front, and so
distributed as to prevent the approach of any one
without being seen.

751. The inner line consists of what are denomina-
ted police g^tards ; there is a police guard for each
regiment, which is posted within the regimental camp.
These guards are of sufficient strength to supply a
chain of sentinels along the front and rear of the
regiment, connecting it with the regiments on the
right and left, thus forming a chain of sentinels close
to and all around the camp.

332 Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

The next line consists of a number of strong de-
taehmenta, termed pickets ; they are posted upon the
main avenues of approach to the position, and serve
as supports to the exterior lines, upon which they
rally when driven in by the enemy.

Next beyond the pickets is the line of grand guards,
and of course occupying; a wider circumference ; they
aie y)OSted in the most favorable position for observing
^he enemy, and throw out the extreme line, called the
line of outposts. The line of grand guards, while
supported by the pickets, in turn furnishes support to
the outposts when necessary.

Besides these various lines, patrols are kept up be-
tween the various posts, to keep the one intormed of
the condition of the other ; and, also between the out-
posts and the extreme line of sentinels, to see that the
duties of the latter are properly performed.

This arrangement secures positions favorable for
observation, and mutual support.

" The duties of the outposts, and of the grand guards
which form their supports, are strictly those of obser-
vation. If attacked, they offer no resistance further
than to enable them to feel the enemy perfectly, and
never lose sight of him. The task of holding the
enemy in check by a vigorous resistance, so as to pro-
cure sufficient time for the main body to make its
disposition for battle, is consigned to the pickets."
(Maban).

Police Guards.

752. The police guard is detailed eveiy day from
each regiment, and consists of two sergeants, three
corporals, two musicians, and men enough to furnish
the necessary sentinels and patrols. The men are
taken from all the companies, from each in proportion
to its strength.

The guard is commanded by a lieutenant, under the

Honors Paid hy the Troopsy etc. 333

supervision of a captain as regimental oflScer of the
day. It furnishes ten sentinels at the camp; one over
the arms of the guard ; one at the colonel's tent ; three
on the color front ; one of them over the colors ; three,
fifty paces in rear of the field oflBcer's tents ; and one
on each flank, between it and the next regiment. If
it is a flank regiment, one more sentinel is posted on
the outer flank.

An advanced post is detached from the police guard,
composed of a sergeant, a corporal, a drummer, and
nine men to furnish sentinels and the guard over the
prisoners. The men are the first of the guard roster
from each company. The men of the advanced post
must not leave it under any pretext. Their meals are
sent to tbe post. The advanced post furnishes three
sentinels ; two a few paces in front of the post oppo-
site the right and left wing of the regiment, posted so
as to see as far as possible to the front, and one over
the arms.

In the cavalry, dismounted men are employed in
preference on the police guard. The mounted men on
guard are sent in succession, a part at a time, to groom
their horses. The advanced post is always formed of
mounted men.

In each company, a corporal has charge of the stable
guard. His tour begins at retreat, and ends at morn-
ing stable-call. The stable guard is large enough to
relieve the men on post every two hours. They sleep
in their tents, and are called by the corporal when
•wanted. At retreat he closes the streets of the camp
with cords, or uses other precautions to prevent the
escape of loose horses.

The officer of the day is charged with the order and
cleanliness of the camp: a fatigue is furnished to him
when the number of prisoners is insufficient to clean
the camp. He has the calls beaten by the drummer
of the guard.

334 Honors^ Paid hy the Troops^ etc.

The police guard and the advanced post pay the
game honors as other guards. They take arras when
an armed body approaches.

The sentinel over the colors has orders not to permit
them to be moved except in the presence of an escort ;
to let no one touch them but the color-bearer, or the
Rerp;eant of the police guard when he is accompanied
bj two armed men.

The sentinels on the color front permit no soldier to
takearmsfromthestacks, except by order of some officer,
oranon-commissioned officer of the guard. The sentinel
at the colonel's tent has orders to warn him, day or
night, of any unusual movement in or about the camp.

The sentinels on the front, flanks and rear, see that
no soldier leaves camp with horse or arms unless con-
ducted by a non-commissioned officer. They prevent
non-commissioned officers and soldiers from passing
out at night, except to go to the sinks, and mark if
they return. They arrest, at any time, suspicious per-
sons prowling about the camp, and at night, everyone
who attempts to enter, even the soldiers of other corps.
Arrested persons are sent to the officer of the guard,
who sends them, if necessary, to the officer of the day.

The sentinels on the front of the advanced posts
have orders to permit neither noncommissioned offi-
cers nor soldiers to pass the line, without reporting at
the advanced post ; to warn the advanced post of the
approach of any armed body, and to arrest all suspi-
cious persons. The sergeant sends persons so arrested
to the officer of the guard, and warns him of the ap-
proach of any armed body.

The sentinel over the arms* at the advanced post
guards the prisoners, and keeps sight of them, and
sufi'ers no one to converse with them without permis-
sion. They are only permitted to go to the sinks one
at a time, and under a sentinel.

If any one is to be passed out of camp at night, the
officer of the guard sends him under escort to the ad-

Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc. 335

vanced post, and the sergeant of the post has him
passed over the chain.

At retreat, the officer of the guard has the roll of
his f*uard cjilled, and inspects arms to see that they
are los^t^d and in order ; and visits the advanced posts
for the same purpose. The sergeant of the police
guard, accompanied by two armed soldiers, folds the
colors and lays them on the trestle in rear of the arms.
lie sees that the sutler's stores are then closed, and
the men leave them, and that the kitchen fires are put
out at the appointed hour.

The officer of the day satisfies himself frequently
during the night of the vigilance of the police guard
and advanced post. lie prescribes patrols and rounds
to be made by the officer and non-commissioned officers
of the guard. The officer of the guard orders them
when he thinks necessary. He visits the sentinels
frequently.

At reveille, the police guard takes arms ; the officer
of the guard inspects it and the advanced post. The
sergeant replants the colors in place. At retreat and
reveille the advanced post takes arms; the sergeant
makes his report to the officer of the guard when he
visits the post.

When necessary, the camp is covered at night with
small outposts, forming a double chain of sentinels.
These posts are under the orders of the commander
of the police guard, and are visited by his patrols and
rounds.

The officer of the guard makes his report of his tour
of service, including the advanced post, and sends it,
after the guard is marched off, to the officer of the
day.

When the regiment marches, the men of the police
guard return to their companies, except those of the
advanced post. In the cavalry, at the sound "boot
and saddle," the officer of the guard sends one half of
the men to saddle and pack ; when the regiment assem-
bles, all the men join it.

33G Honors Paid hy the Iroops, etc.

"When the camping party precedes the regiment, and
the new police guard marches with the camping party,
the guard, on reaching the camp, forms in line thirty
paces in front of the centre of the ground marked for
the regiment. The officer of the guard furnishes the
8entinels required by the commander of the camping
party. The advanced post takes its station.

The advanced post of the old police guard takes
charge of the prisoners on the march, and marches,
bayonets fixed, at the centre of the regiment. On
reaching camp, it turns over the prisoners to the new
advanced post.

PICKETS.

753. The detail for the picket is made daily, and is
composed of a lieutenant, two sergeants, four corporals,
a drummer, and about forty privates for each regi-
ment. For a smaller force, the picket is in proportion
to the strength of the detachment. The duty of the
pickets is to hold the enemy in check, and the points
which they take up should, if possible, be susceptible
of good defence ; such as villages, defiles, etc. : when
these advantages do not present themselves, temporary
obstacles, such abatis, etc., should be resorted to. The
points occupied by the pickets should be about mid-
way between the line of outposts and the position of
tlie main body.

Small posts should be thrown forward by the pick-
ets, between them and the line of grand guards. These
give greater security to the pickets, and furnish sup-
port to the grand guard.

GRAND GUARDS AND OUTPOSTS.

754. The numbers, strength, and position of grand
guards are regulated by the commanders of brigades ;
in detached corps, by the commanding oflficer. When

Honors Paid hy the Troops^ etc. 337

it can be done, the grand guards of infantry and cav-
alry are combined, the cavalry furnishing the advanced
sentinels. When the cavalry is weak, the grand
guards are infantry, but furnished v^'ith a few cavalry
soldiers, to get and carry intelligence of the enemy.

The strength of the grand guard of a brigade will
depend on the strength of the regiments, the nature
of the country, the position of the enemy, and the
disposition of the inhabitants. It is usually com-
manded by a captain.

Under the supervision of the generals of division
and brigade, the grand guards are especially under
the direction of a tield officer of the day in each bri-
gade. In case of necessity, captains may be added to
the roster of lieutenant-colonels and majors for this
detail.

Grand guards usually mount at the same time as
the other guards, but may mount before daybreak if
the general of brigade thinks it necovssary to double
the outposts at this time. In this case they assemble
and march without noise and during the march throw
out scouts ; this precaution should always be taken in
the first posting of a grand guard. The doubling of
guards weakens the corps and fatigues the men, and
should seldom b^ resorted to, and never when prepar-
ing to march or fight.

755. A grand guard is conducted to its post in the
first instance by the field officer of the day, guided by
one of the stafi" officers who accompanied the general
in his reconnoissance. After the post has been estab-
lished, the commander sends to the field officer of the
day, when necessary, a soldier of the guard to guide
the relieving guard to the post. He also sends to him
in the evening a corporal or trusty man of the guard,
for the note containing the parole and countersign,
and sends them before dark to the outposts. He will
not sufi'er his guard t© be relieved except by a guard
29

338 Honors Paid hy the Troops ^ etc.

of the brigade, or by special orders from competent
authority.

If there is no pass to be observed -or defended, the
grand guards are placed near the centre of the ground
they are to observe, on sheltered, and, if possible,
high ground, the better to conceal their strength and
observe the enemy ; they ought not to be placed near
the edge of a wood. When, during the day, they are
placed very near, or in sight of the enemy, they fall
back at night on parts selected farther to the rear.

After a grand guard is posted, the first care of the
commander and of the field officer of the day is to get
news of the enemy ; then to reconnoitre his position,
and the roads, bridges, fords, and defiles. This recon-
noissance determines the force and position of the out-
posts and their sentinels day and night. These posts,
when of infantry, should be about 200 paces in front
of the line of grand guards, and of cavalry from 600
to 800 ; and are commanded by officers or non-com-
missioned officers, according to their importance.
Cavalry posts may be relieved every four or eight
hours.

The commander of a grand guard receives detailed
instructions from the general and field officers of the
day of the brigade, and instructs the commanders of
the outposts as to their duties, and the arrangements
for the defence or retreat. The commanders of grand
guards may, in urgent cases, change the positions of
the outposts. If the outposts are to change their posi-
tion at night, they wait until the grand guard has
gotten its position, and darkness hides their move-
ments from the enemy ; then march silently and rapidly
under charge of an ofl&cer.

In detached corps, small posts of picked men are at
night sent forward on the roads by which the enemy
may attack or turn the position. They watch the
forks of the roads, keep silence, conceal themselves,
light no fires, and often change place. They announce

Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc. 339

the approach of in enemy hy signals agreed upon, and
retreat by routes examined during the day, to places
selected, and rejoin the guard at daybreak.
• Grand guards have special orders in each case, and
the following in all cases : to inform the nearest posts
and the field officer of the day, or the general of bri-
gade, of the march and movements of the enemy, and
of the attacks they receive or fear ; to examine every
person passing near the post, particularly those com-
ing from without ; to arrest suspicious persons, and
all soldiers and camp followers who try to pass out
without permission, and to send to the general, unless
otherwise directed all country people who come in.

756. All out-guards stand to arms at night on the
approach of patrols, rounds, or other parti* ; the sen-
tinel o"'^er the arms will call them out.

The sentinels and videttes are placed on points from
which they can see farthest, taking care not to break
their connection with each other or with their posts.
They are concealed from the enemy as much as pos-
sible by walla, or trees, or elevated ground. It is gen-
erally even of more advantage not to be seen than to
see far. They should not be placed near covers, where
the enemy may capture them. A sentinel should al-
ways be ready to fire; videttes carry their carbines
or pistols in their hands. A sentinel must be sure of
the presence of an enemy before he fires ; once satis-
fied of that, he must fire, though ^1 defence on his
part be useless, as the safety of the post may depend
on it. Sentinels fire on all persons deserting to the
enemy.

If a sentinel's post must be where he cannot com-
municate with the guard, a corporal and three men
are detached for it, or the sentinels are doubled, that
one may communicate with the guard. During the
day communication may be made by signals, such as
raising a cap or handkerchief. At night the sentinels
are placed on low ground, the better to see objects
against the sky.

340 Honors Paid hy the Troops, etc.

To lessen the duty of rounds, and* keep more men
on the alert at night, sentinels on outposts are relieved
every hour. To prevent sentinels from being sur-
prised, it is sometimes well to precede the countersign
by signals, such as striking the musket with the hand, 1
striking the hands together, etc. \

On the approach of any one at night, the outpost
sentinel orders — ''Halt!'' If the order is not obeyed |
after being repeated once, he fires. If obeyed, he >
calls — '* Wlio goes there?" If answered — ""Rounds" '
or ^'Patrol" he says — ''Advance tvith the countersign."
If more than one advance at the same time, or the
person who advances fails to give the countersign or
signal agreed on, the sentinel fires, and falls back on
his guard. * The sentinel over the arms, as soon as his
hail is answered, turns out the guard, and the corpo-
ral goes to reconnoitre. When it is desirable to hide
the position of the sentinel from the enemy, the hail
is replaced hj signals ; the sentinels give the signal,
and those approaching the counter signal.

With raio troops, or when the light troops of the
enemy are numerous and active, and when the country
is broken or wooded, the night stormy or dark, senti-
nels should be doubled. In this case, while one
watches, the other, called a flying sentinel, moves
about, examining the paths and hollows.

The commanders of grand guards visit the sentinels
often ; change their positions when necessary ; make
them repeat their orders ; teach them under what cir-
cumstances and at what signals to retire, and par-
ticularly not to fall back directly on their guard if
pursued, but to lead the enemy in a circuit.

757. At night, half the men of the grand guard ofi"
post watch under arms, while the rest lie down, arms
by their side. The horses are always bridled ; the
horsemen hold the reins and must not sleep. An hour
before break of day, infantry grand guards stand to
arms, and cavalry mount. At the outposts some of

Honors Paid hy the Troops j etc. 341

the infantry are all night under arms, some of the
cavalry on horseback.

The commander of a grand guard regulates the
numbers, the hours, and the march of patrols and
routids, according to the strength of his command,
and the necessity for precaution ; and, accompanied
by those who are to command the patrols and rounds
during the night, he will reconnoitre all the routes
they are to follow. Patrols and rounds march slowly,
in silence, and with great precaution ; halt frequently
to listen and examine the ground. The rounds con-
sist of an officer or non-commissioned officer, and two
or three men. Towards the break of day the patrols
ought to be more frequent, and sent to greater dis-
tances. They examine the hollow ways and ground
likely to conceal an enemy, but with great caution, to
avoid being cut off, or engaged in an unequal coml)at;
if they meet the enemy, they fire and attempt to stop
his march. While the patrols are out, the outposts are
under arms.

Cavalry patrols should examine the country to a
greater distance than infantry, and report to the in-
fantry guard every thing they observe. The morning
patrols and scouts do not return until broad daylight ;
and when they return, the night sentinels are with-
drawn, and the posts for the day resumed.

On their return, commanders of patrols report in
regard to the ground and everything they have ob-
served of the movements of the enemy, or of his posts,
and the commander of the grand guard reports to the
field officers of the day. The fires of grand guards
should be hidden by a wall, ditch, or other screen. To
deceive the enemy, fires are sometimes made on unoc-
cupied ground. Fires are not permitted at small posts
liable to surprise.

If a body of troops attempt to enter the camp at
night, unless their arrival has been announced, or the
commander is known te, or is the bearer of a written

342 Honors Paid hy the TroopSj etc.

order to the commander of the grand guard, he stops
thera, and sends the command under escort to the
field oflficer of the day, and at the same time warns
the posts near him.

Bearers of flags are not permitted to pass the outer
chain of sentinels ; their faces are turned from the
post or army ; if necessary their eyes are bandaged ;
a non-commissioned officer stays with them to prevent
indiscretion on the part of sentinels.

The commander of the guard receipts for dispatches,
and sends thera to the field officer of the day or gene-
ral of brigade, and dismisses the bearer ; but if he
has discovered what ought to be concealed from the
enemy, he is detained as long as necessary.

Deserters are disarmed at the outposts, and sent to
the commander of the grand guard, who gets from
them all the information he can concerning the enemy.
Jf many come at night, they are received cautiously,
a few at a time. They are sent in the morning to the
field officer of the day, or to the nearest post or camp,
to be conducted to the general of the brigade. All
suspected persons are secreted by the commanders of
the outposts.

ARTICLE XIII.

DUTIES OF CAPTAINS— COMPANIES— DUTIES
IN CAMP AND GARRISON, Etc.

758. Captains or commanders of companies fill one
of the most important stations in the service, when
they are viewed in relation to the direct influence they
exercise ypon the soldiery ; to them attaches the high
responsibility of the instruction, good order, efficiency,
and discipline of their companies ; and no one should
be willing to accept the post who is not qualified, or
ready to qualify himself, for a faithful discharge of all
the duties of the office.

It is the duty of every captain to make himself
familiar with tactics, or at least so much of it as will
enable him to command his company properly in every
situation ; and to become perfectly acquainted with its
interior management.

In the case of vacancy in the office of captain, or in
his absence, the command of the company devolves on
the officer next in rank. Captains should require their
lieutenants to assist them in the performance of all
company duties, the knowledge thus acquired being
essential to every company officer.

762. When a militia company is called into service,
the captain should, at the earliest possible moment,
have it properly uniformed and equipped, and taught
how to take care of its arms, clothing, etc. ; each man
should be provided with his knapsack, haversack,
blanket, knife and fork, spoon, tin plate, and cup.

Canteens are also necessary in most cases; they are
"worn over the haversack.

344 Duties of captains — companiesj etc.

763. The captain should cause the men of his com-
pany to be numbered in a regular series, including
the non-commissioned officers, and divided into several
squads, each to be put under the charge of a non-com-
missioned officer. As far as practicable, the men of
each squad are quartered together.

Each of the lieutenants is charged with a squad for
the supervision of its order and cleanliness ; and cap-
tains should require their subalterns to assist them in
the performance of all company duties.

The utmost attention should be paid by captains to
the cleanliness of their men, as to their persons, cloth-
ing, arms, accoutrements, and equipments, and also
as to their quarters or tents. jr

The name of each soldier should be labelled on his
bunk in quarters, and his company number should be
placed against his arms and accoutrements.

The arms are placed in arm-racks, the stoppers in
the muzzles, the cocks let down, and the bayonets in
their scabbards, the accoutrements suspended over the
arms,- and the swords or sabres, when these are worn,
hung by the belts on pegs.

The knapsack of each man should be placed at the
foot of his bunk when he is in quarters, packed with
his effects, and ready to be slung ; the overcoat rolled,
strapped, and placed under the knapsack ; the cap on
a shelf, and his boots well cleaned. Dirty clothes
should be kept in an appropriate part of the knap-
sack ; nothing to be put under the bedding.

Cooking utensils and table furniture should be clean,
and in their appropriate places ; blacking and brushes
out of sight ; the fuel in boxes.

The cleaning up should take place at least once a
week. The chiefs of squads should cause bunks and
bedding to be overhauled, floors cleaned, and arms,
accoutrements, etc., all put in order.

Non-commissioned officers, in charge of squads,
should be held immediately responsible that their men

Duties of captains — companies^ etc. 845

observe what is prescribed above; that they wash their
hands and faces daily ; that they brush or comb their
heads and beards ; tnat those who go on duty put their
arms, accoutrements, dress, etc., in the best order.

Commanders of companies should see that the arms
and accoutrements in possession of the men are always
kept in good order, and that proper care is taken in
cleaning them.

Arms should not be taken to pieces without permission
of an officer. Bright barrels should be kept clean and
free from rust without polishing them ; care should be
taken not to bruise or bend the barrel. After firing,
wash out the bore, wipe it dry, and then pass a bit of
cloth slightly greased, to the bottom. In these opera-
tions, a rod of wood with a loop on one end is to be
used instead of the rammer. The barrel, when not in
use, should bo closed with a stopper. For exerwse,
each man should keep himself provided with a piece
of sole leather to fit the cap or countersink of the ham-
mer, to prevent breaking the nipple.

Arms should not be left loaded in armories; quarters,
or tents, or when the men are ofi" duty, except by
special orders. The ammunition in the possession of
the men should be inspected frequently, and any dam-
aged, wasted, or lost by neglect, should be paid for.

In camp or quarters, the officers should visit the
kitchen daily and inspect the kettles, food, etc., and
at all times carefully attend to the messing and econ-
omy of their companies.

The company rations are usually taken charge of by
the orderly sergeant, and issued daily to the cooks by
whom they are prepared and served to the company.
The men of the company serve in turn as cooks, two
being the usual number serving at once. AVhen in
camp, the men present themselves at meal times to
the cooks, who issue to each man in turn his proper
allowance ; in garrison, or quarters the tables are set

346 Duties 0/ captains — companies^ etc.

out, and the cooks place each man's ration on his plate,
and in his cup, before the compaijy is marched in.

When not actually in the field the ration is in most
cases more than sufficient, so that by care on the part
of the orderly sergeant and cooks, there is more or
less saved on the rations of the company ; this saving
is sold for the benefit of the company, and constitutes
what is denominated the Company Fund,

DUTIES IN CAMP AND GARRISON.

764. The duties in camp and garrison are to be con-
ducted, as far as practicable, in the same manner and
on the same principles.

The Reveille is the signal for the men to rise, and
the ^entinels to leave off challenging. It is usually
soutided at the dawn of day, except when the troops
are on the march, when the signal may be sounded at
a much earlier hour. The men form on their com-
pany parade grounds, and as soon as thejeveille ceases
the rolls are called by the orderly sergeants, superin-
tended hy a commissioned officer.

Immediately after the roll call, (after stable duty in
the cavalry and light artillery), the tents or quarters
should be put in order by the men of the companies,
superintended by chiefs of squads ; the parades, streets
of the camp, etc., are cleaned by the police party of
the day, in charge of a non-commissioned officer, and
superintended by the officer of the day, and the guard
house or guard tent by the guard or the prisoners, if
there are any.

Breakfast call is sounded at — o'clock in the morn-
ing, and is the signal for breakfast.

The Troop sounds at — o'clock in the morning for
the purpose of assembling the men for duty, inspection
at guard mounting, and morning dress parade, when
the commanding officer commands it.

Duties of captains — companies^ etc. 347

The Surgeon's call is to sound or beat at — o'clock
in the morning, when the sick, able to go about, are
conducted to the hospital by the first sergeants of com-
panies, who hand to the surgeon a list of all the sick
in the company.

After the surgeon has passed upon the sick, the first
sergeants proceed to make off the morning reports of
their companies, which, after being signed by their
captains, are taken to regimental head quarters at first
sergeant's call.

The morning report of the company is made off in
a book kept for that purpose, called the morning report
hook.

The Dinner call is sounded at — o'clock, and is the
signal for dinner.

The Retreat is sounded at sunset, when there is a
roll-call and the orders for the day are read. When
the weather permits, there is a dress parade at retreat,
and the orders are read out at the close of it. Each
regiment or battalion has an independent parcde, com-
manded by the colonel.

The Tattoo is sounded at — o'clock in the evening,
when the rolls are called ; no soldier is allowed to be
out of his tent or quarters after this hour, without
special permission.

The Drummers' call is beaten by the drums of the
police guard five minutes before the time of beating
the stated calls, when the field music assembles before
the colors of their respective regiments, and as soon
as the beat begins on the right is taken up along the
line.

Calls for drills are sounded at such hours as the
commanding officer may designate.

765. Daily duties must be announced in order, and
the officers to perform them are detailed according to
the rules of the roster.

The number and rank of the officers for daily duty,
are to be regulated by the strength and circumstances

348 Duties of captains — companies j etc,

of the camp or garrison ; th« officers detailed for duty,
should remain in or about the camp or garrison during
their tours of duty.

Besides the officers detailed for guard duty, the offi-
cers for daily duties in large commands are as follows :

JL General officet^ of the day for each division ; afeld
officer of the day for each brigade ; and a regimental
officer of the day for each regiment.

In camps or garrisons of one regiment or less, the
officers are as follows : officer of the day, and officer of
the guard.

The General of the day is to superintend the regu-
larity and discipline of the camp of the division, visit
the guards and outposts, call out and inspect the
guards as often and at such times as he thinks proper ;
to receive all reports of guards, and make immediate
communication of any extraordinary circumstances,
to his commanding officer, or to the General-in-chief.

The Field officer of the day has the immediate super-
intendence of the camp of the brigade ; he is to be
present at the mounting and dismounting of the bri-
gade or grand guards ; he is to call them out to inspect
them ; to order such patrols, posts, and outposts as
may be necessary ; to see that the grand guard is vigi-
lant, that none are absent, and that their arms and
accoutrements are in order; that the officers and non-
commissioned officers are acquainted with their duty,
and that the sentries are properly posted, and have
received proper orders.

The Regimental officer of the day in each regiment,
and in commands less than a regiment, is charged
with the order and cleanliness of the camp or garri-
son ; he has the calls beaten by the drummer of the
police guard ; he attends the parading of the guards,
and orders the roll to be called frequently and at unex-
pected periods, and reports everything extraordinary
to the commander of the garrison or camp ; he is to
visit the hospital at various hours and make a report

Duties of captains — companies, etc. 349

of its state to the commanding oflBcer. He should
satisfy himself frequently during the night, of the
vigilance of the police guard, and prescribe patrols and
rounds to be made by the oflBcer of the guard. He
should give attention to the condition of the sinks, the
regulation of the camp fires, the removal of rubbish,
etc. ; and for these purposes a fatigue party will be
furnished him when necessary.

CAMPS.
Camp of Infantry.

7G6. Each company has its tents in two files, facing
on a street perpendicular to the color line. The width
of the street depends on the front of the camp, but
should not be less than five paces. The interval be-
tween the ranks of tents is two paces ; between the
files of tents of adjacent companies, two paces ; be-
tween regiments, twenty-two paces.

The color line* is ten paces in front of the front
rank of tents. The kitchens are twenty paces behind
the rear rank of company tents ; the non-commis-
sioned staflf and sutler, twenty paces in rear of the
kitchens ; the company oflftcers, twenty paces farther
in rear ; and the field and staflf, twenty paces in rear
of the company oflficers.

The company oflficers are in rear of their respective
companies ; the captains on the right.

The colopel and lieutenant-colonel are near the cen-
tre of the line of field and staflf; the adjutant, a major
and surgeon, on the right; the quartermaster, a ma-
jor and assistant surgeon, on the left.

The police guard is at the centre of the line of the
non-commissioned staflf, the tents facing to the front,
the stacks of arms on theleft.

The advanced post of the police guard is about 200
* paces in front of the color line, and opposite the centre
30

350 Duties of captains — companies^ etc.

of the regiment or on the best ground ; the prisoners*
tent about four paces in rear. In a regiment of the
second line, the advanced post of the police guard is
200 paces in rear of the line of its field and staff.

The horses of the staff officers and of the baggage
train are twenty-five paces in rear of the tents of the
field and staff; the wagons are parked on the same
line, and the men of the train camped near them.

The sinks of the men are 150 paces in front of the
color line — those of the officers 100 paces in rear of
the train. Both are concealed by bushes. When
convenient, the sinks of the men may be placed in
rear or on a flank. A portion of the earth dug out
for sinks to be thrown back occasionally.

The front of the camp of a regiment of 1000 men
in two ranks will be 400 paces, or one-fifth less paces
than the number of files, if the camp is to have the
same front as the troops in order of battle. But the
front may be reduced to 190 paces by narrowing the
company streets to five paces ; and if it be desirable
to reduce the front still more, the tents of companies
may be pitched in single file — those of a division
facing on the same street.

Cantonments.

770. The cavalry should be placed under shelter
whenever the distance from the enemy, and from the
ground where the troops are to form for battle, permit
it. Taverns and farm-houses, with large i^tables and
free access, are selected for quartering them.

The colonel indicates the place of assembling in
case of alarm. It should generally be outside the
cantonment; the egress from it should be free; the
retreat upon the other positions secure, and roads
leading to it on the side of the enemy obstructed.

The necessary orders being given, as in establish-
ing a camp, the picket and grand guards are posted.

Duties of captains — companies j etc. 351

A sentinel may be placed on a steeple or high house,
and then the troops are marched to the quarters. The
men sleep in the stables, if it is thought necessary.

The above applies in the main to infantry. Near
the enemy, companies or platoons should be collected,
as much as possible, in the same houses. If compa-
nies must be separated, they should be divided by
platoons or squads. All take arms at daybreak.

When cavalry and infantry canton together, the
latter furnish the guards by ^jjpht, and the former by
day.

Troops cantoned in presence of the enemy should
be covered by advanced guards and natural or arti-
ficial obstacles. Cantonments taken during a cessa-
tion of hostilities should be established in rear of a
line of defence, and in front of the point on which the
troops would concentrate to receive an attack. The
general commanding-in-chief assigns the limits of
their cantonments to the divisions, the commanders of
divisions to brigades, and the commanders of brigades
post theil* regiments. The position for each corps in
case of attack is carefully pointed out by the generals.

Marches.

771. For marching, the force, if a large one, is di-
vided into as many columns as circumstances permit,
■without weakening any one too much. The object of
the movement and the nature of the ground deter-
mine the order of march, the kind of troops in each
column, and the number of columns. They ought to
preserve their communications, and be within sup-
porting distance of each other. The commander of
each column ought to know the strength and direction
of the others.

The advance and rear-guards are usually light
troops ; their strength and composition depend on the
nature of the ground and the position of the enemy.

352 Duties of captains — companies^ etc.

They serve to cover the movements of the army, and
to hold the enemy in check until the general has time
to make his arrangements.

The ^'general'' sounded one hour before the time of
marching, is the signal to strike tents, to load the
wagons, pack horses, etc., and send them to the place
of assembling. The fires are then put out, and care
taken to avoid burning straw, etc., or giving the en-
emy any other indication of the movements.

The " march " beatAin the infantry, and the " ad-
vance" is sounded in the cavalry, in succession, as
each is to take its place in the column. The infantry
forms in column of companies or platoons ; the cav-
alry in column of twos, fours, or of platoons ; and the
artillery by sections.

When the army should form suddenly to meet the
enemy, the '^ long-roll" is beat, and.*'i!o horse"
sounded. The troops form rapidly in front of their
camp.

Batteries of artillery and their caissons move with
the corps to which they are attached ; the field train
and ambulances march at the rear of the column ; and
the baggage with the rear-guard.

After the march has commenced, the troops habit-
ually take the route step. The men should not be
allowed to straggle, or leave ranks for any but a ne-
cessary purpose, and then but for a few moments at a
time.

The general and field officers frequently stop, or
send officers to the rear, to see that the troops march
in the prescribed order, and keep their distances.

In approaching a defile, the colonels are warned ;
they close their regiments as they come up ; each reg-
iment passes separately, at an accelerated pace, and in
as close order as possible. The leading regiment hav-
ing passed, and left room enough for the whole col-
umn in close order, halts, and moves again as soon as
the last regiment is through. In the cavalry, each

Duties of captains — companies^ etc. 353

squadron, before quickening the pace to rejoin the
column, takes its original order of march.

When a march is to be continued from day to day,
the daily march should commence at a very early
hour ; the rate of going should be as regular as possi-
ble, not more than two and a half miles an hour ; and
the guides should be careful to preserve their distance,
so as to prevent oscillations in the rear of the column,
which are verv fatiguing to the men. At the expira-
tion of every Iiour, or little more, the halt is sounded,
when the men are allowed to take their ease for about
ten minutes, when the march is resumed. In this
way a day's march of twenty miles or more may be
made by mid-day, or a little later: the men get their
dinners after getting into camp, have the afternoon to
rest, wash their clothing, clean their arms, etc., and
are fresh for an early start on the following day.

In forced marches, or where the march is a long one,
the halt at noon may be from an hour to an hour and
a half, when the men may loosen their belts, take a
lunch, smoke and take their ease in any way they
choose, until the hour for resuming the march ; the
march may be continued until the middle of the after-
noon, and still the men will have time to get their cup of
hot coffee for supper, and make themselves comfortable
for the night. The march of the first two days should
be short, after that it may be increased to the required
number of miles ; the march from day to day should
be as nearly of equal length as the convenience of
fuel and water, etc., for camping purposes will admit.

772. A camping party, headed by the quartermaster
of the command, precedes the column for the purpose
of selecting and marking off the camp before the arri-
val of the troops. The camp is marked by placing
camp-colors on the line intended for the color line of
the command.

When the column reaches the camp-ground, the in-
fantry comes into line on the color line.

354 Duties of captains — companies^ etc.

The number of men to be furnished for guards,
pickets and orderlies ; the fatigue parties to be sent
for wood and water for the cooks, etc.; the hour of
marching, etc., are then announced by the brigadier-
genera-ls to the colonels, and by them to the field offi-
cers— the adjutant and captains formed in front of the
regiment, the first sergeants taking post behind their
captains. The adjutant then makes the details, and
the first sergeants warn the men. The regimental
officer of the day forms the picket, and sends the
guards to their posts. The colors are then planted at
the centre of the color line, and the arms are stacked
on the line. The fatigue parties proceed to their du-
ties, and the men of the company not on detail pitch
the tents.

SOLDIER'S RATIONS

AND MODE OF COOKINGfc.THEM.

The regular daily ration of food issued to the troops
in the Confederate States service, is.three-fourths pound
of fresh or salt beef; eighteen ounces of bread, or one
and a fourth pounds of corn meal, and at the rate of
one hundred rations of eight quarts of peas or beans,
or, in lieu thereof, ten pounds of rice; six pounds of
coffee, twelve pounds of sugar, four quarts of vinegar,
and one and a half pounds of tallow, or one and a
fourth pounds of adamantine, or one pound of sperm
candles ; four pounds of soap, and two quarts of salt.

On a campaign, or on marches, or on board trans-
ports, the ration of hard bread is one pound.

Fresh beef, when it can be procured, should be fur-
nished at least twice a week ; the beef to be procured,
if possible, by contract.

RECEIPTS.

Soldier\<i Soup for 25 Men. — Take 15 quarts of
water to 25 pounds of meat, 2 small tablespoonfuls of
salt, half a one of pepper ; about two pounds of rice,
put in while boiling, and what vegetables, fresh or
preserved, that can be procured — say three pounds.

Po7'k Soup for 25 Men. — In G gallons of cold water
put 12 pounds of pork, 3 quarts of beans, 2 pounds of
rice, season to suit; let boil one hour and a half; soak
the beans overnight

Irish Stew for Men. — Take 25 pounds mutton, veal,
beef, or pork, cut into pieces six inches square, 4
pounds of onions, 8 pounds of potatoes, 4 tablespoon-

356 Soldier^s Rations^ etc.

fuls of salt, 1 of pepper, 8 quarts of water ; cook it from
one to two hours, slowly, thicken the gravy with flour
mixed into smooth paste with water or potatoes
mashed fine.

Tea for 25 J^en. — Allow 12 quarts of water ; put
the rations of tea — a large teaspoonful to each — in a
cloth tied up very loosely, throw it into the boiler
while it is boiling hard for a moment ; then take oflf the
boiler, cover it, and let it stand full 10 minutes, when
it will be ready for use ; first add sugar and milk, if to
be had, at the rate of 3 pints or 2 quarts of milk, and 1
or 1| pounds of sugar.

Pork with Peas or Beans for 25 Men. — To 14 pounds
of pork add 6 pounds of peas or beans, put them in a
cloth to boil, tying it very loosely ; place them both in
the boiler, let them boil about two hours ; then take
out the pork, add some flour to the gravy, and put the
peas or beans in it, with two or three onions cut up
fine ; let it boil a little longer, mash up the vegetables
very finely, and serve them round the dish with the
meat.

Plain Steived Meat for 25 Mem. — Take 14 pounds of
mutton, beef, veal or pork, cut it into chunks and put
it into the boiler ; add 4 quarts of water, 2 quarts to a
teaspoonful of salt and half teaspoonful of pepper, 8 or
10 onions cut in pieces ; let it boil half an hour, then
let it stew slowly from half an hour to one hour longer,
adding one pound of rice, potatoes, or any vegetable
that can be obtained ; thicken the gravy with flour
mixed to a smooth paste in cold water.

Salt Pork ivith Potatoes and Cahbage for 25 Men. —
Take 15 pounds of pork, extract the bones, 3 pounds
of potatoes, 2 winter cabbages, let it boil for two hours,
10 quarts of water, serve the meat with the vegetable
round it; the gravy will make a good broth with peas,
beans or rice added, also a little onion. Ship bis-
cuit broken into the broth makes a very nutricious
soup. *

Solflier's Rations^ etc. 357

To Fry any kind of Meat. — Get your frying pan
very hot, put in some fat pork which will immediately
melt, then put in the meat you wish to fry ; (a small
teaspoonful of salt, and a quarter of a teaspoonful of
pepper, to every pound of meat ;) when done, lay the
meat on a dish, add one pint of water to the fat in the
frying pan, a few slices of onion, or two teaspoonfuls
of vinegar; thicken it with a little flour and pour
it over the cooked meat. Any sauce, or a few chopped
pickles may be substituted for the vinegar or onions.

Co (fee for 25 Men, — Take 12 quarts of water, when
it boils add 20 ounces of coifec, mix it well, and leave
it on the fire till it commences to boil, then take it off,
and pour into it a little more than one quart of cold
water, let it stand in a warm place full 10 minutes ;
the dregs will settle to the bottom, and the coffee be
perfectly clear. Pour it then into another vessel,
leaving the dregs in the first. Add sugar, four tea-
spoonfuls to the quart. If you can get milk, leave
out five quarts of water in the above receipt; and put
milk in its place.

Peas or Bean Soup for 25 Men. — Take 14 pounds of
pork, 8 quarts peas, or beans, 20 quarts of water, 25
teaspoonfuls of sugar, 12 of pepper, and several large
onions ; boil gently till the vegetables are soft — from
four to five hours.

Receipt for a small quantity of Mashed Meat. — Cut
the meat in very small pieces; heat the frying pan ;
put into it one pint of water, half a teaspoonful of
salt, and a teaspoonful of flour, and let it cook fifteen
minutes. Salt meat must be cooked the same, omit-
ting the salt, in its place putting a small teaspoonful
of sugar, spices, or pickles, chopped tine. Dish it on
some ship biscuit. Steak, chops, sausages, bacon,
slices of any kind of meat, can be cooked in a frying
pan, with a little melted fat at the bottom-. Salt meat
should always be soaked. — VeiVs Hand-Book of Active
Service.

SUGGESTIONS TO SOLDIERS.

In an ordinary campaign sickness disables or de-
stroys three times as many as the sword.

On a march, from April to November, the entire
clothing should be a colored flannel shirt, with a loosely
buttoned collar, cotton drawers, woolen pantaloons,
shoes and stockings, and a light-colored felt hat, with
broad brim to protect the eyes and face from the glare
of the sun and from the rain, and a substantial but
not heavy coat when off duty.

Sun-stroke is most effectually prevented by wearing
a silk handkerchief in the crown of the hat.

Colored blankets are best, and if lined with brown
drilling the warmth and durability are doubled, while
the protection against dampness from lying on the
ground is almost complete.

Never lie or sit down on the grass or bare earth for
a moment; rather use your hat — a handkerchief, even,
is a great protection. The warmer you are the greater
need for this protection, as a damp vapor is immedi-
ately generated, to be absorbed by the clothing, and
to cool you off too rapidly.

While marching, or on other active duty, the more
thirsty you are the more essential is it to safety of life
itself to rinse out the mouth two or three times, and
then take a swallow of water at a tinfe, with short
intervals. A brave French General, on a forced march,
fell dead on the instant by drinking largely of cold
water, when snow was on the ground.

Abundant sleep is essential to bodily efficiency, and
to that alertness of mind which is all-important in an
engagement ; and few things more certainly and more

Suggestions to Soldiers. 359

effectually prevent sound sleep than eating heartily
after sundown, especially after a heavy march or des-
perate battle.

Nothing is more certain to secure endurance and
capability of long-continued effort, than the avoidance
of everything as a drink except cold water, not exclu-
ding coffee at breakfast. Drink as little as possible of
even cold water.

After any sort of exhausting effort, a cup of coffee,
hot or cold, is an admirable sustainer of the strength,
until nature begins to recover herself.

Never eat heartily just before a great undertaking ;
because the nervous power is irresistibly drawn to
the stomach to manage the food eaten, thus drawing
off that supply which the brain and muscle so much
need.

If persons will drink brandy, it is incomparably
safer to do so after an effort than before ; for it can
give only a transient strength, lasting but a few min-
utes ; but as it can never be known how long any given
effort is t<$ be kept in continuance, and if longer than
tJHe few minutes, the body becomes more feeble than
it would have been without the stimulus, it is clear
that its use before an effort is always hazaydous and is
always unwise.

Never go to sleep, especially after a great effort, even
in hot weather, without some covering over you.

Under all circumstances, rather than lie down on
the bare ground, lie in the hollow of two logs placed
together, or across several smaller pieces of wood, laid
side by side ; or sit on your hat, leaning against a
tree. A nap of ten or fifteen minutes in that position
will refresh you more than an hour on the bare earth,
with the additional advantage of perfect safety.

A cut is less dangerous than a bullet wound and
heals more rapidly.

If from any wound the blood spirts out in jets, in-
stead of a steady stream, you will die in a few min-

360 Suggestions to Soldiers.

utes unless it is remedied; because an artery has been
divided, and that takes the blood directly from the
fountain of life. To stop this instantly, tie a hand-
kerchief or other cloth very loosely between the wound
and the heart; put a stick, bayonet, or ramrod between
the skin and the handkerchief, and twist around until
the bleeding ceases, and keep it thus until the surgeon
arrives.

If the blood flows in a slow, regular stream, a vein
has been pierced, and the handkerchief must be on
the other side of the wound from the heart — that is,
helow the wound.

A bullet through the abdomen (belly or stomach) is
more certainly fatal than if aimed at the head or heart ;
for in the latter cases the bill is often glanced off by
the bone, or follow's round it under the skin ; but when
it enters the stomach or bowels, from any direction,
death is inevitable under all conceivable circuhistancs,
but is scarcely ever instantaneous.

Let the whole beard grow, but not longer than some
three inches. This strengthens and thickens its
growth, and thus makes a more perfect protection for
the lungs against dust, and of the throat against winds
and cold in winter, while in the summer a greater
perspiration of the skin is induced, with an increase of
evaporation ; hence greater coolness of the parts on
the outside, while the throat is less feverish, thirsty,
and dry.

Avoid fats and fat meat in summer and all warm
days.

Whenever possible, take a plunge into any lake or
running stream every morning as soon as you get up. If
none at hand, endeavor to wash the body all over as
soon as you leave your bed, for cleanliness acts like a
charm against all diseases, always either warding them
off altogether, or greatly mitigating their severity and
shortening their duration.

Date Due

,73.ni R526

176384

<4m

'.^IJ: --^.'''^ \

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "A manual of infantry and rifle tactics, with honors paid by the troops, inspections--reviews, &c"

See other formats